EXAM PAPERS PLUS BLOG   >  11+

11+

Established in 1913, Southend High School for Girls is located on Southchurch Boulevard in Southend-on-Sea, Essex. The school has academy status and caters for pupils aged between 11 and 18. The school is rated as ‘outstanding’ by Ofsted in all 31 inspection areas. Southend High School for Girls specialises in languages, and all Key Stage 3 pupils select two languages to study from a choice of French, German and Spanish.

 

11 Plus Exam Information for Southend High School for Girls

 

Address: Southend High School for Girls, Southchurch Boulevard, Southend-on-Sea, SS2 4UZ

Admissions Info: admissions@shsg.org

School Type: Girls’ Grammar

Number of pupils: 1036 (approx.)

Number of places in year 7: 180

Open day date: July

Exam date: September

Exam board type: CSSE (Essex 11 Plus)

 

For more information on Southend High School for Girls’ admissions policy, please visit the school’s admissions page. Parents can also take a look at the admissions policy document here.

 

How to Apply for 11 Plus Entry to Southend High School for Girls

 

Before applying for a Year 7 place at Southend High School for Girls, parents and students are encouraged to visit the school during its open day, which takes place in July. More information about the school’s open day events can be found here.

 

To apply for a Year 7 place, parents need to complete the CSSE registration form, which can be done online on their website. A Supplementary Information Form (SIF), can also be obtained from the CSSE website.

 

Southend High School for Girls’ 11 Plus Exam Format

 

All CSSE members use the same 11 Plus selection test to ensure that students only need to take one exam. The Southend High School for Girls 11 Plus exam consistes of two tests, covering English and Maths.

 

The English test focuses on comprehension, grammar, vocabulary, creative writing, verbal reasoning and literacy. The Maths paper is based on topics from the KS2 National Curriculum and non-verbal reasoning questions.

 

The test scores are age-standardised and offers of places are dependent on passing the selection tests. However, it should be noted that passing the selection tests is not a guarantee of being offered a place.

 

Test results are sent to parents by first class post in October.

 

How to Prepare for the Southend High School for Girls’ 11 Plus Exam

 

In addition to working from a study timetable, at Exam Papers Plus, we recommend that students use 11 Plus practice tests to get used to the types of questions they may be asked on exam day. We specialise in producing practice exam papers that are similar in style to those used in the CSEE 11 Plus exam. When used under timed exam conditions, our tests can also help improve students’ time management skills.

 

Students who are currently preparing for the Southend High School for Girls’ 11 Plus exam will find the following resources useful:

 

English

 

The CSSE 11+ English paper can include both multiple-choice and open-answer comprehension questions, as well as a writing section and reasoning section.

For multiple-choice comprehension practice, we’d recommend:

 

11+ English Pack 1

11+ English Pack 2 

11+ English Pack 3

11 Plus Comprehension (Fiction)

11 Plus Comprehension (Non-fiction)

 

For open-answer comprehension and writing practice, we’d recommend these resources:

 

11 Plus English Pack 1 (Open Answer)

11 Plus English Pack 2 (Open Answer)

11 Plus English Pack 3 (Open Answer)

11 Plus Writing Prompts

 

For the reasoning section, we’d recommend these practice tests:

 

11+ Verbal Reasoning Pack 1

11+ Verbal Reasoning Pack 2

11+ Verbal Reasoning Pack 3

 

Maths

 

The CSSE 11+ Maths paper covers the KS2 syllabus (including problem solving and arithmetic) as well as some non-verbal reasoning. The maths questions are not multiple-choice.

 

For Maths practice, we’d recommend:

 

11 Plus Mathematics Pack 1 (Open Answer)

11 Plus Mathematics Pack 2 (Open Answer)

11 Plus Mathematics Pack 3 (Open Answer)

11 Plus Mental Arithmetic (Open Answer)

 

For Non-Verbal Reasoning practice, we’d recommend this resource:

 

11+ Non-Verbal Reasoning Pack 1

 

The information provided about Southend High School for Girls was believed to be correct at the time of publishing. However, please be aware of future changes. We advise you to contact the school directly if you are unsure of anything. School contact details are provided within the post.

11+

Screenshot of the Southend High School for Boys website

Established in 1895, Southend High School for Boys is a selective grammar school with academy status, located in Prittlewell in Southend-on-Sea, Essex. The school is often referred to as SHSB, and teaches pupils aged between 11 and 18. Admission to Southend High School for Boys is dependent on student performance in a selective 11 Plus test, which is set by the Consortium of Selective Schools in Essex (CSSE). The school is rated as ‘outstanding’ by Ofsted and consistently produces good GCSE results.

 

11 Plus Exam Information for Southend High School for Boys

 

Address: Prittlewell Chase, Southend-on-Sea, Essex SS0 0RG

Admissions Info: enquiries@shsb.org.uk

School Type: Boys’ Grammar

Number of pupils: 1150 (approx.)

Number of places in year 7: 150

Open day date: June

Exam date: September

Exam board type: CSSE (Essex 11 Plus)

 

Southend High School for Boys 11 Plus Admissions

 

Entry to Southend High School for Boys is dependent on student performance in the 11+ exam. Full details of the school’s admissions policy can be found in the Southend Borough Council booklet on Secondary School Admissions.

 

In instances where there are more applicants than available places, the school uses the following over-subscription criteria, giving priority to:

 

  • Looked After and previously Looked After children
  • Children who pass the selection tests and who have named the school in the EHCP
  • Children whose parents’ primary residence is within the priority area

 

For further details on the school’s admissions criteria, please see the school’s admission pages, here.

 

How to Apply for 11 Plus Entry to Southend High School for Boys

 

Prior to applying for a Year 7 place at Southend High School for Boys, parents and students are invited to visit the school during its Open Day, which takes place in June. At the event, the headteacher will make a welcome speech and students and parents will have the opportunity to tour the school. There is no need to book a place on the Open Day, interested students can simply turn up to the event.

 

To register for a Year 7 place, parents need to complete two forms – the CSSE registration form, which is available on the CSSE website, and a Supplementary Information Form (SIF), also available from the CSSE website.

 

Additionally, parents living in Essex need to state their child’s preferred secondary schools on the Essex Common Application Form (CAF), which is available in the LEA Secondary School Admission booklet.

 

Please note that only boys who have been entered for the test will be considered for admission.

 

Southend High School for Boys 11 Plus Exam Format

 

The CSSE 11 Plus exam has two written papers in maths and English, which are usually taken in September. There is only one selection test for schools that are members of the CSSE to ensure that students don’t need to sit several tests.

 

The English paper tests for comprehension, grammar and vocabulary, creative writing, verbal reasoning and literacy.

 

The Maths paper contains questions based on topics from the KS2 National Curriculum, as well as some non-verbal reasoning questions.

 

The test scores are age-standardised to ensure that older pupils don’t have an unfair advantage.

 

How to Prepare for the Southend High School for Boys’ 11 Plus Exam

 

One of the most effective ways for students to prepare for the CSSE 11 Plus exam is to work from a study schedule that outlines what topics need to be covered and when. At Exam Papers Plus, we also recommend that parents introduce practice tests into their child’s study routine to improve their exam technique.

 

We specialise in publishing practice exam papers in a similar style to those used in the CSEE 11 Plus exam. Our tests help students become familiar with the types of questions that they may be asked on the day. When taken under timed exam conditions, our practice tests can also help improve students’ time management skills.

 

Students preparing for the Southend High School for Boys’ 11 Plus exam will find the following resources useful:

 

English

 

The CSSE 11 Plus English test normally includes both multiple-choice and open-answer comprehension questions. There’s also a writing and a reasoning section.

 

For multiple-choice comprehension practice, we’d recommend:

 

11+ English Pack 1

11+ English Pack 2 

11+ English Pack 3

11 Plus Comprehension (Fiction)

11 Plus Comprehension (Non-fiction)

 

For open-answer comprehension and writing practice, we’d recommend these resources:

 

11 Plus English Pack 1 (Open Answer)

11 Plus English Pack 2 (Open Answer)

11 Plus English Pack 3 (Open Answer)

11 Plus Writing Prompts

 

For the reasoning section, we’d recommend these practice tests:

 

11+ Verbal Reasoning Pack 1

11+ Verbal Reasoning Pack 2

11+ Verbal Reasoning Pack 3

 

Maths

 

The CSSE 11+ Maths paper is based on topics from the KS2 syllabus. This includes problem solving and arithmetic questions, as well as some non-verbal reasoning. The maths questions are not multiple-choice.

 

For Maths practice, we’d recommend:

 

11 Plus Mathematics Pack 1 (Open Answer)

11 Plus Mathematics Pack 2 (Open Answer)

11 Plus Mathematics Pack 3 (Open Answer)

11 Plus Mental Arithmetic (Open Answer)

 

For Non-Verbal Reasoning practice, we’d recommend this resource:

 

11+ Non-Verbal Reasoning Pack 1

 

The information provided about Southend High School for Boys was believed to be correct at the time of publishing. However, please be aware of future changes. We advise you to contact the school directly if you are unsure of anything. School contact details are provided within the post.

11+

Screenshot of the Shoeburyness High School, Essex website

Shoeburyness High School is a co-educational academy located in Southend-on-Sea, Essex. The school educates approximately 1650 students aged between 11 and 18. The school has Technology College status and gained academy status in 2011. A CAD/CAM Centre was also developed the same year. Shoeburyness High School offers a broad range of subjects and offers an extended school service, running extra-curricular activities for Shoeburyness pupils and students from other schools.

 

11 Plus Exam Information for Shoeburyness High School

 

Address: Shoeburyness High School, Caulfield Road, Shoeburyness, Essex, SS3 9LL

Admissions Info: schooloffice@shoeburyness.southend.sch.uk, or (01702) 292286

School Type: Co-educational academy

Number of pupils: 1650 (approx.)

Number of places in year 7: 310

Open day date: July

Exam date: September

Exam board type: CSSE (Essex 11 Plus)

 

Shoeburyness High School 11 Plus Admissions

 

Each year, Shoeburyness High School admits approximately 310 students into Year 7. The school acts as its own admissions authority to ensure that all applicants to the school are considered fairly.

 

In cases where there are more Year 7 applicants than available places, the school gives priority to children with a statement of special educational needs (SEN), or Education, Health and Care (EHC) places. The school then gives priority to:

 

  • Looked After or previously Looked After children
  • Thirty-one pupils on the basis of their performance in the selection test procedure
  • Students who live in the catchment area and have a brother or sister at the school
  • Children who live in the catchment area
  • Students who live outside the catchment area and have a brother or sister at the school
  • Children living outside the catchment area

For more information on the school’s admissions process, please visit the admissions pages on their website.

 

How to Apply for 11 Plus Entry to Shoeburyness High School

 

Before applying for a Year 7 place at Shoeburyness High School, parents and pupils are invited to visit the school during its Open Evening, which take place in September. At the event, students and parents will have the chance to meet staff members and some current pupils.

 

To apply for a Year 7 school place at the school, parents need to complete two forms. Firstly, the CSSE registration form should be completed online at the Consortium of Selective Schools in Essex (CSSE) website, here.

 

Parents then need to complete a Supplementary Information Form (SIF), which is also available from the CSSE website.

 

All parents living in Essex need to state their child’s preferred secondary schools on the Essex Common Application Form (CAF), too. This can be completed by hand on the paper form supplied in the LEA Secondary School Admission booklet.

 

Please note that only those pupils who have been entered for the test will be considered for admission.

 

Shoeburyness High School 11 Plus Exam Format

 

For all schools that are members of the CSSE, including Shoeburyness High School, there is only one selection test. This ensures that students don’t need to sit several tests for all the schools listed on their preference form.

 

Applicants are judged on their performance in two tests that cover English and Maths. The English paper includes questions on comprehension, grammar and vocabulary, as well as creative writing, verbal reasoning and literacy.

 

The Maths paper contains questions that are based on the KS2 National Curriculum, as well as some non-verbal reasoning questions.

 

The test scores are age-standardised to ensure that older pupils don’t have an unfair advantage.

 

How to Prepare for the Shoeburyness High School 11 Plus Exam

 

Setting aside time to study ahead of competitive entry tests can boost a student’s confidence and improve their performance on exam day.

 

At Exam Papers Plus, we specialise in publishing practice exam papers in a similar style to those used in the CSEE 11 Plus exam. Our tests help students become familiar with the types of English, maths, verbal, and non-verbal reasoning questions that they could be asked in the exam. When our tests are taken under timed exam conditions, they can also help improve a student’s time management skills.

 

Students preparing for the Shoeburyness High School 11 Plus exam will find the following resources particularly effective:

 

English

 

The CSSE 11+ English paper can include both multiple-choice and open-answer comprehension questions, as well as a writing and reasoning section.

For multiple-choice comprehension practice, we recommend these practice tests:

 

11+ English Pack 1

11+ English Pack 2 

11+ English Pack 3

11 Plus Comprehension (Fiction)

11 Plus Comprehension (Non-fiction)

 

For open-answer comprehension and writing practice, we’d recommend these resources:

 

11 Plus English Pack 1 (Open Answer)

11 Plus English Pack 2 (Open Answer)

11 Plus English Pack 3 (Open Answer)

11 Plus Writing Prompts

 

For brushing up on the reasoning section, we’d recommend these practice tests:

 

11+ Verbal Reasoning Pack 1

11+ Verbal Reasoning Pack 2

11+ Verbal Reasoning Pack 3

 

Maths

 

The CSSE 11+ Maths paper is based on topics in the KS2 syllabus (including problem solving and arithmetic), as well as some non-verbal reasoning. The maths questions are not multiple-choice, so we’d recommend the following open answer practice tests:

 

11 Plus Mathematics Pack 1 (Open Answer)

11 Plus Mathematics Pack 2 (Open Answer)

11 Plus Mathematics Pack 3 (Open Answer)

11 Plus Mental Arithmetic (Open Answer)

 

For non-verbal reasoning practice, we’d recommend:

 

11+ Non-Verbal Reasoning Pack 1

 

The information provided about Shoeburyness High School was believed to be correct at the time of publishing. However, please be aware of future changes. We advise you to contact the school directly if you are unsure of anything. School contact details are provided within the post.

11+

Screenshot of the King Edward VI Grammar School Chelmsford

Established in 1551, King Edward VI Grammar School, also known as KEGS, is a British grammar school with academy status, located in Chelmsford, Essex. The school educates students aged between 11 and 18, with Years 7-11 made up of male students. Years 12 and 13 (sixth form) are co-educational. The school places emphasis on traditional courtesy, as well as personal conduct and respect, while embracing modern educational research.

 

11 Plus Exam Information for King Edward VI Grammar School Chelmsford

 

Address: King Broomfield Road, Chelmsford, Essex, CM1 3SX, United Kingdom

Admissions Info: office@kegs.org.uk

School Type: Boys’ Grammar

Number of pupils: 892

Number of places in year 7: 120

Open day date: July

Exam date: September

Exam board type: CSSE (Essex 11 Plus)

 

King Edward VI Grammar School Chelmsford Plus Admissions

 

Entry to King Edward VI is determined by student performance in the 11+ exam. The school has a 12.5-mile distance priority policy and reserves 80% of its places for students who live in the local area.

 

All applicants to the school need be considered ‘in area’ and families need to have been continuously resident at their permanent home address within the priority area between set dates determined by the school.

 

In cases where there are more applicants than available places, the school uses the following over-subscription criteria, giving priority to:

 

  • Boys with the top 120 scores in the selection test that live within the priority area.
  • The top 30 boys in the selection test regardless of where they live.
  • Children of returning UK service personnel and crown servants.
  • Remaining pupils in rank order of their scores in the 11 Plus.
  • In the case of a tie break, priority is given to Looked After, and previously Looked After children.

 

For more information on King Edward VI Chelmsford’s admissions policy, please visit the admissions page on the school website.

 

How to Apply for 11 Plus Entry to King Edward VI Grammar School Chelmsford

 

Before applying for a Year 7 place at King Edward VI, parents and students are encouraged to visit the school during one of its ‘tour days’, which take place March and July.

 

In order to register for a Year 7 place, parents need to complete two forms.

 

The first form is the registration form, which can be completed online at the Consortium of Selective Schools in Essex (CSSE) website, here.

 

Parents also need to complete a Supplementary Information Form (SIF), which is also available from the CSSE website.

 

Additionally, all parents living in Essex need to state their preferred secondary schools on the Essex Common Application Form (CAF), which can be completed by hand on the paper form supplied in the LEA Secondary School Admission booklet.

 

Please note that only boys who have been entered for the test will be considered for admission.

 

King Edward VI Grammar School Chelmsford 11 Plus Exam Format

 

For all schools that are members of the CSSE, there is one selection test. This ensures that students don’t need to sit several tests for all the schools listed on their preference form.

 

Entry to King Edward VI Grammar School Chelmsford is determined by student performance in two papers, covering English and Maths. The English paper focuses on comprehension, grammar and vocabulary, as well as creative writing, verbal reasoning and literacy.

 

The Maths paper contains questions based on topics from the KS2 National Curriculum, as well as some non-verbal reasoning.

 

The test scores are age-standardised to ensure that older pupils don’t have an unfair advantage.

 

How to Prepare for the King Edward VI Grammar School Chelmsford 11 Plus Exam

 

At Exam Papers Plus, we believe that a little preparation can go a long way to boosting a student’s confidence before an exam. We specialise in publishing practice exam papers in a similar style to those used in the CSEE 11 Plus exam. Our practice tests help students become familiar with the types of questions that they may be asked on the day. When taken under timed exam conditions, our practice tests can also help improve students’ time management skills.

 

For students preparing for the King Edward VI Grammar School Chelmsford 11 Plus exam, the following resources will be particularly useful:

 

English

 

The CSSE 11+ English paper can include both multiple-choice and open-answer comprehension questions as well as a writing section and reasoning section.

 

For multiple-choice comprehension practice, we’d recommend the following:

 

11+ English Pack 1

11+ English Pack 2 

11+ English Pack 3

11 Plus Comprehension (Fiction)

11 Plus Comprehension (Non-fiction)

 

For open-answer comprehension and writing practice, we’d recommend these resources:

 

11 Plus English Pack 1 (Open Answer)

11 Plus English Pack 2 (Open Answer)

11 Plus English Pack 3 (Open Answer)

11 Plus Writing Prompts

 

For the reasoning section, we’d recommend these practice tests:

 

11+ Verbal Reasoning Pack 1

11+ Verbal Reasoning Pack 2

11+ Verbal Reasoning Pack 3

 

Maths

 

The CSSE 11+ Maths paper covers the KS2 syllabus (including problem solving and arithmetic) as well as some Non-Verbal Reasoning. The maths questions are not multiple-choice.

 

For Maths practice, we’d recommend the following:

 

11 Plus Mathematics Pack 1 (Open Answer)

11 Plus Mathematics Pack 2 (Open Answer)

11 Plus Mathematics Pack 3 (Open Answer)

11 Plus Mental Arithmetic (Open Answer)

 

For Non-Verbal Reasoning practice, we’d recommend this resource:

 

11+ Non-Verbal Reasoning Pack 1

 

The information provided about King Edward VI Grammar School Chelmsford was believed to be correct at the time of publishing. However, please be aware of future changes. We advise you to contact the school directly if you are unsure of anything. School contact details are provided within the post.

11+

Screenshot of the Colchester Royal Grammar School website

Colchester Royal Grammar School (CRGS) is a state-funded grammar in Colchester, Essex. It was founded in 1206 and educates students aged between 11 and 18. The school has a co-educational sixth form and a scholarship history dating back to the sixteenth century. The sixth form regularly ranks highly at a national level for A-Level results and has previously been ranked 27th in the country for Oxbridge admissions. The school became an academy in 2012 and, the following year, it was recognised as a National Teaching School and a National Support School. Colchester Royal is one of the few state boarding schools in the UK.

 

11 Plus Exam Information for Colchester Royal Grammar School

 

Address: Colchester Royal Grammar School, Lexden Road, Colchester CO3 3ND

Admissions Info: office@crgs.co.uk

School Type: Boys’ Grammar

Number of pupils: 813 (approx.)

Number of places in year 7: 120 (approx.)

Open day date: July

Exam date: September

Exam board type: CSSE (Essex 11 Plus)

 

Colchester Royal Grammar School 11 Plus Admissions

 

Year 7 admission to Colchester Royal Grammar is primarily determined by student performance in the CSSE 11 Plus exam. Admission is open to all students in Essex and testing takes place before application.

 

In cases where the school is oversubscribed for Year 7 entry, places are offered to the top-scoring 120 boys in the selection tests who have named CRGS as their preferred school. Boys must also meet the relevant criteria under the co-ordinated admissions arrangements to be offered a place at the school.

 

If two students have equal ranking, preference will be given to Looked After or previously Looked After children, followed by the applicant who lives the closest to the school.

 

Applications are open to boys who are currently registered in Year 6 and under 12 years of age. The school does not normally admit overage applicants.

 

For more information on Colchester Royal Grammar School’s admissions process, please take a look at the admissions policy page, or the admissions policy document, which are both on the school website.

 

How to Apply for 11 Plus Entry to Colchester Royal Grammar School

 

Before applying for a Year 7 place at Colchester Royal Grammar School, parents and students are encouraged to visit the school during one of its open days, which usually take place in July. For details of the next event, please see the school’s website.

 

Parents applying to Colchester Royal Grammar School must register with the CSSE so that their son can take the 11 Plus exam. Registration forms can be completed online at the Consortium of Selective Schools in Essex (CSSE) website, here.

 

Parents also need to complete a Supplementary Information Form (SIF), which is also available from the CSSE website.

 

All parents who are resident in Essex need to state their son’s preferred secondary schools on the Essex Common Application Form (CAF), which can be completed by hand on the paper form supplied in the LEA Secondary School Admission booklet.

 

Colchester Royal Grammar School 11 Plus Exam Format

 

Colchester Royal Grammar School follows the same 11 Plus exam format as all CSSE member schools. There is only one selection test to ensure that students don’t need to take a separate exam for each school to which they have applied.

 

The Colchester Royal Grammar School 11+ consists of two tests, covering English and Maths. The English paper tests for comprehension, grammar and vocabulary skills, as well as creative writing, verbal reasoning and literacy.

 

The Maths paper focuses on topics from the KS2 National Curriculum, as well as some non-verbal reasoning.

 

The test scores are age-standardised to ensure that older pupils don’t have an unfair advantage.

 

How to Prepare for the Colchester Royal Grammar School 11 Plus Exam

 

Most students benefit from a little preparation ahead of the 11 Plus. In addition to working from a planned study schedule, at Exam Papers Plus, we’d recommend that students use 11 Plus practice tests. Our practice papers can help boost a student’s confidence before exam day as they provide students with an indication of the types of questions they could be asked.

 

Boys who are preparing for the Colchester Royal Grammar School 11 Plus exam will find the following resources particularly useful:

 

English

 

The CSSE 11 Plus English paper can include both multiple-choice and open-answer comprehension questions, as well as a writing and reasoning section.

 

For multiple-choice comprehension practice, we’d recommend the following practice tests:

 

11+ English Pack 1

11+ English Pack 2 

11+ English Pack 3

11 Plus Comprehension (Fiction)

11 Plus Comprehension (Non-fiction)

 

For open-answer comprehension and writing practice, we’d recommend these resources:

 

11 Plus English Pack 1 (Open Answer)

11 Plus English Pack 2 (Open Answer)

11 Plus English Pack 3 (Open Answer)

11 Plus Writing Prompts

 

For the reasoning section, we’d recommend these practice tests:

 

11+ Verbal Reasoning Pack 1

11+ Verbal Reasoning Pack 2

11+ Verbal Reasoning Pack 3

 

Maths

 

The CSSE 11+ Maths paper focuses on topics covered by the KS2 syllabus (including problem solving and arithmetic) as well as some Non-Verbal Reasoning. The maths questions are not multiple-choice.

 

For Maths practice, we’d suggest:

 

11 Plus Mathematics Pack 1 (Open Answer)

11 Plus Mathematics Pack 2 (Open Answer)

11 Plus Mathematics Pack 3 (Open Answer)

11 Plus Mental Arithmetic (Open Answer)

 

For Non-Verbal Reasoning practice, we’d recommend:

 

11+ Non-Verbal Reasoning Pack 1

 

The information provided about Colchester Royal Grammar School was believed to be correct at the time of publishing. However, please be aware of future changes. We advise you to contact the school directly if you are unsure of anything. School contact details are provided within the post.

11+

Branded image for Wycombe Abbey 11 Plus (11+) Exam Assessment and Test Information

Wycombe Abbey is a girls’ independent boarding school set in a 170-acre estate in High Wycombe.  When the school was founded in 1896, the first cohort of girls numbered only 40. It now educates around 600 girls aged 11–18.

 

The school consistently appears at the top of league tables as one of the highest-performing schools in the country based on exam results. In 2017/18, 95.2% of all GCSE entries and 84.3% of all A-level entries achieved A*–A.

 

Alongside its academic curriculum, the school offers a wide range of recreational activities ranging from dance to bee-keeping.

 

As a boarding school, Wycombe Abbey promotes mixed-age bedrooms. The Living section of their website provides detailed information about living arrangements and life at the school.

 

Wycombe Abbey does offer a small number of day places each year.

 

11 Plus Exam Information for Wycombe Abbey

 

Address: Wycombe Abbey, High Wycombe, Buckinghamshire, HP11 1PE

County: Buckinghamshire
Admissions info
: registrar@wycombeabbey.com, 01494 897008

School Type: Girls’ independent boarding school

Number of Pupils: 600 (approx.)

Number of Places in Year 7:

Open Day Date: June

Exam Date: October (Stage 1) and January (Stage 2)

Exam Type / Board: CEM Select and ISEB Common Entrance

 

Wycombe Abbey 11 Plus Admissions

 

Wycombe Abbey holds an Assessment Day in October each year to assess the academic potential and suitability of all applicants wishing to enter Year 7 the following year.

 

Conditional offers are made subject to scores in 11+ entrance exams, which are held in January.

 

To be invited to the Assessment Day, your daughter must be registered with Wycombe Abbey by 1st June in the year prior to entry (when they are in Year 5).

 

For further information on Wycombe Abbey’s admissions procedures, please contact registrar@wycombeabbey.con or 01494 897008.

 

Scholarships and bursaries are offered by the school.

 

How to Apply for 11 Plus Entry to Wycombe Abbey

 

To be considered for a place at Wycombe Abbey, you need to register your daughter by sending the school a completed registration form, which can be requested via their website,  together with a fee of £250 by 1st June in the year prior to entry (when your daughter is in Year 5).

 

Before registering for a place at Wycombe Abbey, parents and children are advised to attend one of the school’s open mornings, which take place in June each year. Given the registration deadline, it is worth attending an open morning while your daughter is still in Year 3 or 4. You must book in advance to attend.

 

Wycombe Abbey 11 Plus Exam Format

 

There are two stages to the school’s assessment process for 11+ candidates:

 

Stage 1: Assessment Day (October)

 

Once registered, students are invited to attend an Assessment Day in October prior to the year of entry (when your daughter is in Year 6).

 

All candidates will:

 

  • have an individual interview with a senior member of staff
  • take part in small group activities with different departments
  • sit an online pre-test consisting of verbal, non-verbal and mathematical reasoning (created by a company called CEM).

 

Following the Assessment Day, conditional offers will be made subject to success in the entrance exams.

 

Stage 2: Entrance Exams (January)

 

Candidates who have been made conditional offers will take papers in English, Mathematics and Science in the January of the proposed year of entry (when your daughter in is Year 6). The papers are Common Entrance papers set by the Independent Schools Examination Board (ISEB)

 

If your daughter attends a school registered with ISEB, her school will enter her for the Common Entrance and administer the exams.

 

Alternatively, if your daughter’s school is not registered, she must be entered directly with the ISEB (by 1 December) and sit the papers at one of their test centres or at a British Council office.

 

Firm offers are made by Wycombe Abbey on the basis of performance in the entrance exams. All places must be accepted and a deposit paid by the first Monday in March.

 

For more information about Wycombe Abbey admissions, the school website has a useful FAQs page.

 

How to Prepare for the Wycombe Abbey 11 Plus Exam

 

Stage 1: Assessment Day (October)

 

The Wycombe Abbey online pre-test is created by a company called CEM. The test is called CEM Select and tests Verbal, Non-verbal and Mathematical (Numerical) Reasoning.

 

We have a number of CEM practice resources available, which can be used to build confidence ahead of the pre-tests.

 

Feedback from those who have taken the Wycombe Abbey online pre-test in previous years suggests that the questions in these CEM practice papers provide good preparation for it:

 

11+ Cloze CEM

11+ Comprehension CEM Pack 1 (Fiction)

11+ Comprehension CEM Pack 2 (Non-fiction)

11+ Verbal Reasoning CEM

11+ Synonyms and Antonyms (CEM)

11+ Multiple-Choice Reasoning CEM

11+ Long Numerical Reasoning CEM

11+ Short Numerical Reasoning CEM

 

Stage 2: Entrance Exams (January)

 

Our online practice papers for independent school entrance exams can be used to help identify any weaker areas in English and Mathematics that require additional work before the ISEB Common Entrance exams. Whilst we would recommend using the following practice papers, please note that they are designed to be challenging and may assess certain topics beyond the requirements of the ISEB 11+ Common Entrance Syllabus:

 

11+ English (Independent Schools) Pack 1

11+ English (Independent Schools) Pack 2

11+ English (Independent Schools) Pack 3

 

11+ English: Writing Prompts

11+ Spelling Pack 1

11+ Spelling Pack 2

 

11+ Mathematics (Independent Schools) Pack 1

11+ Mathematics (Independent Schools) Pack 2

11+ Mathematics (Independent Schools) Pack 3

11+ Mathematics: Mental Arithmetic

 

The information provided about Wycombe Abbey was believed to be correct at the time of publishing. However, please be aware of future changes. We advise you to contact the school directly if you are unsure of anything. School contact details are provided within the post.

11+

Branded image for Sevenoaks School 11 Plus (11+) Exam Selective Entrance Test Information

Sevenoaks is a co-educational day and boarding school for 11 to 18 year olds. Surrounded by a 100-acre campus, the school is located in the Kent countryside.

 

Sevenoaks’ curriculum is built around the International Baccalaureate. The school says of its learning and character: ‘We are modern, progressive, unstuffy, co-educational and international, and so is the education we provide.’

 

Sevenoaks was rated ‘exceptional’ for teaching and learning in its most recent ISI report and won The Sunday Times Independent School of the Year Award for 2018.

 

No boarding is available in Years 7 and 8.

 

11 Plus Exam Information for Sevenoaks School

 

Address: Sevenoaks School, Sevenoaks, Kent, TN13 1HU

County: Kent
Admissions info
: regist@sevenoaksschool.org, 01732 467703

School Type: Co-educational independent day and boarding school

Number of Pupils: 1080 (approx.)

Number of Places in Year 7: 80

Open Day Date: September and June

Exam Date: January

Exam Type / Board: School’s own

 

Sevenoaks School 11 Plus Admissions

 

Up to 80 children are admitted to Year 7 of Sevenoaks School, into four parallel forms. The school usually receives around three applicants for every place available.

 

The school is strongly academic and looks for students who will flourish in a fast-paced environment. All 11+ applicants are assessed through:

 

  • competitive entrance tests in Maths, English and Verbal Reasoning
  • a group interview
  • a reference from a previous school.

 

The selection process is designed to identify students who are able to benefit from Sevenoaks School’s approach to learning and who will make a positive contribution towards the life of the school.

 

Academic and music scholarships are available at 11+. Details of the procedures and criteria for all scholarships can be found on the school’s website.

 

Sevenoaks also has a bursary programme. Bursaries are means-tested in accordance to the criteria published on the school’s website.

 

A copy of the full Sevenoaks admission policy can be downloaded from the school website.

 

How to Apply for 11 Plus Entry to Sevenoaks School

 

Before applying for a place at Sevenoaks School, parents and children are advised to attend one of the school’s open mornings, which are held in September and June. The June open morning is the larger event and attendance should be booked in advance.

 

For admission into Year 7 at Sevenoaks, application should be made by 1st September of the year prior to entry using the online application form. The registration fee, which is non-refundable, is £100.

 

Reports will be requested from applicants’ schools in October and the entrance exams and interviews will take place in January. Results are sent out by email in mid-February.

 

The school has put together a list of frequently asked questions about entry at 11+ and a comprehensive booklet about the application process, timings and fees called ‘The Detail’, which can be downloaded from their website.

 

For further information on admissions to Sevenoaks School, please contact: regist@sevenoaksschool.org or 01732 467703.

 

Sevenoaks School 11 Plus Exam Format

 

The Sevenoaks entrance exam consists of three tests: English, Maths and Verbal Reasoning.

 

English (1 hour)

 

  • No dictionaries allowed.
  • Section A (35 minutes): comprehension
  • Section B (25 minutes): creative writing / composition
  • All answers must be written in full sentences, paying attention to both spelling and punctuation.

 

Maths (1 hour)

 

  • No calculators allowed.
  • The paper is a general test in mathematics and problem solving. A list of topics covered can be downloaded from the school’s website. It covers a fairly wide range of topics that most 10-year olds should have come across, including:
    • addition, subtraction, multiplication and division of whole numbers, fractions and decimals
    • directed numbers
    • number sequences
    • simple percentages
    • ratio
    • problem solving with fractions and integers
    • balance equations
    • angle properties
    • areas
    • volumes of prisms
    • symmetry
    • averages and range
    • distance
  • Candidates should show all their working. They may be awarded marks for correct working even if their final answer is incorrect, and an unsupported correct answer may not receive full marks.

 

Verbal Reasoning (1 hour)

 

  • Questions will be similar to those featured on GL Assessment (NFER) Verbal Reasoning papers.

 

In addition, there is a 40-minute group interview. During the interviews, candidates are given tasks to complete in small groups of five or six. They will be observed by two members of staff, who are looking for candidates who are good team-players and are willing to contribute ideas and listen to others. No preparation is necessary.

 

How to Prepare for the Sevenoaks School 11 Plus Exam

 

Our practice papers can be used to prepare for all aspects of Sevenoaks School’s 11+ entrance exam. They are designed to challenging to reflect the demands of a competitive 11+ independent school’s entrance exam. The papers provide practice in all the key skills and can be used to identify any weaker areas that require additional work before the exam and help build confidence.

 

To prepare for the Sevenoaks School 11+ Mathematics paper, we would recommend using the following practice papers:

 

11+ Mathematics (Independent Schools) Pack 1

11+ Mathematics (Independent Schools) Pack 2

11+ Mathematics (Independent Schools) Pack 3

11+ Mathematics: Mental Arithmetic

 

To prepare for the Sevenoaks School 11+ English paper, we would recommend using the following practice papers, which will help to improve comprehension, spelling and vocabulary:

 

11+ English (Independent Schools) Pack 1

11+ English (Independent Schools) Pack 2

11+ English (Independent Schools) Pack 3

 

11+ English: Writing Prompts

11+ Spelling Pack 1

11+ Spelling Pack 2

 

The following practice papers will provide useful preparation for the Sevenoaks 11+ Verbal Reasoning paper:

 

11+ Verbal Reasoning Pack 1

11+ Verbal Reasoning Pack 2

11+ Verbal Reasoning Pack 3

 

The information provided about Sevenoaks School was believed to be correct at the time of publishing. However, please be aware of future changes. We advise you to contact the school directly if you are unsure of anything. School contact details are provided within the post.

 

 

11+

Branded image for Oxford High School 11 Plus (11+) Exam Selective Admissions Assessments Information

Oxford High School is an independent day school for girls aged 4–10 years.  Founded over 140 years ago, it is Oxford’s oldest girls’ school.

 

The school is set over three sites in the heart of Oxford, all within a short walk of each other.

 

The school achieves consistently high academic results at GCSE and A Level and is the only Senior School in Oxford to have been rated ‘exceptional’ by ISI.

 

Oxford High School is part of the Girls’ Day School Trust (GDST), a charity that owns and runs a network of 25 schools and academies in England and Wales.

 

The Year 7 Handbook on the school’s website covers everything new students need to know about the school.

 

11 Plus Exam Information for Oxford High School

 

Address: Oxford High School, Belbroughton Road, Oxford, OX2 6XA

County: Oxfordshire
Admissions info
: admissions@oxf.gdst.net, 01865 318500

School Type: Girls’ independent day school

Number of Pupils: 900 (approx.)

Open Day Date: October

Exam Date: November

Exam Type / Board: School’s own

 

Oxford High School 11 Plus Admissions

 

An admissions and taster day is held in November for all girls registered for Year 7 (11+) entry to Oxford High School. On the day, students sit test papers in English, Maths and Reasoning. They also take part in Science sessions and can get involved in Art, Drama, Music and PE. activities. The activities do not form any part of the assessment process.

 

All girls attending the admissions day are invited to attend an interview in the following week. Interviews are with the Head or another senior member of staff.

 

Offers of places at Oxford High School are made on the basis of assessment results, the interview and a reference from the candidate’s current school. They will be made in December. The Girls’ School Association agrees a common deadline for acceptances. Some candidates may not receive immediate offers but may be advised that they have been placed on the waiting list.

 

A copy of the school’s full admissions policy can be downloaded from its website.

 

How to Apply for 11 Plus Entry to Oxford High School

 

The deadline for registering for Year 7 (11+) entry to Oxford High School is in October of the year prior to entry (while your daughter is in Year 6). The registration form can be downloaded from the school’s website. The registration fee is £100 (£150 for non-UK residents).

 

If you intend to apply for a bursary, you must tick the bursaries box on the registration form.

 

All girls entered for the Year 7 (11+) test are entered for the academic scholarships. The scholarships are awarded based on performance in the admissions assessments and interview. A separate application should be made for Art, Drama, Music and Sport scholarships.

 

A Senior School Open Evening is held in October to which all girls currently registered for entry are invited with their parents or guardians. All visitors are welcomed without the need for prior booking. Details are advertised in the local press and published on the school website. Parents may also arrange to visit the school with their daughter at a Meet the Headmaster event, held regularly during term time (booking in advance is required), or on any week-day during term time by prior arrangement.

 

For further information on Oxford High School’s admissions procedures, please contact the Admissions Registrar or the Director of Admissions: admissions@oxf.gdst.net or 01865 318500.

 

Oxford High School 11 Plus Exam Format

 

Oxford High School sets its own papers in:

 

  • English
  • Maths
  • Reasoning, including verbal and non-verbal reasoning (multiple choice).

 

The papers are written by the Heads of Department and the Deputy Head.  The school does not publish any of its past papers.

 

How to Prepare for the Oxford High School 11 Plus Exam

 

Oxford High School does not disclose any information about the content of its assessment papers nor does it publish past papers. As a result, your daughter will understandably feel nervous about sitting the admissions assessments.

 

Our practice papers can be used to build confidence before the assessments. They cover all the key skills and are designed to be challenging to reflect the demands of a competitive independent school’s 11+ entrance exam.

 

The papers can be used to provide practice in key skills and identify any weaker areas that require additional work before the assessments.

 

For students preparing for the Oxford High School 11+ admission assessments, we would recommend using the following practice papers:

 

11+ English (Independent Schools) Pack 1

11+ English (Independent Schools) Pack 2

11+ English (Independent Schools) Pack 3

 

11+ English: Writing Prompts

11+ Spelling Pack 1

11+ Spelling Pack 2

 

11+ Mathematics (Independent Schools) Pack 1

11+ Mathematics (Independent Schools) Pack 2

11+ Mathematics (Independent Schools) Pack 3

11+ Mathematics: Mental Arithmetic

 

11+ Verbal Reasoning Pack 1

11+ Verbal Reasoning Pack 2

11+ Verbal Reasoning Pack 3

 

11+ Non-Verbal Reasoning Pack 1

 

The information provided about Oxford High School was believed to be correct at the time of publishing. However, please be aware of future changes. We advise you to contact the school directly if you are unsure of anything. School contact details are provided within the post.

 

11+

Branded image for Magdalen College School 11 Plus (11+) Entrance Exam Information

Magdalen College School, founded in 1480, is an independent day school for boys aged 7–18 with a co-educational sixth form.

 

The school consistently achieves high exam results and, in 2018, 84% of A-level entries and 96% of GCSE entries achieved A*–A.

 

The quality of pupils’ academic and other achievements at Magdalen College School and the quality of pupils’ personal development were both deemed ‘excellent’ by the Independent Schools Inspectorate (ISI) during its most recent inspection in 2017.

 

Sport plays an important part of life at Magdalen College School and its location in Oxford means that it has access to a range of first-class college and university sports facilities. Sports scholarships are available at 13+ and 16.

 

11 Plus Exam Information for Magdalen College School

 

Address: Magdalen College School, Oxford, OX4 1DZ

County: Oxfordshire
Admissions info
: registrar@mcsoxford.org, 01865 253430.

School Type: Independent day school for boys

Number of Pupils: 900 (approx.)

Number of Places in Year 7: Unknown

Open Day Date: Throughout year

Exam Date: January

Exam Type / Board: School’s own

 

Magdalen College School 11 Plus Admissions

 

Candidates take tests in English composition (fiction and non-fiction), Mathematics and Verbal Reasoning. After the tests, most candidates are invited back for an interview.

 

In assessing applicants, the school looks for potential and not just current attainment. The school’s exam papers and interviews are designed to explore the way in which each candidate thinks so that i can assess overall promise. They also take into consideration a reference from the pupil’s current school, the wider interests of the pupil and any other applicable information.

 

Bursaries, scholarships, exhibitions, All-Rounder Awards and Governors’ Presentation Awards are available. Further information can be found on the Scholarships page of the school’s website.

 

The school has put together a booklet of admissions information, which can be downloaded from its website. The school’s Admissions Policy is also available to download.

 

For further information on Magdalen College School’s admissions procedures, please contact the registrar, Mrs Barberine Mallett, at registrar@mcsoxford.org or 01865 253430.

 

How to Apply for 11 Plus Entry to Magdalen College School

 

Before applying for a place at Magdalen College School, you are advised to attend one of the school’s open mornings or afternoons, which take place throughout the year.

 

You must register your son for the entrance exam.  A registration form can be downloaded from the school’s website. The completed registration for must be received by the school by the end of October in the year preceding entry.

 

In November, Magdalen College School will email all those who have registered for the entrance exam, formally inviting candidates to attend. This email contains a reply slip for parents / guardians to complete and return. A second email providing details of the day itself, including the timings of the different tests, is sent in December.

 

Magdalen College School 11 Plus Exam Format

 

The 11+ entrance exam is held at the school in January of the year of entry. It consists of three tests:

 

Verbal Reasoning

 

  • 45 minutes
  • written responses (no multiple-choice questions)
  • before the test starts there is the opportunity to work through sample questions and answers with a member of staff and to raise any queries.

 

Maths

 

  • 1 hour
  • no calculator
  • based on the National Curriculum Year 5 Programme of Study, plus some topics from the Year 6 Programme of Study.

 

English

 

  • 1 hour
  • a fiction composition and a non-fiction composition
  • there is a choice of questions within each section
  • attention is paid to spelling, punctuation, handwriting, as well as ability to write lucidly and effectively and with creativity and flair.

 

Candidates are invited back for an interview on the basis of their performance in the entrance exam. Interviewees will be asked to read and comment on a short passage and to take an object to talk about. The interview lasts about 30 minutes.

 

An information sheet about the school’s 11+ entrance exam is available on their website.

 

How to Prepare for the Magdalen College School 11 Plus Exam

 

Our practice papers cover all the key skills for English, Maths and Verbal Reasoning. They are designed to challenging to reflect the demands on an 11+ independent school’s entrance exam. They can be used to identify any weaker areas that require additional work and help build confidence before the exam.

 

For the Magdalen 11+ Verbal Reasoning test, we would recommend the following resources:

 

11+ Verbal Reasoning Pack 1

11+ Verbal Reasoning Pack 2

11+ Verbal Reasoning Pack 3

 

For students preparing for the Magdalen College School 11+ Mathematics paper, we would recommend using the following practice papers:

 

11+ Mathematics (Independent Schools) Pack 1

11+ Mathematics (Independent Schools) Pack 2

11+ Mathematics (Independent Schools) Pack 3

 

11+ Mathematics: Mental Arithmetic

 

For students preparing for the Magdalen College School 11+ English paper, we would recommend using the following practice papers to help improve spelling, vocabulary and writing skills:

 

11+ English: Writing Prompts

 

11+ Spelling Pack 1

11+ Spelling Pack 2

 

The information provided about Magdalen College School was believed to be correct at the time of publishing. However, please be aware of future changes. We advise you to contact the school directly if you are unsure of anything. School contact details are provided within the post.

11+

Branded image for King Edward VI High School for Girls 11 Plus (11+) Entrance Examination Information

Founded in 1883, King Edward VI High School for Girls is in Edgbaston, within easy reach of Birmingham city centre.  The school has approximately 570 students aged 11 to 18. It is governed by the trustees of ‘The Schools of King Edward VI in Birmingham’ charity, which is also responsible for seven other local schools.

 

King Edward VI High School for Girls offers a wide range of extra-curricular activities alongside its academic curriculum, with excellent facilities for sport, music, drama and art. In June 2018, the school was featured in an article on ‘Ten of the best value private schools in the UK’, published by The Telegraph.

 

11 Plus Exam Information for King Edward VI High School for Girls

 

Address: King Edward VI High School for Girls, Edgbaston Park Road, Birmingham, West Midlands, B15 2UB

County: West Midlands
Admissions info
: admissions@kehsmail.co.uk, 0121 415 2195

School Type: Girls’ independent

Number of Students: 570 (approx.)

Number of Places in Year 7: 96 (approx.)

Open Day Date: June

Exam Date: October

Exam Type / Board: Set by school

 

King Edward VI High School for Girls 11 Plus Admissions

 

There are approximately 96 places available each year in the Thirds (Year 7) at King Edward VI High School for Girls. Places are allocated based on the school’s own entrance exam, which takes place at the beginning of October in the year before entry.

 

The school does not interview all candidates; those called for interview are mainly those being considered for scholarship.

 

Results of applications are normally posted to parents on 1st December.

 

A document addressing frequently asked questions about the admissions process has been put together by the school and can be downloaded from their Admissions Overview page.

 

For further information on the King Edward VI High School for Girls application process, contact the registrar, Catherine Oakes, on 0121 415 2195 or admissions@kehsmail.co.uk .

 

How to Apply for 11 Plus Entry to King Edward VI High School for Girls

 

Before applying for a place at King Edward VI High School for Girls, parents and children are advised to attend the school’s open day, which takes place in June. If unable to attend the open day, parents can contact the registrar, Catherine Oakes, by email (admissions@kehsmail.co.uk) to arrange a school tour and discuss any questions they may have about the admissions process.

 

Parents must register their child for the King Edward VI High School for Girls entrance exam. Registration opens at Easter and closes in September, two weeks before the entrance exam. The registration form is placed on the school’s website when registration opens.

 

A music scholarship is available to Year 7 students. Pupils who score highly in the 11 Plus exam, and who are a Grade 6 or above in their instrument, will be invited to audition. The application for the Music Scholarship should be submitted with the registration form.

 

Funding for a number of Governors’ Assisted Places (GAPs) is provided by a grant from the governors. Assisted places are awarded on academic merit based on performance in the entrance exam. They are means-tested, based on family income and assets. Demand is high, so not all candidates who perform well in the exam and apply for an assisted place will be funded. Parents must indicate interest in an assisted place on the registration form.

 

King Edward VI High School for Girls 11 Plus Exam Format

 

The entrance exam consists of two English papers and one Mathematics paper.

 

Both English papers test reading and writing skills. Previous tests have focused on poems, images and prose. Tasks have included comprehension questions, as well as opportunities for creative writing and personal responses to the stimulus materials.

 

The Mathematics paper consists of a variety of different question formats designed to test ability in arithmetic. No calculators are allowed. Formal knowledge of algebra and geometry is not required.

 

How to Prepare for the King Edward VI High School for Girls 11 Plus Exam

 

Our practice papers are designed to help students and parents identify any weaker areas that require additional work before the exam.

 

For students studying for the King Edward VI High School for Girls entrance exam, we would highly recommend using the following practice papers:

 

11+ English (Independent Schools) Pack 1

11+ English (Independent Schools) Pack 2

11+ English (Independent Schools) Pack 3

 

11+ English: Writing Prompts

 

11+ English: Spelling Pack 1

11+ English: Spelling Pack 2

 

11+ Mathematics (Independent Schools) Pack 1

11+ Mathematics (Independent Schools) Pack 2

11+ Mathematics (Independent Schools) Pack 3

 

11+ Mathematics: Mental Arithmetic

 

The information provided about King Edward VI High School for Girls was believed to be correct at the time of publishing. However, please be aware of future changes. We advise you to contact the school directly if you are unsure of anything. School contact details are provided within the post.

 

 

 

11+

Branded image for Hampton School 11 Plus (11+) Exam Entrance Exam Information

Hampton School is an independent day school for boys aged 11–18. The school was founded in Hampton upon Thames in 1556/7. It moved to its current location on the Hanworth Road in Hampton in 1939. Today Hampton School is recognised as one of the leading academic boys’ schools in the UK and has over 1200 pupils.

 

Hampton School is located on a green field site in South West London. The school has excellent facilities, including an all-weather sports ground and a professional performing arts theatre. It is also one of the leaders in the field of ICT in the independent education sector.

 

The Millennium Boat House is situated on a beautiful stretch of the River Thames and is home to the school’s internationally renowned and highly successful Boat Club.

 

11 Plus Exam Information for Hampton School

 

Address: Hampton School, Hampton, Middlesex, TW12 3HD

County: Middlesex
Admissions info
: admissions@hamptonschool.org.uk, 0208 979 9273

School Type: Boys’ independent day school

Number of Pupils: 1200 (approx.)

Number of Places in Year 7: 130 (approx.)

Open Day Date: Throughout the year

Exam Date: January

Exam Type / Board: School’s own

 

Hampton School 11 Plus Admissions

 

Hampton School is academically selective.  Boys wishing to join the school in Year 7 are required to sit the school’s own competitive entrance exam while they are in Year 6.

 

Alternatively, boys in Year 5 may apply for an advance place for 11+ entry and sit the school’s 10+ entrance exam. The 11+ and 10+ entrance exams use similar principles, but are designed to suit the relevant age group. More information about the 10+ advance place exam can be found on the school’s website.

 

Applicants who perform well in the 11+ entrance exam will be invited to an interview. A report from the Head of the applicant’s current school will also be requested. The aim of the interview is to assess the applicant’s academic capabilities, his hobbies and interests, and his maturity and comprehension.

 

A copy of the school’s full admissions policy is available on its website.

 

How to Apply for 11 Plus Entry to Hampton School

 

Visitors’ events take place throughout the school year. Parents and students are encouraged to attend (which include a tour of the school and the opportunity to meet with pupils and senior members of staff) prior to applying for admission in order to assess the suitability of the school for their son.

 

Parents or guardians of all applicants must complete a registration form and pay the £125 non-refundable registration fee by 1st November in the year prior to entry.

 

All relevant dates for admissions are listed in the ‘Further Information’ booklet within the school’s prospectus and on the school’s website.

 

Bursaries are available and are means-tested. Scholarships are also available and are awarded on merit irrespective of means. A boy may hold both a bursary and a scholarship.

 

For further information on admissions to Hampton School, please contact the admissions office:  admissions@hamptonschool.org.uk or 0208 979 9273.

 

Hampton School 11 Plus Exam Format

 

All 11+ applicants are required to sit the school’s own competitive entrance exam while they are in Year 6. The exam comprises the following written papers:

 

Mathematics (55 minutes)

 

English Response and Composition:

 

  • Paper 1: English Comprehension (25 minutes)
  • Paper 2: Composition (35 minutes)

 

Words and Reasoning (40 minutes)

 

How to Prepare for the Hampton School 11 Plus Exam

 

Our practice papers can be used to prepare for all aspects of Hampton School’s 11+ entrance exam. They are designed to challenging to reflect the demands of a competitive 11+ independent school’s entrance exam. The papers provide practice in all the key skills and can be used to identify any weaker areas that require additional work before the exam and help build confidence.

 

To prepare for the Hampton School 11+ Mathematics paper, we would recommend using the following practice papers:

 

11+ Mathematics (Independent Schools) Pack 1

11+ Mathematics (Independent Schools) Pack 2

11+ Mathematics (Independent Schools) Pack 3

11+ Mathematics: Mental Arithmetic

 

To prepare for the Hampton School 11+ English Response and Composition papers, we would recommend using the following practice papers, which will help to improve comprehension, spelling, writing skills and vocabulary:

 

11+ English (Independent Schools) Pack 1

11+ English (Independent Schools) Pack 2

11+ English (Independent Schools) Pack 3

 

11+ English: Writing Prompts

 

11+ Spelling Pack 1

11+ Spelling Pack 2

 

The following practice papers will provide useful preparation for the Hampton School Words and Reasoning paper:

 

11+ Verbal Reasoning Pack 1

11+ Verbal Reasoning Pack 2

11+ Verbal Reasoning Pack 3

 

11+ Non-Verbal Reasoning Pack 1

 

The information provided about Hampton School was believed to be correct at the time of publishing. However, please be aware of future changes. We advise you to contact the school directly if you are unsure of anything. School contact details are provided within the post.

 

 

 

11+

Branded image for Guildford High School 11 Plus (11+) Admissions and Exam Information

Guildford High School is an academically selective, independent day school for girls aged 4–18. It was founded by the Church Schools Company in 1888 and moved to its current site, close to the town centre of Guildford, in 1893. Today, the school has around 980 girls and belongs to the United Church Schools Trust (UCST), part of the United Learning.

 

Guildford High School’s mission is ‘to provide a first-class education for academically able girls’ and nationally-standardised test data shows that the ability of the girls at the school is well above average.

 

The Guildford High School website gives a good overview of the school’s ethos, curriculum and extra-curricular opportunities.

 

11 Plus Exam Information for Guilford High School

 

Address: Guildford High School, London Road, Guildford, Surrey, GU1 1SJ

County: Surrey
Admissions info
: guildford-admissions@guildfordhigh.co.uk, 01483 562 475

School Type: independent day school for girls

Number of Students: 980 (approx.)

Number of Places in Year 7: 100

Open Day Date: Throughout the year

Exam Date: January

Exam Type / Board: School’s own

 

Guilford High School 11 Plus Admissions

 

There are approximately 100 places available in Year 7 at Guildford High School.  Typically, around 40 of these places go to girls already at the school and the rest go to girls joining the school at 11+.

 

Guildford High School operates a selective admissions procedure. Decisions about whether to offer a candidate a place are made based on the results of an entrance exam, an interview and references from prior schools.

 

A copy of the schools admission policy can be downloaded from their website.

 

For further information about Guildford High School’s admission procedures, contact 01483 543 853 or guildford-admissions@guildfordhigh.co.uk.

 

How to Apply for 11 Plus Entry to Guilford High School

 

Before applying for a place at Guildford High School, you are advised to attend one of the visitors’ mornings held regularly throughout the year. Booking is required.

 

You may register your daughter at any time but, in order to take the entrance exam for a Year 7 place, she must be registered by 1st November before the year of intended entry. A non-refundable registration fee of £100 is payable.

 

A copy of the school’s registration form can be downloaded from its website.

 

United Learning Assisted Places are available at 11+. These places are awarded on the basis of financial need. To be considered for an Assisted Place, an Assisted Place Application Form should be requested from the Admissions Office prior to the entrance assessment.

 

At 11+, Academic Scholarships worth up to a third of the fees are awarded on the basis of the entrance exam and interviews. All candidates attending the main entrance assessment day are automatically considered and there is no separate scholarship exam.

 

Music Scholarships are open to girls who have satisfied the normal academic entrance requirements and have reached Grade 4–5 for their orchestral instrument. Their playing should be of Distinction quality. The auditions take place in January.

 

A document containing further information about Scholarships at Guildford High School and the Assisted Place Scheme can be downloaded from the school’s website.

 

Guilford High School 11 Plus Exam Format

 

The 11+ entrance exam consists of written papers in English and Mathematics. The papers are designed to assess the ability and skills of all candidates, regardless of what they might have covered in the past. It is the schools policy not to issue past papers.

 

Each candidate also has a one-to-one interview on the day of the entrance exam.

 

Decisions about whether to offer a candidate a place are made based on the entrance exam, interview and references from prior schools. Offers are typically made within two weeks of the entrance exam. Parents then have a few weeks to make a final decision.

 

For more information on Guildford High School and the school’s admission process, the school website has a useful FAQs page.

 

How to Prepare for the Guilford High School 11 Plus Exam

 

Guildford High School does not disclose any information about the content of its exam papers nor does it publish past papers. As a result, your daughter may understandably feel nervous about sitting the entrance exam.

 

Our practice papers can be used to build confidence before the exam. They cover all the key skills for English and Mathematics at an appropriate level for 11+ independent schools’ entrance exams and can be used to identify any weaker areas that require additional work.

 

For students preparing for the Guildford High School 11+ entrance exam, we would recommend using the following practice papers:

 

11+ English (Independent Schools) Pack 1

11+ English (Independent Schools) Pack 2

11+ English (Independent Schools) Pack 3

11+ English: Writing Prompts

11+ Spelling Pack 1

11+ Spelling Pack 2

 

11+ Mathematics (Independent Schools) Pack 1

11+ Mathematics (Independent Schools) Pack 2

11+ Mathematics (Independent Schools) Pack 3

11+ Mathematics: Mental Arithmetic

 

The information provided about Guildford High School was believed to be correct at the time of publishing. However, please be aware of future changes. We advise you to contact the school directly if you are unsure of anything. School contact details are provided within the post.

11+

Screenshot of the Colchester County High School for Girls website

Colchester County High School for Girls is a selective grammar school in Colchester, in Essex. Founded in 1909, the school consistently ranks well in exam league tables. The school has academy status and was one of the first Science Specialist Schools in the UK. Colchester County High is also a Modern Language school and offers a range of language subjects.

 

For an insight into what it’s like to study at Colchester County High, take a look at this Year 7 welcome film, created by the school.

 

 

11 Plus Exam Information for Colchester County High School for Girls

 

Address: Colchester County High School for Girls, Norman Way, Colchester, CO3 3US

County: Essex

Admissions Info: office@colchestergirls.essex.sch.uk, 01206 576973

School Type: Girls’ Grammar

Number of pupils: 783 (approx.)

Number of Places in Year 7: Approximately 140

Open Day Date: July

Exam Date: September

Exam Board Type: CSSE (Essex 11 Plus)

 

Colchester County High School for Girls 11 Plus Admissions

 

Colchester County High School for Girls admits students based on the criteria set out by the Consortium of Selective Schools in Essex (the CSSE). The CSSE takes responsibility for the administration of the test. There is one selection exam, split over two tests that determines Year 7 entry and the same exam is used by all the schools in the Essex consortium. In order to be eligible to sit the exam, girls need to be registered with the CSSE ahead of time.

 

In cases where there are more eligible candidates than school places, the school uses its over-subscription criteria, which gives priority to Looked After Children, or children who have previously been in looked after care.

 

How to Apply for 11 Plus Entry to Colchester County High School for Girls

 

In order to apply for Year 7 entry to the school, parents need to register their daughter for the 11 Plus exam. The registration form can be found on the CSSE website, here. Parents also need to complete a Supplementary Information Form. The school encourages prospective students and their parents to visit the school for a daytime tour in July, where they will have the opportunity to meet staff and attend a talk by the Headteacher. Only girls who meet the admission criteria and meet the standard required in the exam will be eligible for entry.

 

Colchester County High School for Girls 11 Plus Exam Format

 

Entry to Colchester County High School for Girls is determined by student performance in two tests, covering English and Mathematics. The English paper tests comprehension, grammar and vocabulary, as well as creative writing, verbal reasoning and literacy.

 

The Maths paper tests students on topics contained within the KS2 National Curriculum, as well as some non-verbal reasoning.

 

The test scores are age-standardised to ensure that older pupils don’t have an unfair advantage.

 

How to Prepare for the Colchester County High School for Girls 11 Plus Exam?

 

Our practice exam papers can help familiarise students with the types of questions they may be asked on the day. Furthermore, when taken under exam conditions, our practice papers can help improve time management and get students used to answering questions under pressure.

 

The Colchester County High School for Girls 11 Plus exam is set by the Consortium of Selective Schools in Essex. At Exam Papers Plus, we produce similarly-styled  practice papers that can help students prepare for the Essex 11 Plus exam.

 

Please see our recommendations below:

 

English

 

The CSSE 11+ English paper can include both multiple-choice and open-answer comprehension questions as well as a writing section and reasoning section.

 

For multiple-choice comprehension practice, we’d recommend the following:

 

11+ English Pack 1

11+ English Pack 2 

11+ English Pack 3

11 Plus Comprehension (Fiction)

11 Plus Comprehension (Non-fiction)

 

For open-answer comprehension and writing practice, we’d recommend the following:

 

11 Plus English Pack 1 (Open Answer)

11 Plus English Pack 2 (Open Answer)

11 Plus English Pack 3 (Open Answer)

 

For the reasoning section, we’d recommend the following:

 

11+ Verbal Reasoning Pack 1

11+ Verbal Reasoning Pack 2

11+ Verbal Reasoning Pack 3

 

Maths

 

The CSSE 11+ Maths paper covers the KS2 syllabus (including problem solving and arithmetic) as well as some Non-Verbal Reasoning. The paper is not multiple-choice.

 

For Maths practice, we’d recommend the following:

 

11 Plus Mathematics Pack 1 (Open Answer)

11 Plus Mathematics Pack 2 (Open Answer)

11 Plus Mathematics Pack 3 (Open Answer)

11 Plus Mental Arithmetic (Open Answer)

 

For Non-Verbal Reasoning practice, we’d recommend the following:

 

11+ Non-Verbal Reasoning Pack 1

 

The information provided about Colchester County High School for Girls was believed to be correct at the time of publishing. However, please be aware of future changes. We advise you to contact the school directly if you are unsure of anything. School contact details are provided within the post.

11+

Screenshot of St Hilda's School website

Established 1894, St Hilda’s Church of England High School is a co-educational, bilateral school in Sefton Park, Liverpool. The school recently underwent a £15 million refurbishment. St Hilda’s takes pride in its Christian values and aims to nurture positive, respectful relationships. The school produces above average GCSE results and is above the national average for English. St Hilda’s also has a 99.9% A-Level pass rate, with students being accepted into Russell Group universities. The school’s purpose is to inspire its pupils by helping them develop skills that will serve them well in the changing world.

 

For an insight into what it’s like to study at St Hilda’s, take a look at the school’s recent student recruitment video:

 

 

11 Plus Exam Information for St Hilda’s Church of England High School

 

Address: St Hilda’s Church of England High School, Croxteth Drive, Sefton Park, Liverpool, L17 3AL

County: Merseyside

Admissions Info: info@st-hildas.co.uk, 0151 733 2709

School Type: Co-educational, bilateral high school

Number of pupils: 863 (approx.)

Number of Places in Year 7: 170 (25 places through academic selection)

Open Day Date: September

Exam Date: September

 

St Hilda’s Church of England High School 11 Plus Admissions

 

St Hilda’s High School offers several admissions routes. As a Church of England School, it accepts applications from any part of the Diocese of Liverpool.

 

St Hilda’s doesn’t have a sibling policy, so each student is considered on an individual basis. In the event of a tie-break, the school gives priority to students that live closest to the school. The school offers the following admission routes:

 

  • Students with special educational needs, or a health care plan
  • Looked After or previously Looked After children
  • Children whose parents are employed by the school
  • Christian students (135 places allocated)
  • Other world faiths (10 places)
  • Students who perform well in the entrance exam (25 places)
  • All other applicants

 

How to Apply for 11 Plus Entry to St Hilda’s Church of England High School

 

Before applying for a Year 7 place at St Hilda’s, parents and prospective students are invited to attend the school’s Open Evening, which takes place in September. At the event, there will be an opportunity to meet staff and students, and tour the school.

 

After visiting St Hilda’s, parents can obtain a registration form directly from the school. The form must be returned before the October closing date. Parents also need to complete a Local Authority Preference form, stating St Hilda’s as a preference.

 

Late applications will be accepted but handled after those that have been received on time.

 

St Hilda’s Church of England High School 11 Plus Exam Format

 

The St Hilda’s Church of England High School 11 Plus exam is made up of two papers: verbal reasoning, and non-verbal reasoning. On the day of the tests, there will be a break between the two papers.

 

In cases where two or more students have equal scores in the exam, preference will be given to those who score highest in the non-verbal reasoning test.

 

How to Prepare for the St Hilda’s Church of England High School 11 Plus Exam?

 

We’d recommend that parents help their child create a study schedule that outlines what needs to be studied and when. Mapping out your child’s 11 Plus preparation ensures that all relevant topics are covered before exam day.

 

In addition to working from a study schedule, students should use 11 Plus practice exam papers to familiarise themselves with the exam layout. At Exam Papers Plus, we publish 11 Plus practice tests that help students identify the types of questions they may be asked on the day. This type of practical preparation is a great way to boost a student’s confidence in the lead up to the exam.

 

For students preparing for the St Hilda’s Church of England Year 7 entrance exam, we’d recommend the following resources.

 

11+ Verbal Reasoning: Pack 1

11+ Verbal Reasoning: Pack 2

11+ Verbal Reasoning: Pack 3

 

11+ Non-Verbal Reasoning Pack 1

 

The information provided about St Hilda’s Church of England High School was believed to be correct at the time of publishing. However, please be aware of future changes. We advise you to contact the school directly if you are unsure of anything. School contact details are provided within the post.

11+

Screenshot of St Michael's Catholic Grammar School

Established 1908, St Michael’s Catholic Grammar School is a voluntary-aided catholic school in Finchley, London. St Michael’s architecture draws on a range of different styles, providing a picturesque learning environment. The school’s website states that St Michael’s is distinguished by its quality of education and care.

 

11 Plus Exam Information for St Michael’s Catholic Grammar School

 

Address: St Michael’s Catholic Grammar School, Nether Street, North Finchley, N12 7NJ

County: London

Admissions Info: office@st-michaels.barnet.sch.uk, 020 8446 2256A

School Type: Girls’ grammar, catholic

Number of pupils: 750 (approx.)

Number of Places in Year 7: 96

Open Day Dates: June

Exam Date: September

Exam Board Type: GL Assessment

 

St Michael’s Catholic Grammar School 11 Plus Admissions

 

St Michael’s catholic education is fully supported by the families whose children attend the school. All applicants are expected to give their full commitment to the school’s aims and values.

 

Each year, St Michael’s admits 96 students into Year 7. Only girls who demonstrate the necessary academic ability and whose parents wish for them to attend a catholic school will be admitted. St Michael’s is always oversubscribed, and therefore gives priority to students  from a practising catholic family who have made their First Holy Communion.

 

If two or more applicants have equal ranking, priority is given to Looked After or previously Looked After children, followed by students who live closest to the school.

 

How to Apply for 11 Plus Entry to St Michael’s Catholic Grammar School

 

In order to apply for a Year 7 place at St Michael’s Catholic Grammar School, parents need to complete the school’s online registration form. A Common Application Form should also be completed and returned to the Local Authority before the deadline date.

 

A Supplementary Information Form should also be completed. Parents are also asked to write to the school, providing reasons and evidence of why their child would be a good fit.

 

Additionally, parents are required to complete a Certificate of Catholic Practice form (CCP), previously known as a ‘Priest’s Reference’.

 

St Michael’s Catholic Grammar School 11 Plus Exam Format

 

The St Michael’s 11 Plus exam is administered by GL Assessment. All applicants are required to take the following 4 test papers:

 

  • Verbal reasoning
  • Non-verbal reasoning
  • English
  • Maths

 

Places are allocated based on performance in the entrance test with the highest scoring students given priority. In instances of a tie break, students’ scores in the verbal reasoning test are given precedence over scores in the non-verbal reasoning test.

 

How to Prepare for the St Michael’s Catholic Grammar School 11 Plus Exam?

 

At Exam Papers Plus, we believe that a little preparation can go a long way towards improving a student’s exam confidence. We recommend that students preparing for competitive entry tests like the St Michaels’ 11 Plus exam should work from a study schedule.

 

Parents can help their children by outlining the topics that need to be studied and allocating specific time periods for reviewing each one. The sooner students start preparing for the exam, the more time they’ll have to improve any weaker areas.

 

In addition to working from a study schedule, 11 Plus practice papers can help improve a student’s exam technique. We specialise in producing practice tests for competitive entry exams like the St Michael’s entrance assessment. Our tests are designed to help students become familiar with the types of questions they may be asked on exam day.

 

We’d recommend that students take our practice tests under timed exam conditions in order to improve their time management skills as well as their exam technique. Students preparing for the St Michael’s Catholic Grammar School 11 Plus exam will find the following resources particularly useful:

 

11+ Verbal Reasoning: Pack 1

11+ Verbal Reasoning: Pack 2

11 + Verbal Reasoning: Pack 3

 

11+ Non-Verbal Reasoning Pack 1

 

11 Plus English Grammar Schools Pack 1

11 Plus English Grammar Schools Pack 2

11 Plus English Grammar School Pack 3

11+ Punctuation

11+ Sentence Completion

 

11+ Mathematics Pack 1

11+ Mathematics Pack 2

11+ Mathematics Pack 3

11+ Mathematics: Problem Solving

 

The information provided about St Michael’s Catholic Grammar School was believed to be correct at the time of publishing. However, please be aware of future changes. We advise you to contact the school directly if you are unsure of anything. School contact details are provided within the post.

11+

Screenshot of the Orchard Park High School website

Previously known as Edenham High School, Orchard Park High School and Sixth Form is a co-educational school in Shirley, Croydon. The school has academy status and is part of the Greenshaw Learning Trust, which is a group of schools that share the same educational values. Orchard Park is rated ‘good’ by Ofsted. The school offers GCSEs, A Levels and a range of further vocational courses.

 

11 Plus Exam Information for Orchard Park High School

 

Address: Orchard Park High School, Orchard Way, Shirley, Croydon, CR0 7NJ

County: Greater London

Admissions Info: admin@orchardparkhigh.net, 020 8776 0220

School Type: Mixed secondary

Number of pupils: Confirmation required

Number of Places in Year 7: 180

Open Day Dates: October

Exam Date: December

 

Orchard Park High School 11 Plus Admissions

 

Orchard Park High School is an academy in the Greenshaw Learning Trust, which is the admissions authority for the school. Orchard Park’s admissions process is administered by the school in accordance with the Trust’s policies.

 

Each year, the school admits 180 students into Year 7, giving priority to:

 

  • Looked After or Previously Looked After children
  • Students with exceptional social or medical needs
  • Pupils who have a parent that works at the school
  • Students who live closest to Orchard Park High School
  • Students who are in a tie break for places
  • All other unallocated places

 

How to Apply for 11 Plus Entry to Orchard Park High School

 

Before applying for a Year 7 place at Orchard Park, parents and students are advised to attend one of the school’s Open Mornings, which take place throughout October. The school’s Open Mornings do not include a tour of the school but private appointments to view the campus can be made by emailing admissions@orchardparkhigh.net.

 

All applicants to the school must complete the Supplementary Information Form (SIF) for entry into Year 7 for September. The form can be downloaded from the school website.

 

In order to gain entry to the school, every candidate is required to sit a compulsory Ability Banding Test which takes place in December.

 

Orchard Park High School Banding Test Format

 

The Orchard Park Banding Test takes place in December for entry to the school the following September. Parents will receive notification of the testing arrangements in November.

 

The Banding Test consists of two papers:

 

  • A verbal reasoning test
  • A non-verbal reasoning test

 

Both papers last approximately 30 minutes each and scores are age-standardised to ensure that older students don’t have an unfair advantage.

 

Based on the results of the banding test, students are placed into one of nine ability bands and places are allocated to students against the band in which they are placed. The number of places in each ability band is determined by the total number of applicants.

 

Offer letters will be sent to parents by the Home Local Authority on National Offer Day. Parents should then accept the offer in writing before the deadline date.

Orchard Park High School doesn’t provide information on individual scores or rankings and doesn’t have an appeals process.

For more information on the school’s Banding Test, please visit the Admissions page, here.

 

How to Prepare for the Orchard Park High School 11 Plus Banding Test?

 

When preparing for the Orchard Park High School Banding Test, practice makes perfect. We’d recommend that parents help their children create a detailed study plan that outlines the topics that need to be studied and when.

 

At Exam Papers Plus, we specialise in producing practice tests to help students prepare for competitive entry exams. Our verbal and non-verbal reasoning practice papers are designed to replicate the types of questions that students could be asked on test day.

 

When taken under timed exam conditions, our tests can help improve students’ time management skills. As they grow in experience, students will become more aware of how long to spend on each question type.

 

For students preparing for the Orchard Park High School Banding Test, we’d recommend the following resources:

 

11+ Verbal Reasoning: Pack 1

11+ Verbal Reasoning: Pack 2

11 + Verbal Reasoning: Pack 3

 

11+ Non-Verbal Reasoning Pack 1

 

The information provided about Orchard Park High School was believed to be correct at the time of publishing. However, please be aware of future changes. We advise you to contact the school directly if you are unsure of anything. School contact details are provided within the post.

 

11+

Screenshot of Homewood School website

Homewood School and Sixth Form Centre is a co-educational academy in Tenterden, Kent. The school educates over 2,500 students and has over 250 staff members. The school provides flexible learning opportunities and operates within the Kent selective system. Homewood is also a Specialist Arts College. The school aims to provide its students with a vibrant, world-class learning experience in partnership with the wider community.

 

11 Plus Exam Information for Homewood School

 

Address: Homewood School, Ashford Road, Tenterden, TN30 6LT

County: Kent

Admissions Info: info@homewood.kent.sch.uk, 01580 766267

School Type: Mixed academy

Number of pupils: 2500 (approx.)

Number of Places in Year 7: 390 (day places only)

Open Day Date: September

Exam Date: September

Exam Board Type: Kent 11 Plus Test

 

Homewood School 11 Plus Admissions

 

Year 7 entry to Homewood School is coordinated in conjunction with Kent County Council. In cases where the number of applications exceed available places, the following criteria is used, giving priority to:

 

  • Looked After or Previously Looked After children
  • Students who demonstrate high aptitude in the Kent Test (20% of intake, 78 students in total)
  • Students who already have a sibling at the school
  • Pupils who live closest to the school

 

For more information on the admissions process at Homewood School, please visit the Kent County Council website.

 

How to Apply for 11 Plus Entry to Homewood School

 

Year 7 applications to Homewood School are handled by the coordinated admission scheme under Kent County Council. Homewood uses the Kent Test to determine admission and parents must register online with the LA in the first instance.

 

Once students have taken the 11+ Kent Test, parents are required to complete the Common Application Form (CAF) and submit it to the LA. This process can usually be done online. Parents will receive their child’s test results from the Council in October, with offers sent out in March.

 

Homewood School 11 Plus Exam Format

 

Twenty percent of Homewood School’s intake (78 pupils) is made with reference to ability or aptitude. All students who register for the Kent Test will be invited to take the assessment.

 

The Kent Test consists of two multiple-choice tests:

 

  1. An hour-long exam that is divided into two sections that cover English and maths. Each section consists of a 5-minute practice exercise and a 25-minute test.
  2. A 60-minute test that focuses on reasoning. It is divided into three sections: verbal reasoning, non-verbal reasoning and spatial reasoning

 

Pupils must also complete a 40-minute writing task. However, this does not form part of the final 11 Plus result but is used only in borderline or appeal cases.

 

How to Prepare for the Homewood School 11 Plus Exam?

 

Kent is known for being a competitive grammar school region, and most schools are oversubscribed for Year 7 entry. In order for students to have the best chance of gaining one of the 78 places at Homewood School, they should invest additional time into studying and revising in the build-up to the test.

 

Parents should help their child prepare by creating a study timetable that outlines what topics need to be studied and when.

 

In addition to working from a study schedule, we recommend that students use practice exam papers to help boost their confidence ahead of the test.

 

Students who are registered to take the Homewood School entrance test will especially benefit from these practice resources:

 

Kent Practice Test 1 (11 Plus)

Kent Practice Test 2 (11 Plus)

Kent Practice Test 3 (11 Plus)

 

These tests are designed to replicate the format, content, structure, question types, style and timings of the actual Kent 11 plus exam.

 

For additional, subject-specific revision of multiple-choice questions, we would also highly recommend these practice exam papers:

 

11 Plus Maths Pack 1 (GL)

11 Plus Maths Pack 2 (GL)

11 Plus Maths Pack 3 (GL)

11 Plus Maths: Problem Solving (GL)

 

11 Plus English Pack 1 (GL)

11 Plus English Pack 2 (GL)

11 Plus English Pack 3 (GL)

11+ Punctuation

11+ Sentence Completion

 

11 Plus Verbal Reasoning Pack 1 (GL)

11 Plus Verbal Reasoning Pack 2 (GL)

11 Plus Verbal Reasoning Pack 3 (GL)

 

11 Plus Non-Verbal Reasoning Pack 1 (GL)

 

The information provided about Homewood School was believed to be correct at the time of publishing. However, please be aware of future changes. We advise you to contact the school directly if you are unsure of anything. School contact details are provided within the post.

11+

Screenshot of Greenshaw High School website

Founded in 1967, Greenshaw High School is a co-educational academy in Sutton. The school educates around 1,600 pupils and was originally founded as a comprehensive school. Greenshaw gained academy status in 2011 and, in 2014, was reconstituted as a multi-academy trust, named ‘Greenshaw Learning Trust’. The school is known for having a successful sixth form and has been awarded the Arts Council Silver award, Investor in People, Associate Training School and Health School awards. Greenshaw is currently rated ‘good’ by Ofsted.

 

For an insight into life at Greenshaw, take a look at this short staff video:

 

 

11 Plus Exam Information for Greenshaw High School

 

Address: Greenshaw High School, Grennell Road, Sutton, SM1 3DY

County: Surrey

Admissions Info: admissions@greenshaw.co.uk, 020 8715 1001

School Type: Mixed grammar

Number of pupils: 1600 (approx.)

Number of Places in Year 7: 314

Open Day Date: September

Exam Date: September

Exam Board Type: Selective Eligibility Test (SET)

 

Greenshaw High School 11 Plus Admissions

 

Year 7 entry to Greenshaw Academy is coordinated by the London Borough of Sutton. The Greenshaw Learning Trust is the admissions authority for the school and their admission arrangements can be found here.

 

The school admits 314 students into Year 7 each year, including ‘statemented’ students. Places are allocated under the following criteria:

 

  • Looked After, or previously Looked After Children
  • Students with exceptional medical or social needs
  • Pupils who demonstrate top performance in the Selective Eligibility Test (up to 60 places available)
  • Children of staff members
  • Students who have a sibling at the school
  • Pupils who live closest to the school

 

For more information on Greenshaw Academy’s admissions policy, please contact admissions@greenshaw.co.uk, or telephone the Admissions Officer on 020 8715 1001.

 

How to Apply for 11 Plus Entry to Greenshaw High School

 

Before applying for a place at Greenshaw, parents and students are advised to attend the school’s Open Evening, which takes place in September. The school also runs two Open Mornings in October by appointment only.

 

In order to apply for a Year 7 place at Greenshaw High School, parents need to complete a Common Application Form (CAF), stating Greenshaw as one of their child’s preferences. The form should be returned to their Local Authority before the closing date. The Sutton CAF is available online, here.

 

In order to be eligible to take the Greenshaw Academy Selective Eligibility Test, parents need to complete an online application form on the school Admissions page once registration opens. All applicants who complete the registration form will be invited to take the test.

 

Greenshaw High School 11 Plus Exam Format

 

In previous years, the Sutton Eligibility Test has been split into two stages:

 

  • Stage 1: Maths and English, both multiple-choice
  • Stage 2: Maths and English. Neither of these are multiple-choice and previous exams have included comprehension, a writing task and a standard maths test.

 

Each test paper includes questions typical to the KS2 national curriculum. It should be noted that success in the test doesn’t automatically mean that a student will be allocated a place.

Notification offers are sent to parents at the end of September and a written acceptance of a place should be received by the closing date. For more information on the Greenshaw Academy Selective Eligibility Test, the school website has a useful FAQs page.

 

How to Prepare for the Greenshaw High School 11 Plus Exam?

 

Our online practice papers help students and parents identify any weaker areas that require additional work before the exam.

 

For students studying for the Greenshaw Selective Eligibility Test, we would recommend using the following practice papers, specifically designed for the S.E.T:

 

11+ Selective Eligibility Test (SET) Practice Test 1

11+ Selective Eligibility Test (SET) Practice Test 2 

11+ Selective Eligibility Test (SET) Practice Test 3

11+ Selective Eligibility Test (SET) Practice Test 4

11+ Selective Eligibility Test (SET) Practice Test 5

 

If you would like further, subject-specific practice, the following papers will prove useful:

 

11 Plus English Grammar Schools Pack 1

11 Plus English Grammar Schools Pack 2

11 Plus English Grammar School Pack 3

11 Plus English: Spelling

 

11 Plus Maths Grammar Schools Pack 1

11 Plus Maths Grammar Schools Pack 2

11 Plus Maths Grammar Schools Pack 3

11 Plus Maths: Problem Solving Grammar Schools

 

For the second stage, the following maths and English papers will prove useful:

 

11+ Mathematics Pack 1

11+ Mathematics Pack 2

11+ Mathematics Pack 3

 

11+ English Pack 1

11+ English Pack 2

11+ English Pack 3

 

The information provided about Greenshaw High School was believed to be correct at the time of publishing. However, please be aware of future changes. We advise you to contact the school directly if you are unsure of anything. School contact details are provided within the post.

11+

Screenshot of Budmouth College website

Budmouth College is the only secondary school in Weymouth & Portland to also have a Sixth Form. Located in Dorset, the school is named after the town of Budmouth in Thomas Hardy’s novels. The school educates over 1,500 students aged between 11 and 18 and offers a range of qualifications. It’s known for producing above average GCSE results. Budmouth has a combined cadet force and offers a range of facilities, including a greenhouse for Science students, ICT suites, and other specialist suites for specific subject areas.

 

For an insight into what it’s like to study at Budmouth College, take a look at this promotional video:

 

 

11 Plus Exam Information for Budmouth College

 

Address: Budmouth College, Chickerell Road, Weymouth, DT4 9SY

County: Dorset

Admissions Info: budmouth@budmouth.dorset.sch.uk, 01305 830500

School Type: Mixed secondary

Number of pupils: 1,500 (approx.)

Number of Places in Year 7: 260 (30 selective places)

Open Day Date: October

Exam Date: Late-September

 

Budmouth College 11 Plus Admissions

 

Budmouth College has an equal preference policy and considers all applicants who apply for a place on their Common Application Form. Each year, thirty students are admitted to the school based on the results of the Abilities Test. The remaining 260 places are allocated using the following criteria:

 

  • Looked After or Previously Looked After Children
  • Children who have a brother or sister who already attends the school
  • Children of staff members
  • Students who live in the school’s catchment area or attend Portesham Primary School
  • Other applicants

 

How to Apply for 11 Plus Entry to Budmouth College

 

For more information on how to apply to Budmouth College, the school website directs parents to the Dorset Local Authority website, which outlines the following application process:

 

  • Applicants who live in Dorset should apply for a Dorset school reception place via their Local Authority.
  • Applicants who live in Dorset and want to apply for a school place in another Local Authority area should still apply directly to the Dorset Local Authority.
  • It’s advised that parents read the Local Authority’s Parent’s Guide for more information on the different types of schools available.
  • Parents should read the admissions policies for the individual school’s they want to apply to.

 

Please note that parents may have to complete an additional form to apply to religious schools.

 

The application form to apply to a Dorset school can be completed online here, and the application to apply for the Dorset Test can be found here.

 

Budmouth College 11 Plus Exam Format

 

Each year, 30 students are admitted to Budmouth College based on academic ability. The tests are all taken online and begin with a five-minute practice session. The aim of the entrance test is to identify students who have high academic targets for GCSE and have a ‘faster pace and greater depth of learning’. There are three test papers that consist of the following question types:

 

  • Verbal reasoning
  • Non-verbal reasoning
  • Quantitative (mathematical) reasoning

 

Test results are sent to parents in mid-October. It should be noted that achieving a qualifying score doesn’t guarantee a place at Budmouth College. Students who don’t gain a place via the Ability Test will still be considered via the school’s remaining criteria.

 

How to Prepare for the Budmouth College 11 Plus Exam?

 

Performing well in competitive entry exams like the Budmouth College Ability Test is all about preparation. We suggest that parents help their students create a revision timetable that outlines what needs to be studied before the test. By breaking down each topic into manageable sections, students won’t feel as overwhelmed with the practice that they need to put in.

 

In addition to working from a planned study timetable, we recommend that students introduce practice exam papers into their routine. At Exam Papers Plus, we specialise in producing practice tests for competitive entry exams like the Budmouth College Abilities Test.

 

When taken under exam conditions, our practice papers can be a great way of improving a student’s confidence. They’ll become familiar with the types of questions that could come up on the day of the exam, and they’ll have a good idea of how each test will be laid out. For students preparing for the Budmouth College 11 Plus exam, we’d recommend the following resources:

 

11+ Verbal Reasoning: Pack 1

11+ Verbal Reasoning: Pack 2

11 + Verbal Reasoning: Pack 3

 

11+ Non-Verbal Reasoning Pack 1

 

11+ Mathematics Pack 1

11+ Mathematics Pack 2

11+ Mathematics Pack 3

11+ Mathematics: Problem Solving

 

The information provided about Budmouth College was believed to be correct at the time of publishing. However, please be aware of future changes. We advise you to contact the school directly if you are unsure of anything. School contact details are provided within the post.

11+

Screenshot of the Archbishop Tenison's School (Oval)

Founded in 1685, Archbishop Tenison’s Church of England School, known locally as Tenison’s, is a co-educational, voluntary-aided school in Lambeth, London. The school educates around 530 pupils, and is a Specialist Arts College. Tenison’s is located across from The Oval cricket ground, home to Surrey County Cricket Club. The school produces above average GCSE results.

 

11 Plus Exam Information for Archbishop Tenison’s School

 

Address: Archbishop Tenison’s School, 55 Kennington Oval, London, SE11 5SR

County: London – Lambeth

Admissions Info: school@ats.lambeth.sch.uk, 020 7793 8519

School Type: Mixed secondary

Number of pupils: 530 (approx.)

Number of Places in Year 7: 92

Open Day Date: TBC

Exam Date: Mid-November

Exam Board Type: GL Assessment

 

Archbishop Tenison’s School 11 Plus Admissions

 

Each year, Archbishop Tenison’s admits 92 students into Year 7. The school aims to have a balanced intake of boys and girls. Seventy percent of places are allocated to students under the Foundation criteria, for children from worshipping Anglican families and other Christian denominations. The remaining 30% of places are allocated under the school’s Open Admissions criteria.

 

In both the Foundation and Open criteria, ability banding is applied with spaces filled based on a specific set of criteria.

 

Under the Foundation criteria, if there are more applicants than available places, the following oversubscription policy is used, giving priority to:

 

  • Looked After or Previously Looked After children
  • Students from worshipping Anglican families
  • Children from other Christian denominations
  • Pupils who already have a sibling at the school
  • Students who live closest to the school

 

Under the Open Admission criteria, the oversubscription policy gives priority to:

 

  • Looked After or Previously Looked After children
  • Students with medical or social needs
  • Students from each of the parishes of St Martin-in-the Fields and St James’s, Piccadilly (up to 5 places)
  • Pupils who already have a sibling at the school
  • Students who live closest to the school

 

Parents can learn more about the school’s admissions process in their admissions policy document.

 

How to Apply for 11 Plus Entry to Archbishop Tenison’s School

 

Before applying for a Year 7 place at Archbishop Tenison’s, the school recommends that parents do two things. Firstly, they should read the school prospectus to learn more about the school’s values, and secondly, they should attend one of the Open Days to visit the school and meet current staff and students.

 

Once parents and students have visited the school, the Common Application Form (CAF) should be completed and returned to the Local Authority. Archbishop Tenison’s School must be named on the CAF as one of the preferences.

 

A Supplementary Information Form (SIF) should also be completed and returned to enable the school to register all applicants to sit the Lambeth Banded Admissions Test in November.

 

Archbishop Tenison’s School 11 Plus Banding Test Format

 

All Year 7 applicants who apply through the secondary transfer process are required to take a standardised banding test that consists of three papers:

 

  • Verbal reasoning
  • Non-verbal reasoning
  • Numeracy

 

The tests are administered by GL Assessment and are known collectively as the Lambeth Banded Admissions Test. The same testing format is used across the majority of secondary schools in Lambeth. The tests are designed to ensure a balanced intake of children.

 

Once the tests have been scored, students are placed in one of three ability bands:

 

  • Band A: Above average
  • Band B: Average
  • Band C: Below average

 

The school aims to admit 30% of students from band A, 50% from band B, and 20% from band C.

 

How to Prepare for the Archbishop Tenison’s School 11 Plus Banding Test?

 

At Exam Papers Plus, we specialise in producing practice test papers for entrance exams like the Lambeth Banded Admissions Test. Each of our papers come complete with answers, so parents can track their child’s progress as they go.

 

In order to get the most out of our 11 Plus practice test papers, we recommend that students take the tests under timed, exam conditions. If your child is taking the Archbishop Tenison’s School test, we’d recommend the following resources if you’d like them get an idea of the type of questions they may be asked:

 

11+ Verbal Reasoning: Pack 1

11+ Verbal Reasoning: Pack 2

11 + Verbal Reasoning: Pack 3

 

11+ Non-Verbal Reasoning Pack 1

 

11+ Mathematics Pack 1

11+ Mathematics Pack 2

11+ Mathematics Pack 3

11+ Mathematics: Problem Solving

 

The information provided about Archbishop Tenison’s School was believed to be correct at the time of publishing. However, please be aware of future changes. We advise you to contact the school directly if you are unsure of anything. School contact details are provided within the post.

 

11+

Screenshot ot the Graveney School website

Founded in 1986, Graveney School is a partially-selective secondary school and sixth form located in Tooting. The school has academy status and, in previous years, has been rated as ‘outstanding’ by Ofsted. The school prides itself on providing a disciplined atmosphere for pupils to learn. Graveney aims to produce confident, responsible adults who will make a positive contribution to society.

 

For a short tour of the school grounds, take a look at this drone video:

 

 

Wandsworth Test Information for Graveney School

 

Registration Closing Date: September (year before entry)

Common Application Form (CAF) Closing Date: October

Exam Date: September

Exam Board Type: GL Assessment

Results Date: October

Allocations Date: March

Appeals Hearings: June, July

Admissions Info: admissions@wandsworth.gov.uk, 020 8871 7316

 

How to Register for the Graveney School Year 6 Test

 

Before registering for a Year 7 place at Graveney School, students and parents are encouraged to attend one of the Open Days, which take place during the summer and autumn months. The events give students the opportunity to tour the school and attend talks by the Principal and Deputies. The school currently doesn’t provide private tours.

 

For more information on Graveney School’s Open Days, please visit this page on the school’s website.

 

After taking the Wandsworth Year 6 Test, all candidates need to submit an online application through their Local Authority’s website, or complete a Common Application Form from their LA.

 

The CAF is completed after the Year 6 test so that the school already has prior information about each pupil’s academic ability before allocating places. Students who don’t attend a Wandsworth school need to register through their LA to be invited to a test session.

 

Graveney School Year 6 Oversubscription Criteria

 

Each year, Graveney School admits around 280 pupils, of which 70 places are allocated to those who score highest in the Wandsworth Test. In cases where there are less than 70 applicants through the selective stream, the school uses the following oversubscription criteria to determine place priority:

 

  • Looked After or previously Looked After children
  • Students who already have a sibling at the school
  • Students with an exceptional medical or social need
  • Children of school staff members
  • Students who live closest to the school

 

Graveney School, Year 6 Test, 11 Plus Exam Format

 

All applicants to Graveney School take the Wandsworth Year 6 Test, which consists of two papers:

 

  • Verbal reasoning (50 minutes long)
  • Non-verbal reasoning (55 minutes long)

 

The 70 places offered at Graveney are given to those that score the highest in the Year 6 test. The test is prepared by the exam board GL Assessment and is designed to provide schools with an indication of a students’ academic ability.

 

Both the verbal and non-verbal reasoning tests are laid out in a multiple-choice format and are marked electronically. Test results are age-standardised and emailed to parents in October.

 

More information on the Wandsworth Year 6 Test is provided on the local authority website.

 

Practice Papers for the Graveney School Year 6 Test

 

In addition to working from a planned study schedule, students can improve their chances of performing well in the Graveney School Year 6 Test by using practice papers.

 

At Exam Papers Plus, we publish resources that help students prepare for competitive entry tests, like the Graveney School Wandsworth Test. Our practice papers help familiarise students with the types of verbal and non-verbal reasoning questions they could be asked in the GL Assessment exam.

 

Below, we’ve listed the most relevant resources for students preparing for the Graveney School entry test. These practice tests should help give students the confidence boost they need ahead of exam day.  Each practice test includes answers and should ideally be taken under exam conditions.

 

11+ Verbal Reasoning: Pack 1

11+ Verbal Reasoning: Pack 2

11 + Verbal Reasoning: Pack 3

 

11+ Non-Verbal Reasoning Pack 1 (GL)

 

 

The information provided about the Wandsworth Year 6 Test was believed to be correct at the time of publishing. However, please be aware of future changes. We advise you to contact the school directly if you are unsure of anything. Contact details are provided within this post.

11+

Screenshot of the Ernest Bevin College website

Established in 1970, Ernest Bevin College is a secondary college for boys with a co-educational sixth form. Located in Tooting, London, the college educates around 1,173 students. Ernest Bevin is a Specialist College for Sport with a specialism in Maths and Computing. The college has also been awarded STEM assured status for its teaching in Science, Technology, Engineering, and Maths. The college is known for its focus on sport and competes at local and national level in various sporting disciplines. Ernest Bevin prides itself on its multi-cultural environment and dedicated teaching staff.

 

For an insight into what it’s like to study at Ernest Bevin College, take a look at this short video:

 

 

 

Wandsworth Test Information for Ernest Bevin College

 

Registration Closing Date: September (year before entry)

Common Application Form (CAF) Closing Date: October

Exam Date: September

Exam Board Type: GL Assessment

Results Date: October

Allocations Date: March

Appeals Hearings: June, July

Admissions Info: admissions@wandsworth.gov.uk, 020 8871 7316

 

How to Register for the Ernest Bevin College Year 6 Test

 

The college encourages students and parents to visit before registering for a Year 7 place. Open days take place throughout the summer and autumn terms where attendees will have the chance to tour the school and meet staff members. Private visits to the college can also be arranged by contacting the school on 020 8672 8582 or by emailing fwilkins@ernestbevin.london.

 

Students applying to Ernest Bevin College through its selective stream need to take the Wandsworth Test before completing the Common Application Form. The CAF can be completed online, here. Late applications will be accepted but will only be considered after the initial offer date.

 

For more information on choosing a secondary school in Wandsworth, the local authority has a very useful booklet full of information about the admissions process for each school.

 

Ernest Bevin College Year 6 Oversubscription Criteria

 

Each year, Ernest Bevin admits 180 boys into Year 7. Sixty of those places are allocated to students who achieve the highest scores in the Wandsworth Test.

 

In cases where there are more applicants than available places under the selective stream, the college uses the following oversubscription criteria, giving priority to:

 

  • Boys with a Statement of Special Educational Needs.
  • Boys with a Health Care Plan that names Ernest Bevin College.

 

For more information on the college’s full oversubscription criteria, please see the school’s admissions policy.

 

Ernest Bevin College, Year 6 Test, 11 Plus Exam Format

 

Ernest Bevin College uses the Wandsworth Year 6 Test as part of its selective admissions process. The test is designed to provide the school with an indication of each student’s academic ability. Selective places are then awarded to students with the highest scores.

 

The Wandsworth test is prepared by the exam board GL Assessment and includes a non-verbal reasoning test (55 minutes long), and a verbal reasoning test (50 minutes long).

 

Students will have the chance to take a short practice session before the exam begins. There will also be a break between the two tests. Both papers are presented on a pre-printed answer sheet, in multiple-choice format. Papers are marked electronically and are age-standardised.

 

More information on the Wandsworth Year 6 Test is provided on the local authority website.

 

Test results are emailed to parents in October and offers are sent out in March. After accepting a place at the college, students and parents are invited to attend a non-academic interview. After the interview, students can ask any questions they have about the college, order their uniform, and meet their form tutor and class mates.

 

Practice Papers for the Ernest Bevin College Year 6 Test

 

When used alongside a planned study schedule, practice papers can go a long way to increasing a student’s exam confidence. At Exam Papers Plus, we publish resources for competitive entry exams like the Ernest Bevin College Wandsworth Test.

 

Our practice papers are designed to provide students with an insight into the types of verbal and non-verbal reasoning questions they may be asked in these competitive entry exams. They also help students become familiar with the layout of the tests.

 

We’ve listed our most relevant resources for the Ernest Bevin College Year 6 Test below. These practice tests should give students the confidence boost they need ahead of test day. Each test includes full answers and should be taken under exam conditions.

 

11+ Verbal Reasoning: Pack 1

11+ Verbal Reasoning: Pack 2

11 + Verbal Reasoning: Pack 3

 

11+ Non-Verbal Reasoning Pack 1 (GL)

 

The information provided about the Wandsworth Year 6 Test was believed to be correct at the time of publishing. However, please be aware of future changes. We advise you to contact the school directly if you are unsure of anything. Contact details are provided within the post.

11+

Screenshot of the Chestnut Grove Academy website

Formed as Chestnut Grove School in 1986, Chestnut Grove Academy is a partially-selective secondary school in Balham, London. The school has academy status and was the first Arts College in the UK. Previous Ofsted reports have rated the school as ‘outstanding’. The school prides itself on being a vibrant place to learn, where students feel part of a community that promotes social responsibility.

 

Wandsworth Test Information for Chestnut Grove Academy

 

Registration Closing Date: September (year before entry)

Common Application Form (CAF) Closing Date: October

Exam Date: September

Exam Board Type: GL Assessment

Results Date: October

Allocations Date: March

Appeals Hearings: June, July

Admissions Info: admissions@wandsworth.gov.uk, 020 8871 7316

 

How to Register for the Chestnut Grove Academy Year 6 Test

 

Before registering for a place at Chestnut Grove, students and parents are encouraged to visit the school during one of its Open Events, which are held throughout the academic year. For more information about these events, parents should contact the school’s Admissions Officer on 020 8772 2512, or at admissions@chestnutgrove.wandsworth.sch.uk.

 

All applicants to Chestnut Grove Academy need to take the Wandsworth Test (in addition to any aptitude tests) before completing the Common Application Form. This is to provide the school with an indication of each student’s current ability.

 

In order to apply to take the Wandsworth Test, parents should register their child via the Wandsworth Admissions website.

 

For more information on choosing a secondary school in Wandsworth, the local authority has a very useful booklet full of information about the admissions process for each school.

 

Chestnut Grove Academy Year 6 Oversubscription Criteria

 

There are approximately 180 Year 7 places available at Chestnut Grove, with 120 places allocated to students who perform well in the Wandsworth Test. In cases where there are more applicants to the school than there are available places, Chestnut Grove uses the following oversubscription criteria to determine allocation, giving priority to:

 

  1. Looked After or previously Looked After children.
  2. Students with social or medical needs (with supporting professional evidence).
  3. Students who already have a brother or sister that attends the school.
  4. Children of current staff.
  5. Students who live closest to the school.

 

Chestnut Grove Academy, Year 6 Test, 11 Plus Exam Format

 

Every applicant to Chestnut Grove is required to take the Wandsworth Test – even those who are applying for a specialist place. The test is prepared by the exam board GL Assessment and consists of:

 

  • A non-verbal reasoning test that last for 55 minutes
  • A verbal reasoning test that lasts for 50 minutes.

 

Students are given a short practice session before each test and there will be a break between the two papers. Both papers are presented on a pre-printed answer sheet, in multiple-choice format.

 

Papers are marked electronically and are age-standardised. Based on their test score, students are placed in one of five bands to determine the top performing students. Test results are emailed to parents in October.

 

More information on the Wandsworth Year 6 Test is provided on the local authority website.

 

Practice Papers for the Chestnut Grove Academy Year 6 Test

 

At Exam Papers Plus, we believe that a little preparation goes a long way to making students feel more confident on exam day. We produce resources that help students prepare for competitive entry exams like the Chestnut Grove Academy Wandsworth Year 6 Test.

 

Our practice papers help students become familiar with the layout of this competitive entry exam. They also provide students with an idea of the types of verbal and non-verbal reasoning questions they can expect on the day of their test.

 

When used alongside a planned study schedule, the resources below can help improve a student’s confidence. Our practice tests cover all the question types that are known to appear in the Wandsworth Test. Each practice test includes answers and should be taken under exam conditions:

 

11+ Verbal Reasoning: Pack 1

11+ Verbal Reasoning: Pack 2

11 + Verbal Reasoning: Pack 3

 

11+ Non-Verbal Reasoning Pack 1 (GL)

 

The information provided about the Wandsworth Year 6 Test was believed to be correct at the time of publishing. However, please be aware of future changes. We advise you to contact the school directly if you are unsure of anything. Contact details are provided within individual school posts.

11+

Screenshot of Ashcroft Technology Academy website

Founded in 2007, Ashcroft Technology Academy is a state secondary school and sixth-form for students aged 11-18 in West Hill, London. In recent years, the school has undergone extensive refurbishment, which includes a purpose-built sixth-form and Autism Resource Centre. The school is named after Lord Michael Ashcroft and is a registered charity. Ashcroft has been awarded the Investors in People, Charter Mark, and the School Achievement Award.

 

Wandsworth Test Information for Ashcroft Technology Academy

 

Registration Closing Date: September (year before entry)

Common Application Form (CAF) Closing Date: October

Exam Date: September

Exam Board Type: GL Assessment

Results Date: October

Allocations Date: March

Appeals Hearings: June, July

Admissions Info: admissions@wandsworth.gov.uk, 020 8871 7316

 

How to Register for the Ashcroft Technology Academy Year 6 Test

 

Before registering for a place at Ashcroft Technology Academy, students and parents are encouraged to visit the school during one of its Open Events which take place at various dates throughout June and September. There are limited spaces for these events and parents are asked to express their interest by email at admissions@ashcroftacademy.org.uk, or by telephone on 020 8812 3551.

 

As part of the Wandsworth Schools admissions process, students need to take the Wandsworth Year 6 Test before completing a Common Application Form from their Local Authority. The CAF can be completed online, here and although late applications are accepted, they will only be processed after the initial offer date.

 

For more information on choosing a secondary school in Wandsworth, the local authority has a very useful booklet full of information about the admissions process for each school.

 

Ashcroft Technology Academy Year 6 Oversubscription Criteria

 

The trustees of Ashcroft Technology Academy are responsible for admitting students into the school. Each year, 240 students are admitted into Year 7, with 24 students offered a place based on their aptitude for technology.

 

All students (even those applying through the aptitude test) are required to take the Wandsworth Year 6 Test. In the first instance, places are offered to students with a Statement of Special Educational Needs or Education Health and Care Plan. Then, in cases where there are more than 240 Year 7 applicants, the schools uses the following oversubscription criteria, giving priority to:

 

  • Looked After or previously Looked After children.
  • Students who already have a brother or sister at the school.
  • Students who have a parent that works for the school.
  • Those who live closest to the school.

 

Ashcroft Technology Academy, Year 6 Test, 11 Plus Exam Format

 

All students who apply to Ashcroft Technology Academy are required to take the Wandsworth Year 6 Test. The test is designed to provide the school with an indication of each applicant’s academic ability. The Wandsworth Test is prepared by the exam board GL Assessment and includes two papers:

 

  • A non-verbal reasoning test (55 minutes long)
  • A verbal reasoning test (50 minutes long)

 

Students will have the chance to take a practice session before each test begins. There will also be a break between the two tests. Questions are presented on a pre-printed answer sheet, in a multiple-choice format.

 

Papers are marked electronically and are age-standardised. Test results are emailed to parents in October.

 

More information on the Wandsworth Year 6 Test is provided on the local authority website.

 

Practice Papers for the Ashcroft Technology Academy Year 6 Test

 

When used alongside a dedicated study plan, practice papers can really help boost a child’s confidence. At Exam Papers Plus, we specialise in publishing resources that help students prepare for entrance tests, like the Ashcroft Technology Academy Wandsworth Test.

 

Our papers are designed to help students become familiar with the types of verbal and non-verbal reasoning questions they may be asked on the day. Each of our practice tests should be taken under timed conditions to help develop students’ time management skills.

 

Below, we’ve listed our most useful resources for those preparing for the Ashcroft Technology Academy Year 6 Test. The 4 packs cover each type of question that’s known to appear in the Wandsworth Test. Each practice test includes answers:

 

11+ Verbal Reasoning: Pack 1

11+ Verbal Reasoning: Pack 2

11 + Verbal Reasoning: Pack 3

 

11+ Non-Verbal Reasoning Pack 1 (GL)

 

The information provided about the Wandsworth Year 6 Test was believed to be correct at the time of publishing. However, please be aware of future changes. We advise you to contact the school directly if you are unsure of anything. Contact details are provided within the post.

11+

Screenshot of Burntwood School website

Founded in 1986, Burntwood School is a girls’ secondary school in Wandsworth, London. Although principally an all-girls’ school, the sixth form does have some male students. Refurbishments to the school were completed in 2014, which saw six new buildings, including teaching pavilions, a new sports hall and performing arts buildings. In 2013, the school gained Academy status and in 2015, it won the RIBA Stirling Prize for architecture.

 

For an insight into what it’s like to study at Burntwood School, take a look at this short video:

 

 

Wandsworth Test Information for Burntwood School

 

Registration Closing Date: September (year before entry)

Common Application Form (CAF) Closing Date: October

Exam Date: September

Exam Board Type: GL Assessment

Results Date: October

Allocations Date: March

Appeals Hearings: June, July

Admissions Info: admissions@wandsworth.gov.uk, 020 8871 7316

 

How to Register for the Burntwood School Year 6 Test

 

Before applying for a place at Burntwood School, parents and students are encouraged to attend an Open Day. The event provides attendees with the opportunity to view the campus and facilities and to meet current students and staff members. There will also be a guided tour of the school and a presentation from the school Principal. For more information on the open day events, parents can contact the school on 020 8946 6201 or by email at info@burntwoodschool.com.

 

Applications to Burntwood are made on the Secondary Transfer application form for the borough in which the student lives. Burntwood School should be listed as one of the student’s preferences. For example, students in Wandsworth should apply using the Wandsworth form, and those that live in another borough like Merton, should apply using the Merton form.

 

Additionally, parents need to complete a Common Application Form for the local authority in which they live. The CAF can be completed online, here. Late applications will be accepted but will only be considered after the initial offer date.

 

For more information on choosing a secondary school in Wandsworth, the local authority has a very useful booklet full of information about the admissions process for each school.

 

Burntwood School Year 6 Oversubscription Criteria

 

In cases where there are more applicants than available places at Burntwood, the school uses its oversubscription criteria to determine priority.

 

In the first instance, places are offered to students with a Statement of Special Educational Needs or Education Health and Care Plan. Remaining places are then allocated as follows:

 

78 places are allocated by general ability to students with the highest results in the Wandsworth Year 6 Test. The remaining 35 places are allocated in the following order:

 

  1. Looked After, or previously Looked-After children.
  2. Students with exceptional medical or social needs.
  3. Students who have a sibling that currently attends the school.
  4. Students who live closest to the school.

 

Burntwood School, Year 6 Test, 11 Plus Exam Format

 

Burntwood School uses the Wandsworth Year 6 Test as part of its admissions process. The test is designed to provide the school with an indication of each applicant’s academic ability. The test is prepared by the exam board GL Assessment and includes a non-verbal reasoning test (55 minutes long), and a verbal reasoning test (50 minutes long).

 

Before each test begins, students will be given a short practice section. There will also be a break between the two tests. Both papers are presented on a pre-printed answer sheet, in multiple-choice format.

 

Papers are marked electronically and are age-standardised. Test results are emailed to parents in October.

 

More information on the Wandsworth Year 6 Test is provided on the local authority website.

 

Practice Papers for the Burntwood School Year 6 Test

 

At Exam Papers Plus, we specialise in producing resources that help students prepare for competitive entry exams, like the Burntwood School Wandsworth Year 6 11 plusTest. Our papers are specifically designed to help students become familiar with the layout of competitive entry tests and the types of verbal and non-verbal reasoning questions that are used in this GL Assessment exam.

 

The resources listed below will be particularly useful in improving the confidence of students who are preparing for the Burntwood Year 6 Test. They cover all the question types that are known to appear in the Wandsworth Test. Each practice test includes answers and should be taken under exam conditions.

 

11+ Verbal Reasoning: Pack 1

11+ Verbal Reasoning: Pack 2

11 + Verbal Reasoning: Pack 3

 

11+ Complete Video Guide to Verbal Reasoning

 

11+ Non-Verbal Reasoning Pack 1 (GL)

 

The information provided about the Wandsworth Year 6 Test was believed to be correct at the time of publishing. However, please be aware of future changes. We advise you to contact the schools directly if you are unsure of anything. Contact details are provided within individual school posts.

11+

Screenshot of Reading Girls' School website

Established in 1818, Reading Girls’ School is a partially selective, bilateral school for girls in Reading, Berkshire. Approximately 430 girls are educated by 25 staff members. The school is known for its focus on business and enterprise. Students are encouraged to strive for excellence academically and socially and the curriculum offers a broad range of subjects and extra-curricular activities. Although not a grammar, Reading Girls’ does use an 11 Plus-style entrance test as part of its admissions process.

 

For a virtual tour of the school, take a look at this short video:

 

 

11 Plus Exam Information for Reading Girls’ School

 

Address: Reading Girls School, Northumberland Avenue, Reading, RG2 7PY

County: Reading

Admissions Info: admin@readinggirlsschool.net, 0118 986 1336

School Type: Co-educational, partially selective

Number of pupils: 430 (approx.)

Number of Places in Year 7: 170 (42 by selective stream)

Open Day Date: March

Exam Date: October

Exam Board Type: GL Assessment

 

Reading Girls’ School 11 Plus Admissions

 

This article is relevant for those aiming for entry to the school based on the Selective Stream Test, of which there are 42 allocated places. The school also offers entry via the Coordinated Secondary Admissions Scheme.

 

Admission to Reading Girls’ School in Year 7 follows the process set out by Coordinated Secondary Admissions Scheme, which is responsible for setting the school’s admissions policy. Each year, the school admits approximately 170 places, 42 of which are selected based on ability.

 

Students who have a Special Educational Needs or an Education, Health and Care Plan are given priority of place above other students.

 

In cases where there are more applicants than available places, the school uses the following oversubscription criteria, giving priority to:

 

  1. Looked After and previously Looked After girls.
  2. Students who score highest in the selection test.
  3. Girls who have medical or social grounds for attending the school.
  4. Girls who have a sister who currently attends the school.
  5. Students who live closest to the school.

 

For further details about Reading Girls’ School admission process, please visit the school’s website.

 

How to Apply for 11 Plus (11+) Selective Entry to Reading Girls’ School

 

Before applying for a place at Reading Girls’ School, parents and students are encouraged to attend the school’s Open Day, which usually takes place in March. At the event, parents and students will have the opportunity to tour the school and meet current staff and students.

 

Once parents have visited the school and are sure that Reading Girls’ is the right establishment for their daughter, applications should be made to the appropriate Local Authority (LA), or submitted online. The application form can be downloaded here.

 

Students who wish to apply for one of the 42 selective places, should also complete the school’s registration form, which can be accessed here.

 

Reading Girls’ School Selective Stream Test (11 Plus Exam) Format

 

Of the 170 available places at the school, 42 are allocated to students who score the highest in the Selective Stream Test. The exam takes place in October and is administered by the exam board, GL Assessment.

 

There are three test papers in total, comprising of:

 

  1. Verbal reasoning
  2. Non-verbal reasoning
  3. Mathematics

 

Each test is in multiple-choice format and results will be sent to parents before the end of October. Place allocations will be made at the beginning of March.

 

For more information on the Selective Stream Test, please visit the Selective Stream Test page on the school’s website.

 

How to Prepare for the Reading Girls’ School 11 Plus Exam?

 

A little forward planning can go a long way to helping students perform well in the Reading Girls’ School Selective Stream Test. As a starting point, we’d suggest that parents read our 11 Plus guide for parents for an overview of what the test typically involves.

 

Once a study schedule is in place, using practice exam papers in addition to regular preparation can really help boost a student’s performance. Our practice papers help students become familiar with the layout of the exam and the types of questions that may be asked on test day. They can also help identify any weak areas that may need improvement prior to the exam.

 

For girls due to take the Reading Girls School Selective Stream Test, we highly recommend the following resources to help prepare in an efficient manner:

 

11+ Verbal Reasoning: Pack 1 (GL-style)

11+ Verbal Reasoning: Pack 2 (GL-style)

11 + Verbal Reasoning: Pack 3 (GL-style)

 

11+ Complete Video Guide to Verbal Reasoning

 

11+ Non-Verbal Reasoning Pack 1 (GL-style)

 

11+ Maths Pack 1 (GL-style)

11+ Maths Pack 2 (GL-style)

11+ Maths Pack 3 (GL-style)

11+ Maths Problem Solving (GL-style)

11+ Maths Mental Arithmetic

 

The information provided about Reading Girls’ School was believed to be correct at the time of publishing. However, please be aware of future changes. We advise you to contact the school directly if you are unsure of anything. School contact details are provided within the post.

11+

Screenshot of Badminton School website

Established 1858, Badminton School is an independent, day and boarding school for girls aged 3 to 18. The school is located in Westbury-on-Trym, in Bristol and is named after Badminton House in Clifton, where it was founded. The school has a reputation for consistently performing well in secondary school league tables and in previous years has been ranked third in the Financial Times’ Top 1000 schools. The school aims to prepare its girls for living and working in a global society.

 

The Badminton School Cognitive Abilities Test (CAT) Information

 

Registration Closing Date: TBC

Exam Date: MidJanuary

Exam Board Type: CAT and set by school

Results Date: End of January

Admissions Info: Badminton School

 

Badminton School Admissions Criteria

 

Badminton school encourages all prospective students to visit the school during one of its Open Days, or to arrange a private visit.

 

Once parents have visited the school, they can register their daughter for the assessment, which includes an online Cognitive Abilities Test. After the test has been taken, candidates are invited to a Taster Day, where they will meet other girls in their year group and experience the school environment.

 

The Candidate’s current school is then contacted for references and offer letters are sent out to parents shortly afterwards.

 

For more information on the admissions process at Badminton School, please visit the Admissions pages on the school website. Alternatively, parents can email  admissions@badmintonschool.co.uk, or telephone 0117 905 5271.

 

How to Apply for 11 plus Entry to Badminton School

 

Before applying for a Year 7 Place at Badminton School, students and parents are encouraged to attend the Open Morning, which takes place in March (attendance also forms part of the school’s oversubscription criteria). At the event, girls and their parents will have the opportunity to take a tour of the school and meet staff members. Open Morning places can be booked in advance here.

 

After visiting the school, parents should complete the school’s online registration form and pay a registration fee of £50 for Day Girls and £150 for Boarders.

 

Badminton School Year 7 CAT Assessment

 

Year 7 entry to Badminton School is determined by student performance in an online Cognitive Abilities Test, as well as written exams in Maths and English. These assessments take place in January

 

As part of the admissions process, candidates are also invited to attend an interview with a senior member of staff. References are then requested from the girl’s current school.

 

Results are sent to parents by post or email and offer letters are sent out approximately two weeks after the assessment date. Parents are then asked to accept the offer and pay the acceptance deposit before the deadline.

 

How to Prepare for the Badminton School 11 plus Entrance Test

 

At Exam Papers Plus, we believe that a little preparation can go a long way to helping students pass their entrance exams. As the written element of the Badminton School entrance test focuses on Maths and English, we would recommend that students get acquainted with the types of questions they may face on test day. The following eleven plus practice papers will help students get used to answering similar questions and build the skills required to do well in 11 plus exams:

11+ English Pack 1

11+ English Pack 2

11+ Spelling Pack 1

11+ Spelling Pack 2

 

11+ Mathematics Pack 1

11+ Mathematics Pack 2

11+ Mental Arithmetic

 

If your order value is over £60, simply apply the code eppdiscount at checkout to get 10% off your total.

 

Online Practice for the Badminton School 11 Plus CAT Entrance Test

 

The Badminton assessment process also requires students to take an online CAT test. On our sister site, Pretest Plus, we have two online practice tests available that are specifically designed to help students prepare for online cognitive ability tests:

 

CAT Practice Test 1

CAT Practice Test 2

 

These online tests will help students familiarise themselves with the question types and formats that come up frequently in CAT tests. Once each module is complete, it will be marked automatically and students can then review each question with detailed explanations provided for each question.

 

The information in this post was correct at the time of publishing. However, please be aware of future changes. We advise you to contact the school directly if you are unsure of anything. School contact details are provided within the post.

 

Please note that Exam Papers Plus and Pretest Plus are independent publishers of practice tests and are not affiliated with or endorsed by any other test publisher.

11+

branded image from Exam Papers Plus on the Wandsworth Test: Year 6

There are currently 5 schools that use the Wandsworth Year 6 Test as part of their 11 Plus admissions process. Some of the schools use the test exclusively, whereas others use it in conjunction with their own aptitude exams.

 

For detailed admissions information on each school, please read the linked posts below:

 

Burntwood School

Chestnut Grove Academy

Ernest Bevin College

Graveney School

Ashcroft Technology Academy

 

11 Plus Exam Information for Wandsworth Schools

 

Registration Closing Date: September (year before entry)

Common Application Form (CAF) Closing Date: October

Exam Date: September

Exam Board Type: GL Assessment

Results Date: October

Allocations Date: March

Appeals Hearings: June, July

Admissions Info: admissions@wandsworth.gov.uk, 020 8871 7316

 

How to Register for the Wandsworth Year 6 Test

 

Before registering for a place at any of the five schools that use the Wandsworth Test as part of their entry process, students and parents are encouraged to visit their preferred school during one of its open events. Typically, these events include a tour of the school, the opportunity to meet staff and current students, and learn more about the school’s admissions process.

 

Pupils who attend a state primary school in Wandsworth are automatically registered to take the Wandsworth Year 6 Test at their current school.

 

Parents only need to register their child if they are applying for a place at one of the five schools listed above and they attend an independent school, or a state primary school outside of Wandsworth.

 

Online registration forms are available from the Wandsworth Local Authority website from July, and the closing date for applications is early September. Some schools also require parents to complete a supplementary application form.

 

For more information on choosing a secondary school in Wandsworth, the local authority has a very useful booklet full of information about the admissions process for each school.

 

Wandsworth Schools, Year 6 Test, 11 Plus Exam Format

 

The Wandsworth Year 6 Test is designed to provide Wandsworth schools with an indication of a student’s academic ability. Students who have a statement of Special Educational Needs do not have to take the test.

 

The test is prepared by GL Assessment and has two parts:

 

  • A non-verbal reasoning test, which lasts for 55 minutes.
  • A verbal reasoning test, which lasts for 50 minutes.

 

There will be a short practice session before each test and a break between the two parts. For both sections, students are given a pre-printed answer sheet to complete, laid out in a similar format to a multiple-choice test. There is no extended writing involved.

 

Scores are marked electronically and are age-standardised to ensure that older students don’t have an unfair advantage. Test results are emailed to parents in October.

 

More information on the Wandsworth Year 6 Test is provided on the local authority website.

 

Practice Papers for the Wandsworth Year 6 Test

 

Here at Exam Papers Plus, we specialise in producing resources to help students prepare for competitive entry exams, like the Wandsworth Year 6 Test. We have a range of practice papers that are specifically designed to help students familiarise themselves with the types of Verbal and Non-Verbal Reasoning questions that are used in this GL Assessment exam.

 

Students currently preparing for the Wandsworth Year 6 Test will find the resources below particularly useful. They cover all the question types that are known to appear in the Wandsworth Test, so your child can approach their exam with confidence. Each practice test is timed so your child can get used to working under time pressure. Answers are included.

 

11+ Verbal Reasoning: Pack 1 (GL-style)

11+ Verbal Reasoning: Pack 2 (GL-style)

11 + Verbal Reasoning: Pack 3 (GL-style)

11+ Complete Video Guide to Verbal Reasoning

 

11+ Non-Verbal Reasoning Pack 1 (GL-style)

 

The information provided about the Wandsworth Year 6 Test was believed to be correct at the time of publishing. However, please be aware of future changes. We advise you to contact the schools directly if you are unsure of anything. Contact details are provided within individual school posts.

11+

The London Consortium have released a new website with further information about their shared examination process. This information indicates that the exam will be created for them by the publishing board CEM.

 

The exam is therefore likely to share a number of similarities with the 11+ exam that CEM creates for numerous grammar schools across the country. This is emphasized by the fact that the official familiarisation material provided for the London Consortium exam is identical to that provided for the 11+ CEM grammar school exam.

 

Here at Exam Papers Plus, we specialise in producing resources that are specifically designed to help students prepare for CEM exams, like the London Consortium 11 plus test..

 

Whatever your child’s current attainment level, investing some additional time for preparation in the lead-up to the entrance test is likely to improve their performance ahead of the actual exam. At a minimum, being familiar with the question types, as well as the specific ways that answers must be recorded in the London Consortium 11 plus exam, will help your child approach their assessment with confidence.

 

As the London Consortium assessment will focus on Maths, Verbal Reasoning and Non-Verbal Reasoning, we highly recommend our selection of eleven plus papers that are designed in the CEM style for these three subjects. All our packs include answers so you can quickly check your child’s work and identify where they might need additional focus and improvement.

 

We would specifically recommend the following resources that can be downloaded and used immediately after purchase:

 

Mathematics Section

 

11+ Short Numerical Reasoning (CEM)

This pack contains 10 tests, each consisting of 20 questions. It focuses on time-pressured problem solving with question styles that are known to have been previously used by CEM.

 

11+ Long Numerical Reasoning (CEM)

This pack contains 10 tests, each consisting of 5 sections, with 5 questions in each section. It focuses on a specific type of question that comes up in CEM exams. These questions are based on some form of chart or diagram that the student must use to work out the answers. The answers must be recorded on a separate sheet in a specific manner. This pack includes separate answer sheets so students can get used to recording their responses in this way, just like they will need to do in the 11+ London Consortium test.

 

11+ MC Numerical Reasoning (CEM)

This pack contains 20 tests, each with 10 questions. It focuses on a different CEM question type in which there are multiple possible answer choices provided and the student must pick the correct one for each question. Separate answer sheets are provided so students can get used to recording their responses in this manner.

 

11+ Mental Arithmetic

This pack contains 15 tests, each with 15 questions. It focuses on fundamental arithmetic skills, developing a strong basis that allows students to work through maths questions efficiently and with confidence.

 

Verbal Reasoning Section

 

Verbal Reasoning, as defined by CEM, is quite different to how it may be traditionally understood. It includes a number of question types that focus on vocabulary and comprehension as well as some more unusual formats. Each of the packs below focuses on a different skill that is assessed in the Verbal Reasoning section of CEM 11+ exams, such as the London Consortium Test.

 

11+ Verbal Reasoning (CEM)

This pack contains plenty of practice for various question types that crop up frequently in CEM exams. These include questions  that assess a student’s grasp of synonyms and antonyms as well as other formats such as shuffled sentences and contextual cloze.

 

11+ Verbal Reasoning – Synonyms and Antonyms (CEM) Pack 1

11+ Verbal Reasoning – Synonyms and Antonyms (CEM) Pack 2

These packs contains plenty of vocabulary practice, specifically designed to match the style used in CEM exams in the ‘Word Choice’ section. There are 24 practice tests in each pack, each with 29 questions. We recommend beginning with Pack 1. Pack 2 is designed to be more challenging.

 

11+ Verbal Reasoning – Shuffled Sentences (CEM) Pack 1

This pack focuses on a specific CEM Verbal Reasoning question type that comes up frequently. It’s relatively unusual and, in our experience, students can find it difficult to get to grips with. There are 20 tests included, all designed to match the exact format and style used in the actual exam. Answer sheets and answers are included.

 

11+ Comprehension (CEM) Pack 1

11+ Comprehension (CEM) Pack 2

These packs focus on multiple-choice comprehension, which will feature in the CEM 11+ London Consortium Test. There are 15 comprehension tests included in each pack. Pack 1 focuses on classical fiction and Pack 2 focuses on non-fiction.

 

11+ Cloze (CEM)

This pack focuses on cloze questions that are used in almost all CEM 11+ exams. The pack covers three different variations, with 21 tests in total.

 

11+ Spelling Pack 1 (CEM)

11+ Spelling Pack 2 (CEM)

CEM 11+ exams, such as the 11 plus London Consortium Test, focus heavily on assessing a child’s vocabulary. These packs each introduce 200 words within context, helping students to improve both their vocabulary and spelling. This will prove useful for the Verbal Reasoning section of the exam. Pack 2 is designed to be more challenging than Pack 1.

 

Non-Verbal Reasoning Section

11+ Non-Verbal Reasoning

This pack covers a number of the question types that are used in CEM 11+ Non-Verbal Reasoning exams such as Matrices, Box Sequences and Exceptions. There are some extension question types as well. Whilst these are not known to be utilised in CEM exams, they will help develop your child’s Non-Verbal reasoning ability, which will stand them in good stead for the exam.

 

If your total order value is over £60, simply apply the code eppdiscount at checkout to get 10% off your whole order.

 

Please click on the links below to learn more about the admissions process at each of the schools in the London Consortium:

 

Channing School

 

Francis Holland School (NW1)

 

Francis Holland School (SW1)

 

Godolphin and Latymer School

 

More House School

 

Northwood College

 

Notting Hill and Ealing High School

 

Queen’s College London

 

Queen’s Gate School

 

South Hampstead High School

 

St. Helen’s School London

 

St. James Senior Girls’ School

 

We hope you find this article useful. Please don’t hesitate to get in touch if you need some advice or if you have any questions or queries.

11+, Grammar Schools

Watford Grammar School for Boys (WGSB) is a partially selective academy located in Watford. With over 1,200 boys aged 11-18 on the school’s roll, it became a same-sex school in 1884.

 

Part of the South West Herts Grammar School Consortium, Watford Boys is one of the highest-achieving state schools in England in terms of exam results. Pupils are taught a stimulating academic curriculum and offered numerous extracurricular activities, clubs and excursions throughout the school year.

 

11 Plus Exam Information for Watford Grammar School for Boys

 

Address: Watford Grammar School for Boys, Rickmansworth Road, Watford WD18 7JF

County: Hertfordshire

Admissions Info: dunsbyr@watfordboys.org, 01923 208900

School Type: Boys, partially selective

Number of pupils: 1,265 (approx.)

Number of Places in Year 7: 224

Open Day Date: October

Exam Date: September

Exam Board Type: CEM and GL Assessment

 

Watford Grammar School for Boys 11 Plus Admissions

 

This article is relevant for those aiming for entry to the school based on the Academic Criterion. The school also offers an entry point via the Music criterion, which is not discussed here.

 

To apply a Year 7 place Watford Grammar School for Boys, parents must complete the School Information Form (SIF) and the Secondary Transfer (or Common Application) Form for the local authority (LA) in which they are resident. For residents living in Hertfordshire, the LA is Hertfordshire County Council. Parents must also register their son with the South West Herts Consortium. It is essential that all forms are completed and returned no later than the closing date, as late applications will not be considered.

 

WGSB offers 146 community places in Year 7 and 78 specialist places. The school is heavily oversubscribed and has a clearly-defined admissions criteria.

 

The oversubscription criteria for community places gives priority to:

 

  • Looked After, or previously Looked After, children
  • Boys whose normal home address is nearest to the school and who would not be allocated a place under any other criterion
  • Boys with a parent who is a permanent member of the school staff
  • Boys with a sibling (brother) enrolled at the school
  • Boys with a sibling (sister) enrolled at Watford Grammar School for Girls
  • Boys who live closest to the school

 

The oversubscription criteria for specialist places gives priority to:

 

  • Boys selected on the basis of aptitude for music as measured by the school’s assessment procedures, in merit order
  • Boys selected by academic ability as measured by the school’s assessment procedures, in merit order

For more information about the full admissions process at WGBS, visit the Year 7 admissions pages on the school’s website.

 

How to Apply for 11 Plus Entry to Watford Grammar School for Boys

 

To apply for a Year 7 place at WGSB, parents are advised to register their son with the South West Herts Admissions Consortium in the first instance.

 

Paper registration forms can be collected from any of the schools within the Consortium. Return the completed form to:

 

South West Herts School Tests

PO Box 2439

Watford

WD18 1UZ

 

The Consortium receives a number of registrations that are invalid or ineligible. Before registering, parents are advised to thoroughly check their child’s eligibility for entry. Failure to do so may result in disappointment.

 

Watford Grammar School for Boys 11 Plus Exam Format

 

Watford Grammar School for Boys adheres to Hertfordshire’s Co-ordinated Admissions Scheme and as such, the academic exam consists of the following tests:

 

  • Maths paper set by GL Assessment
  • Verbal Reasoning paper set by CEM

 

The mathematics test is around 50 minutes long, with the Verbal Reasoning lasting approximately one hour.

The academic tests have been specially devised for the Consortium schools and no minimum score will be required to gain admission. Places are offered strictly in descending order of candidates’ standardised test scores.

 

How to Prepare for the Watford Grammar School for Boys 11 Plus Exam?

 

When it comes to the WGBS eleven plus exam, preparation is key.  A small amount of regular and focused preparation can go a long way.

 

Parents can give their son the best chance of performing well and gaining a place at WGBS by incorporating practice papers into their study sessions. Using these papers can increase the chances of securing a Year 7 place at the school by helping students familiarise themselves with the types of questions they will be asked.

 

In the lead up to the exam, we’d advise students to take our practice papers under exam conditions to improve their time management skills and get them used to answering all the questions within the allocated time.

 

For the Watford Grammar School for Boys eleven plus exam, we would specifically recommend the following resources:

 

11+ Verbal Reasoning (CEM)

11+ Cloze (CEM)

11+ Comprehension (CEM)

 

11+ Spelling Pack 1 (CEM)

11+ Spelling Pack 2 (CEM)

 

11+ Maths Grammar Schools Pack 1

11+ Maths Grammar Schools Pack 2

11+ Maths Grammar Schools Pack 3

 

11+ Maths Problem Solving Grammar Schools

11+ Mental Arithmetic

 

The information provided about Watford Grammar School for Boys was believed to be correct at the time of publishing. However, please be aware of future changes. We advise you to contact the school directly if you are unsure of anything. School contact details are provided within the post.

11+, Grammar Schools

Watford Grammar School for Girls (WGGS) is an academy for girls aged 11-18. Based in Watford, it is a partially selective school, with 25% of pupils admitted on academic ability and 10% of musical aptitude.

 

Part of the South West Herts Grammar School Consortium, Watford Girls is a high-achieving school. Girls enjoy a balanced and broad academic curriculum in an effort to ensure each child achieves her own personal, academic and professional goals. Extracurricular activities play a vital role in the girls’ time at WGGS, with a variety of clubs and societies available. Year 7 students are encouraged to take part in at least three clubs per week to both broaden their interests and to make new friends.

 

11 Plus Exam Information for Watford Grammar School for Girls

 

Address: Watford Grammar School for Girls, Lady’s Close, Watford WD18 0AE

County: Hertfordshire

Admissions Info: admin@watfordgirls.herts.sch.uk, 01923 223 403

School Type: Co-educational, partially selective

Number of pupils: 1,266 (approx.)

Number of Places in Year 7: 210

Open Day Date: October

Exam Date: September

Exam Board Type: CEM and GL Assessment

 

Watford Grammar School for Girls 11 Plus Admissions

 

This article is relevant for those aiming for entry to the school based on the Academic Criterion. The school also offers an entry point via the Music criterion, which is not discussed here.

 

To be admitted into Year 7 at Watford Grammar School for Girls, parents must send a completed Supplementary Information Form (SIF) form to the school. These forms are usually available from September. A Common Application Form (CAF) form should also be completed and returned to the Local Authority (LA), with Watford Grammar School for Girls as a named school. The CAF will also be available from September.

 

Parents should also register their daughter with the South West Herts Consortium. Please note that this is not an application form for a particular school, so both the SIF and CAF must be completed. Late applications will not be accepted.

 

WGGS has 137 community places and up to 73 specialist places available for Year 7. There are often more applications than available places, in which case, the following oversubscription criteria is used, giving priority to:

 

  • Looked After, or previously looked after, children
  • Girls whose normal home address is nearest to the school
  • Girls with a parent who is a permanent member of the school staff
  • Girls with a sibling (sister) enrolled at the school
  • Girls with a sibling (brother) enrolled at Watford Grammar School for Boys
  • Students who live closest to the school
  • Girls selected on the basis of aptitude for music as measured by the school’s assessment procedures, in merit order
  • Girls selected by academic ability as measured by the school’s assessment procedures, in merit order

 

For further details about Watford Grammar School for Girls’ admission process, please visit the school’s website.

 

How to Apply for 11 Plus Entry to Watford Grammar School for Girls

 

Once parents have completed both the SIF and CAF, they should register their child for the 11 Plus exam via the South West Herts Schools Consortium. Registration can be completed via the Consortium website, or by collecting a form from the school. Paper registrations can be returned to:

 

South West Herts School Tests

PO Box 2439

Watford

WD18 1UZ

 

Parents should check their child’s eligibility for entry before registering, as failing to do so may result in disappointment.

 

Watford Grammar School for Girls 11 Plus Exam Format

 

Watford Grammar School for Girls follows the Co-ordinated Admissions Scheme for Hertfordshire.

 

Prospective pupils will be required to take the following exams:

 

  • Maths paper, lasts approximately 50 minutes and is set by GL Assessment
  • Verbal Reasoning paper, lasts approximately one hour and is set by CEM

 

How to Prepare for the Watford Grammar School for Girls 11 Plus Exam?

 

With some forward-planning and regular study sessions, students will be well prepared come exam day. A little bit of regular preparation can go a long way! We’d recommend that parents read our 11 Plus guide for parents.

 

Using practice exam papers as part of an 11+ study routine can really help improve a student’s performance. These papers allow children to get a better idea of the exam layout and the question types. They can also help identify any weaker areas, allowing them plenty of time to improve.

 

For those sitting the Watford Grammar School for Girls eleven plus exam, we highly recommend the following resources to help prepare in an efficient manner:

 

11+ Verbal Reasoning (CEM)

11+ Cloze (CEM)

11+ Comprehension (CEM)

 

11+ Spelling Pack 1 (CEM)

11+ Spelling Pack 2 (CEM)

 

11+ Maths Grammar Schools Pack 1

11+ Maths Grammar Schools Pack 2

11+ Maths Grammar Schools Pack 3

 

11+ Maths Problem Solving Grammar Schools

11+ Mental Arithmetic

 

The information provided about Watford Grammar School for Girls was believed to be correct at the time of publishing. However, please be aware of future changes. We advise you to contact the school directly if you are unsure of anything. School contact details are provided within the post.

11+, Grammar Schools

Founded in 1862, St Clement Danes School is a co-educational, partially selective academy based in the Hertfordshire village of Chorleywood. Rated as ‘Outstanding’ by Ofsted, the school educates over 1,300 pupils aged between 11 and 18. St Clement Danes is part of the South West Herts Grammar School Consortium and offers a varied curriculum and broad extra-curricular timetable.

 

The school is committed to a high quality pastoral care programme and also has an active wellbeing programme, focusing on building students’ resilience and mental strength.

 

11 Plus Exam Information for St Clement Danes School

 

Address: St Clement Danes School, Chenies Road, Chorleywood, WD3 6EW

County: Hertfordshire

Admissions Info: admissions@stclementdanes.herts.sch.uk, 01923 284169

School Type: Co-educational, partially selective

Number of pupils: 1,336 (approx.)

Number of Places in Year 7: 240

Open Day Date: October

Exam Date: September

Exam Board Type: CEM and GL Assessment

 

St Clement Danes School 11 Plus Admissions

 

This article is relevant for those aiming for entry to the school based on the Academic Criterion. The school also offers an entry point via the Music criterion, which is not discussed here.

 

Admission to St Clement Danes School is handled through the Secondary Transfer process. To apply for a Year 7 place, parents must register their child with the South West Herts Schools Consortium. Registration can be done online and once completed, parents can view all exam dates and locations.

 

St Clement Danes is a popular school and is usually oversubscribed at Year 7. In cases where there are more applicants than available places, the school uses the following oversubscription criteria, giving priority to:

 

  • Children in public care
  • Children with a sibling attending the school
  • Children of school staff
  • Distance from home to school

 

For a full explanation of the school’s oversubscription criteria, please consult the admissions policy.

 

How to Apply for 11 Plus Entry to St Clement Danes School

 

To apply for 11+ entry to St Clement Danes School, parents must register their child with the South West Herts Schools Consortium. Registration can be done online at any time during the registration period. Late registrations will not be accepted under any circumstances.

 

Paper registration forms can be collected from any of the schools within the Consortium and returned to:

 

South West Herts School Tests

PO Box 2439

Watford

WD18 1UZ

 

Parents should always check their child’s eligibility for entry before registering in order to avoid disappointment.

 

St Clement Danes School 11 Plus Exam Format

 

St Clement Danes School follows the county’s Co-ordinated Admissions Scheme.

 

Prospective pupils will sit the following exams:

 

  • Maths – this is set by GL Assessment and lasts for approximately 50 minutes
  • Verbal Reasoning – set by CEM and lasts for approximately one hour

 

How to Prepare for the St Clement Danes School 11 Plus Exam?

 

The build-up to the St Clement Danes 11+ test can be an anxious time, but with some forward-planning and regular study sessions, preparation needn’t disrupt the usual routine.

 

Students should give themselves plenty of time for revision sessions. They should avoid trying to cram in a few sessions the week before the test. Pupils should adopt a steady approach to exam revision over a longer period of time to give them the best chance of performing well.

 

Parents should encourage their child to include 11 Plus practice papers in their study routine. Set these papers under timed conditions to give them practice of answering questions quickly and under pressure.  This is a really efficient way to help studnets improve whilst identifying any weak areas that could do with a little more focus.

 

For the St Clement Danes School 11+ exam, we would specifically recommend the following resources:

 

11+ Verbal Reasoning (CEM)

11+ Cloze (CEM)

11+ Comprehension (CEM)

 

11+ Spelling Pack 1 (CEM)

11+ Spelling Pack 2 (CEM)

 

11+ Maths Grammar Schools Pack 1

11+ Maths Grammar Schools Pack 2

11+ Maths Grammar Schools Pack 3

 

11+ Maths Problem Solving Grammar Schools

11+ Mental Arithmetic

 

The information provided about St Clement Danes School was believed to be correct at the time of publishing. However, please be aware of future changes. We advise you to contact the school directly if you are unsure of anything. School contact details are provided within the post.

 

 

11+, Grammar Schools

Parmiter’s School is a co-educational state school with academy status. Located in Hertfordshire, Parmiter’s is partially selective and a member of the South West Herts School Grammar School Consortium.

 

Over 1200 pupils attend the school and are divided into six houses that are named after benefactors and Old Parmiterians: Beven, Carter, Lee, Mayhew, Renvoize and Woolley. All students are encouraged to take part in a wide variety of academic, cultural and sporting House events throughout the year. Parmiter’s School is one of the highest-performing in the UK and is currently the most oversubscribed school in Hertfordshire.

 

11 Plus Exam Information for Parmiter’s School

 

Address: Parmiter’s School, High Elms Lane, Garston, Watford WD25 0UU

County: Hertfordshire

Admissions Info: admissions@parmiters.herts.sch.uk, 01923 671424

School Type: Co-educational, partially selective

Number of pupils: 1,245 (approx.)

Number of Places in Year 7: 208

Open Day Date: October

Exam Date: September

Exam Board Type: CEM and GL Assessment

 

Parmiter’s School 11 Plus Admissions

 

To apply for a Year 7 place at Parmiter’s School, parents must register their child with the South West Herts Schools Consortium. Parents must also complete the school’s Supplementary Information Form (SIF) and return it to the school. The form can be downloaded from the school’s admissions page. Applicants must also complete and return Hertfordshire County Council’s Common Application Form (CAF), ranking up to four schools in order of preference.

 

Parmiter’s School is almost always oversubscribed. When there are too many applicants for the places available, the school uses the following oversubscription criteria, giving priority to:

 

  • Looked After, of previously Looked After children
  • Students who live closest to the school, using Hertfordshire County Council’s ‘straight line’ distance measurement system (up to 10 percent of places)
  • Children with a sibling at the school
  • Children with special educational needs, or a health and care plan

 

Additionally, 25% of places are determined by academic merit, and 10% on the basis of proven aptitude in music

 

How to Apply for 11 Plus Entry to Parmiter’s School

 

This article is relevant for those aiming for entry to the school based on the Academic Criterion. The school also offers an entry point via the Music criterion, which is not discussed here.

 

To apply for eleven plus entry to Parmiter’s School, parents need to register their child with the South West Herts Schools Consortium. Registration can be completed via the Consortium website during the registration window, or by collecting a form from the school. Paper registrations should be returned to:

 

South West Herts School Tests

PO Box 2439

Watford

WD18 1UZ

 

Parents are advised to check their child’s eligibility for entry before registering in order to avoid disappointment.

 

Parmiter’s School 11 Plus Exam Format

 

Hertfordshire operates a Co-ordinated Admissions Scheme, which includes partially-selective schools like Parmiter’s.

 

The exam consists of two tests:

 

  • Maths paper set by GL Assessment (lasts approximately 50 minutes)
  • Verbal Reasoning paper set by CEM (lasts approximately one hour)

 

How to Prepare for the Parmiter’s School 11 Plus Exam?

 

Understandably, the eleven plus exam can make students and parents a little anxious. To help alleviate any concerns, we’d advise that parents help their children create a thorough revision timetable in the lead-up to the test. Preparing the timetable early will give students the best possible chance of gaining a place at Parmiter’s.

 

Parents may also find the following articles from our blog useful in helping their children prepare for the exam:

 

 

The sooner pupils begin studying for the exam, the sooner parents will be able to recognise any gaps in their knowledge. Our practice 11 plus papers are excellent for identifying a student’s strengths and weaknesses. Practice papers can also help pupils to familiarise themselves with the exam layout and the types of questions that they may be asked on exam day.

 

As the exam date draws closer, we would strongly recommend that students complete our practice papers under timed conditions to improve their time management skills.

 

We have a selection of eleven plus practice tests desgined to help pupils prepare for the Parmiter’s School 11 Plus exam:

 

11+ Verbal Reasoning (CEM)

11+ Cloze (CEM)

11+ Comprehension (CEM)

 

11+ Spelling Pack 1 (CEM)

11+ Spelling Pack 2 (CEM)

 

11+ Maths Grammar Schools Pack 1

11+ Maths Grammar Schools Pack 2

11+ Maths Grammar Schools Pack 3

 

11+ Maths Problem Solving Grammar Schools

11+ Mental Arithmetic

 

The information provided about Parmiter’s School was believed to be correct at the time of publishing. However, please be aware of future changes. We advise you to contact the school directly if you are unsure of anything. School contact details are provided within the post.

11+, Grammar Schools

Dame Alice Owen’s School is a partially selective, co-educational secondary school with academy status. Located in the Hertfordshire town of Potters Bar, it was founded in Islington as a boys’ school in 1613. The school gradually expanded and a girls’ school was built in 1886 before the two merged in 1973.

 

Dame Alice Owen’s is  one of the UK’s highest-performing schools. It regularly produces excellent exam results at both GCSE and A-Level. The school also offers pupils an array of extracurricular activities, including music, sport and drama.

 

11 Plus Exam Information for Dame Alice Owen’s School

 

Address: Dame Alice Owen’s School, Dugdale Hill Lane, Potters Bar EN6 2DU

County: Hertfordshire

Admissions Info: admissions@damealiceowens.herts.sch.uk, 01707 643441

School Type: Co-educational, partially selective

Number of pupils: 1,466 (approx.)

Number of Places in Year 7: 200

Open Day Date: July

Exam Date: September

Exam Board Type: CEM and set by school

 

Dame Alice Owen’s School 11 Plus Admissions

 

This article is relevant for those aiming for entry to the school based on the Academic Criterion. The school also offers an entry point via the Music criterion, which is not discussed here.

 

Admission to the school is determined by pupil performance in the 11 Plus exam. Prospective students and their parents are actively encouraged to attend one of the school’s Open Events before applying for a place. At the events, parents can learn more about the admissions process and have an opportunity to tour the school and speak to staff and current pupils.

 

Dame Alice Owen’s School is often oversubscribed for places, so the school uses the following criteria for places, giving priority to:

  • Looked After, or previously Looked After children
  • 22 children whose permanent home address is closest to the school at the date of application
  • Children who have a sibling attending the school at the date of application
  • Children demonstrating musical aptitude (up to 10 places)
  • Up to 65 children selected by academic ability
  • Children with a parent who is a member of staff at the school
  • Children whose permanent home address is closest to the School

 

Read the full admissions policy for Dame Alice Owen’s School.

 

Dame Alice Owen’s School 11 Plus Exam Format

 

The 11 Plus exam takes place in September in the academic year prior to admission. The test is broken up into two parts, taken on two separate dates in September.

 

Part 1

 

  • Verbal Reasoning – This consists of a 15-minute practice paper, followed by a 45-minute paper of 100 questions created by CEM (University of Durham)
  • English – One-hour comprehension paper in standard format and extended writing.

 

Part 2

 

  • Mathematics – One-hour paper consisting of 50 questions in standard format

 

How to Prepare for the Dame Alice Owen’s School 11 Plus Exam?

 

We understand that the 11+ exam can cause some students anxiety; however, we have plenty of practice resources to help pupils prepare for the test. Students should start their revision plan early and include online practice papers to help identify any weaker areas that require additional work before the exam.

 

To give students the best possible chance of gaining one of Dame Alice Owens’ 200 places in Year 7, we would recommend using the following practice papers, broken down by section:

 

Verbal Reasoning

 

The Verbal Reasoning test is created by CEM, so the following resources will prove useful:

 

11+ Verbal Reasoning (CEM)

11+ Synonyms and Antonyms (CEM)

11+ Cloze (CEM)

11+ Comprehension (CEM) Non-Fiction

11+ Comprehension (CEM) Fiction

 

English

 

The Dame Alice Owens’ English test is very similar to that of an independent school, standard format exam covering comprehension and composition. As such, we recommend the following packs to help prepare for this:

 

11+ English Pack 1

11+ English Pack 2

11+ English Pack 3

11+ Spelling Pack 1

11+ Spelling Pack 2

 

Mathematics

 

The Dame Alice Owens’ Mathematics test is very similar to that of an independent school, standard format exam. As such, we recommend the following packs to help prepare for this:

 

11+ Mathematics Pack 1

11+ Mathematics Pack 2

11+ Mathematics Pack 3

11+ Mental Arithmetic

 

The information provided about Dame Alice Owen’s School was believed to be correct at the time of publishing. However, please be aware of future changes. We advise you to contact the school directly if you are unsure of anything. School contact details are provided within the post.

11+, Grammar Schools

Founded in 1954, Rickmansworth School is a co-educational, partially selective secondary school that teaches over 1,200 students. The school is part of the South West Herts Grammar School Consortium.

 

A Specialist Science and Arts College, Rickmansworth School provides a well-rounded education that encourages students to participate in a number of extracurricular activities outside of the classroom. Students can join a variety of different clubs and societies, including the science club, debating society and various musical ensembles.

 

11 Plus Exam Information for Rickmansworth School

 

Address: Rickmansworth School, Scots Hill, Rickmansworth WD3 3AQ

County: Hertfordshire

Admissions Info: admissions@rickmansworth.herts.sch.uk, 01923 773296

School Type: Co-educational, partially selective

Number of pupils: 1,261 (approx.)

Number of Places available: 196

Open Day Date: September

Exam Date: September

Exam Board Type: CEM and GL Assessment

 

Rickmansworth School 11 Plus Admissions – Academic Criterion

 

This article is relevant for those aiming for entry to the school based on the Academic Criterion. The school also offers an entry point via the Music criterion, which is not discussed here.

 

To be considered for a Year 7 place at Rickmansworth School, prospective pupils must sit the 11 Plus entrance exam.

 

In the first instance, students must be registered with the South West Herts Consortium. Parents should also complete the school’s Supplementary Information Form (SIF) for Secondary Transfer and return it directly to the school.

 

Rickmansworth receives an average of eight applications per available place in Year 7, so the school uses its oversubscription criteria to determine which pupils will be given priority. The Rickmansworth School oversubscription criteria gives priority to:

 

  • Looked after children and previously looked after children.
  • Distance from the school (no more than 23 places to be allocated based on this criteria)
  • Students who have a parent or guardian who is a permanent member of the school staff
  • Children with a sibling at the school
  • Children with a proven aptitude in music (no more than 23 places)
  • 57 places will be available by reference to academic ability in descending order of merit

 

For a full breakdown of Rickmansworth School’s admission process, please visit the school’s website directly.

 

How to Apply for 11 Plus Entry to Rickmansworth School

 

To apply for eleven plus entry to Rickmansworth School, parents should register their child for the exams via the South West Herts Schools Consortium. Registration can be completed via the Consortium website, or by collecting a form from the school. Paper registrations can be returned to:

 

South West Herts School Tests

PO Box 2439

Watford

WD18 1UZ

 

Please check your child’s eligibility for entry before registering.

 

Rickmansworth School 11 Plus Exam Format

 

Rickmansworth School follows the Co-ordinated Admissions Scheme for Hertfordshire.

 

Prospective pupils will be required to take the following exams for an academic place:

 

  • Maths paper, lasts approximately 50 minutes and is set by GL Assessment
  • Verbal Reasoning paper, lasts approximately one hour and is set by CEM

 

How to Prepare for the Rickmansworth School 11 Plus Exam?

 

We’d recommend that students who are due to take the Rickmansworth School Scondary Transfer Test should create a thorough revision timetable well ahead of the test day. The more prepared pupils are ahead of the exam, the better chance they’ll have of gaining one of the Year 7 places at the school.

 

It’s likely that students will have to commit extra time to revision sessions, so if parents notice that their child is struggling to get motivated, consider introducing fun revision games.

 

Practice exam papers are an effective way to prepare for the Rickmansworth School eleven plus exam. At Exam Papers Plus, we produce practice papers to help students become familiar with the types of questions they may be asked on exam day. Our papers can also improve students’ time management skills, especially if taken under exam conditions.

 

For the Rickmansworth School 11+ exam, we would specifically recommend the following resources to help prepare:

 

11+ Verbal Reasoning (CEM)

11+ Cloze (CEM)

11+ Comprehension (CEM)

 

11+ Spelling Pack 1 (CEM)

11+ Spelling Pack 2 (CEM)

 

11+ Maths Grammar Schools Pack 1

11+ Maths Grammar Schools Pack 2

11+ Maths Grammar Schools Pack 3

 

11+ Maths Problem Solving Grammar Schools

11+ Mental Arithmetic

 

The information provided about Rickmansworth School was believed to be correct at the time of publishing. However, please be aware of future changes. We advise you to contact the school directly if you are unsure of anything. School contact details are provided within the post.

11+, Grammar Schools

Founded in 1969, Queens’ School is a partially selective, co-educational secondary school with academy status. The school specialises in sports and science and educates 1700 pupils. It aims to develop each student’s potential, whether in academics, sports or music.

 

Queens’ School is the largest school in Hertfordshire and is part of the South West Herts Grammar School Consortium. Students are split into four houses and take part in various sporting, musical and academic activities throughout the school year.

 

11 Plus Exam Information for Queens’ School

 

Address: Queens’ School, Aldenham Road, Bushey WD23 2TY

County: Hertfordshire

Admissions Info: office@queens.herts.sch.uk, 01923 224465

School Type: Co-educational, partially selective

Number of pupils: 1700 (approx.)

Number of Places in Year 7: 265

Open Day Date: October

Exam Date: September

Exam Board Type: CEM and GL Assessment

 

Queens’ School 11 Plus Admissions

 

This article is relevant for those aiming for entry to the school based on the Academic Criterion. The school also offers an entry point via the Music criterion, which is not discussed here.

 

Applications for Year 7 places at Queens’ School are submitted via the Hertfordshire Education Authority using the Secondary Transfer Form (STF). Parents also need to complete a Queens’ School Application for Admission Form (SIF) and register with the South West Herts Consortium. It is essential that all forms are completed and returned no later than the closing date.

 

In the event that the school is oversubscribed in Year 7, the following students will be given priority:

 

  • Looked after, or previously looked after, children
  • Children with a sibling attending the school at the time of admission
  • Children whose permanent residence is located within postcodes laid out in the school’s admission policy document
  • Children with a particular aptitude in sport (up to 13 places)
  • Children with a particular aptitude in music (up to 13 places)
  • Up to 92 places based on merit, based on the results of the assessment test
  • Distance to the school

 

For more information about the full admissions process at Queens’ School, parents should visit the admissions pages on the school’s website

 

How to Apply for 11 Plus Entry to Queens’ School

 

To apply for Year 7 entry to Queens’ School, parents must first register their child with the South West Herts Admissions Consortium. Students can then be registered for the school’s entrance tests online.

 

Parents can also collect a registration form from the school and return the paper version to:

 

South West Herts School Tests

PO Box 2439

Watford

WD18 1UZ

 

Before registering, parents should thoroughly check their child’s eligibility for entry.

 

Queens’ School 11 Plus Exam Format

 

Queens’ School adheres to Hertfordshire’s Co-ordinated Admissions Scheme and as such, the exam consists of the following tests:

 

  • Maths paper set by GL Assessment
  • Verbal Reasoning paper set by CEM

 

The mathematics test last for around 50 minutes, while the Verbal Reasoning is approximately one hour. Students will have a short break between tests.

 

Queens’ School also offers places to students with exceptional sporting ability on the condition that students live within the designated catchment area. Eligible students are required to take the PE Aptitude Test, which covers the core movement skills. The tests have been selected by the Council of European Physical Fitness.

 

How to Prepare for the Queens’ School 11 Plus Exam?

 

To maximise the chance of success in the Queens’ School 11 Plus exam, students must be well-organised. The more time pupils spend preparing, the lower their stress levels will be as the exam date approaches. As a starting point, we’d recommend that parents review our 11 Plus guide for parents, which provides an overview of the exam and what to expect from the process from start to finish.

 

Queens’ School tends to be oversubscribed for Year 7 places, so students should start their exam revision early to improve their weaker subject areas. Practice test papers are an ideal way of preparing for the 11 Plus exam at Queens’. At Exam Papers Plus, our papers help familiarise students with the layout of the exam and help improve their time management skills.

 

For the Queens’ School 11 Plus exam, we would specifically recommend the following resources to help your child prepare:

 

11+ Verbal Reasoning (CEM)

11+ Cloze (CEM)

11+ Comprehension (CEM)

 

11+ Spelling Pack 1 (CEM)

11+ Spelling Pack 2 (CEM)

 

11+ Maths Grammar Schools Pack 1

11+ Maths Grammar Schools Pack 2

11+ Maths Grammar Schools Pack 3

 

11+ Maths Problem Solving Grammar Schools

11+ Mental Arithmetic

 

The information provided about Queens’ School was believed to be correct at the time of publishing. However, please be aware of future changes. We advise you to contact the school directly if you are unsure of anything. School contact details are provided within the post.

11+

screenshot of the St James Senior Girls School website

St James Senior Girls’ School is an independent day school for girls aged 11-18. Based in London’s Kensington Olympia, the senior school accommodates a two-form year group, allowing teachers to focus more closely on pupils’ wellbeing and progress.

 

The school aims to provide a happy, united environment for its girls, giving them the best chance of seeking out and developing their individual talents. The school provides spiritual enrichment to its pupils by setting aside regular time to meditate or be still at the beginning and end of each school day.

 

St. James Senior Girls’ School 11 plus exam Information

 

Registration Closing Date: November

Exam Date: January

Exam Board Type: CEM

Results Date: February

 

St. James Senior Girls’ School Admissions Criteria

 

St James Senior Girls’ School is a member of the London Consortium and follows its Agreed Code of Practice for admissions.

 

The main entry point to St James Senior Girls’ School is in Year 7 and admission is determined by student performance in the school’s entrance test, which takes place in January of the year of entry. However, the school does not select candidates solely for the academic results they achieve. Rather, prospective pupils may be asked to attend an interview, which is intended to help the school ensure that it can meet the student’s needs. A report is also requested from the girl’s current school.

 

The London Consortium’s policy is to offer places based on a student’s overall performance in the cognitive test, interview, and reference.

 

For further information on St James Senior Girls’ School Year 7 admissions process, please contact the Registrar on 020 7348 1748 or admissions@sjsg.org.uk.

 

How to Apply for 11 plus Entry to St. James Senior Girls’ School

 

Before applying for a Year 7 place at St James Senior Girls’ School, parents and prospective students are encouraged to attend one of the school’s Open Events. These events take place throughout the school year and need to be booked in advance.

 

To register for the Cognitive Abilities Test, parents need to download and return both the Registration Form and Confidential Pupil Information Form to the school, together with two recent passport photographs and a non-refundable registration fee of £125. A confirmation letter acknowledging receipt of the documentation will be sent to parents.

 

St. James Senior Girls’ School Year 7 entry Eleven Plus Assessment

 

The London Consortium has replaced its traditional eleven plus exam with a bespoke Cognitive Abilities Test. The test assesses Maths, Verbal Reasoning and Non-Verbal Reasoning. This test has been created for the London Consortium by the Centre for Evaluation and Monitoring (CEM). It’s worth noting that the CEM definition of Verbal Reasoning includes question types, such as comprehension, that you would usually find in an English test.

 

Some of the questions will be in a multiple-choice format. Students will be required to mark their answers on a separate answer sheet. The test lasts for approximately 75 minutes, with a 30-minute break midway. CEM tests tend to consist of shorter timed sections, each focusing on a specific question type. These sections are then taken in a mixed order rather than one subject after another. So, for example, a 5-minute Verbal Reasoning comprehension section could be followed by a 10-minute Maths LNR section, followed by a 6-minute Verbal Reasoning cloze section.

 

There will be no other written assessments. The Consortium has implemented this new cognitive test to identify pupils’ overall academic potential, rather than their ability to retain knowledge for a particular exam.

 

Students can take the test at any school in the Consortium and parents will receive test results in February.

 

How to Prepare for the St. James Senior Girls’ School 11 plus Entrance Test

 

Whatever a student’s current attainment level, investing additional time for preparation in the lead-up to the entrance test will likely improve their confidence ahead of the actual exam. As the assessment focuses on Maths, Verbal Reasoning and Non-Verbal Reasoning, we would recommend our selection of eleven plus papers that are designed in the CEM style. All our packs include answers so you can quickly check your child’s work and identify where they might need to focus and improve.

 

We would specifically recommend the following resources that can be downloaded and used immediately after purchase:

 

Mathematics Section

 

11+ Short Numerical Reasoning (CEM)

This pack contains 10 tests, each consisting of 20 questions. It focuses on time-pressured problem solving with question styles that are known to have been previously used by CEM.

 

11+ Long Numerical Reasoning (CEM)

This pack contains 10 tests, each consisting of 5 sections, with 5 questions in each section. It focuses on a specific type of question that comes up in CEM exams. These questions are based on some form of chart or diagram that the student must use to work out the answers. The answers must be recorded on a separate sheet in a specific manner. This pack includes separate answer sheets so students can get used to recording their responses in this way, just like they will need to do in the 11+ London Consortium test.

 

11+ MC Numerical Reasoning (CEM)

This pack contains 20 tests, each with 10 questions. It focuses on a different CEM question type in which there are multiple possible answer choices provided and the student must pick the correct one for each question. Separate answer sheets are provided so students can get used to recording their responses in this manner.

 

11+ Mental Arithmetic

This pack contains 15 tests, each with 15 questions. It focuses on fundamental arithmetic skills, developing a strong basis that allows students to work through maths questions efficiently and with confidence.

 

Verbal Reasoning Section

 

Verbal Reasoning, as defined by CEM, is quite different to how it may be traditionally understood. It includes a number of question types that focus on vocabulary and comprehension as well as some more unusual formats. Each of the packs below focuses on a different skill that is assessed in the Verbal Reasoning section of CEM 11+ exams, such as the London Consortium Test.

 

11+ Verbal Reasoning (CEM)

This pack contains plenty of practice for various question types that crop up frequently in CEM exams. These include questions  that assess a student’s grasp of synonyms and antonyms as well as other formats such as shuffled sentences and contextual cloze.

 

11+ Comprehension (CEM)

This pack focuses on multiple-choice comprehension, which will feature in the CEM 11+ London Consortium Test. There are 15 comprehension tests included.

 

11+ Cloze (CEM)

This pack focuses on cloze questions that are used in almost all CEM 11+ exams. The pack covers three different variations, with 21 tests in total.

 

11+ Spelling Pack 1 (CEM)

11+ Spelling Pack 2 (CEM)

CEM 11+ exams, such as the 11 plus London Consortium Test, focus heavily on assessing a child’s vocabulary. These packs each introduce 200 words within context, helping students to improve both their vocabulary and spelling. This will prove useful for the Verbal Reasoning section of the exam. Pack 2 is designed to be more challenging than Pack 1.

 

Non-Verbal Reasoning Section

11+ Non-Verbal Reasoning

This pack covers a number of the question types that are used in CEM 11+ Non-Verbal Reasoning exams such as Matrices, Box Sequences and Exceptions. There are some extension question types as well. Whilst these are not known to be utilised in CEM exams, they will help develop your child’s Non-Verbal reasoning ability, which will stand them in good stead for the exam.

 

If your total order value is over £60, simply apply the code eppdiscount at checkout to get 10% off your whole order.

 

 

We hope you find this article useful. Please don’t hesitate to get in touch if you need some advice or if you have any questions or queries.

 

 

The information in this post was correct at the time of publishing. However, please be aware of future changes. We advise you to contact the school directly if you are unsure of anything. School contact details are provided within the post.

 

Related posts:

South Hampstead High School 11 Plus (11+) Exam – Cognitive Abilities Test

St. Helen’s School London 11 Plus (11+) Exam – Cognitive Abilities Test

 

 

11+

screenshot of St Helen's School London website

Located in Northwood, London, St. Helen’s School was founded in 1899 as an independent day school for girls aged 3-18. Situated on a 21-acre estate, St. Helen’s offers high quality, spacious facilities to its 1,100 pupils.

 

Students are strongly encouraged to engage in new experiences and take advantage of the school’s extensive co-curricular opportunities, which include an array of sports, music and drama. From Year 10 upwards, girls can also join a local Combined Cadet Force, opting for Royal Navy, Army or RAF Section.

 

St. Helen’s School London Cognitive Abilities Test Information

 

Registration Closing Date: November

Exam Date: January

Exam Board Type: CEM

Results Date: February

 

St. Helen’s School London Admissions Criteria

 

As one of the 12 schools that currently make up the London Consortium, St Helen’s School, London follows its Agreed Code of Practice.

 

The main entry point to St Helen’s School is in Year 7 and students must take the school’s entrance test, which takes place in January of the year of entry. Students are also required to attend an interview with senior staff members at the school. The interview aims to give staff a better of idea of whether a pupil is suited to St Helen’s.

 

A reference is also requested from the pupil’s current school.

 

Year 7 entry is not determined by performance in the exam alone. The school considers a student’s overall performance in the cognitive test, interview and reference.

 

For further information on St Helen’s School Year 7 admissions process, please contact the Admissions team on 01923 843230, or email admissions@sthelens.london.

 

How to Apply for 11 plus Entry to St. Helen’s School London

 

St Helen’s School encourages parents and prospective pupils to attend one of its open events before registering for the entrance exam. If parents are unable to attend one of the events in June or September, individual visits can be arranged. At these events, parents can meet the Headteacher, staff members and current pupils. A tour of the school’s extensive facilities is also offered.

 

To register for the Cognitive Abilities Test, download and complete this form. Parents will receive an acknowledgement of their daughter’s registration, which enables them to take the entrance test. For more information on the registration process, consult the school’s FAQs section.

 

St. Helen’s School London Year 7 entry, 11 plus exam

 

The London Consortium has replaced its traditional eleven plus exam with a bespoke Cognitive Abilities Test. The test assesses Maths, Verbal Reasoning and Non-Verbal Reasoning. This test has been created for the London Consortium by the Centre for Evaluation and Monitoring (CEM). It’s worth noting that the CEM definition of Verbal Reasoning includes question types, such as comprehension, that you would usually find in an English test.

 

Some of the questions will be in a multiple-choice format. Students will be required to mark their answers on a separate answer sheet. The test lasts for approximately 75 minutes, with a 30-minute break midway. CEM tests tend to consist of shorter timed sections, each focusing on a specific question type. These sections are then taken in a mixed order rather than one subject after another. So, for example, a 5-minute Verbal Reasoning comprehension section could be followed by a 10-minute Maths LNR section, followed by a 6-minute Verbal Reasoning cloze section.

 

There will be no other written assessments. The Consortium has implemented this new cognitive test to identify pupils’ overall academic potential, rather than their ability to retain knowledge for a particular exam.

 

Students can take the test at any school in the Consortium and parents will receive test results in February.

 

How to Prepare for the St. Helen’s School London 11 plus Entrance Test

 

Whatever a student’s current attainment level, investing additional time for preparation in the lead-up to the entrance test will likely improve their confidence ahead of the actual exam. As the assessment focuses on Maths, Verbal Reasoning and Non-Verbal Reasoning, we would recommend our selection of eleven plus papers that are designed in the CEM style. All our packs include answers so you can quickly check your child’s work and identify where they might need to focus and improve.

 

We would specifically recommend the following resources that can be downloaded and used immediately after purchase:

 

Mathematics Section

 

11+ Short Numerical Reasoning (CEM)

This pack contains 10 tests, each consisting of 20 questions. It focuses on time-pressured problem solving with question styles that are known to have been previously used by CEM.

 

11+ Long Numerical Reasoning (CEM)

This pack contains 10 tests, each consisting of 5 sections, with 5 questions in each section. It focuses on a specific type of question that comes up in CEM exams. These questions are based on some form of chart or diagram that the student must use to work out the answers. The answers must be recorded on a separate sheet in a specific manner. This pack includes separate answer sheets so students can get used to recording their responses in this way, just like they will need to do in the 11+ London Consortium test.

 

11+ MC Numerical Reasoning (CEM)

This pack contains 20 tests, each with 10 questions. It focuses on a different CEM question type in which there are multiple possible answer choices provided and the student must pick the correct one for each question. Separate answer sheets are provided so students can get used to recording their responses in this manner.

 

11+ Mental Arithmetic

This pack contains 15 tests, each with 15 questions. It focuses on fundamental arithmetic skills, developing a strong basis that allows students to work through maths questions efficiently and with confidence.

 

Verbal Reasoning Section

 

Verbal Reasoning, as defined by CEM, is quite different to how it may be traditionally understood. It includes a number of question types that focus on vocabulary and comprehension as well as some more unusual formats. Each of the packs below focuses on a different skill that is assessed in the Verbal Reasoning section of CEM 11+ exams, such as the London Consortium Test.

 

11+ Verbal Reasoning (CEM)

This pack contains plenty of practice for various question types that crop up frequently in CEM exams. These include questions  that assess a student’s grasp of synonyms and antonyms as well as other formats such as shuffled sentences and contextual cloze.

 

11+ Comprehension (CEM)

This pack focuses on multiple-choice comprehension, which will feature in the CEM 11+ London Consortium Test. There are 15 comprehension tests included.

 

11+ Cloze (CEM)

This pack focuses on cloze questions that are used in almost all CEM 11+ exams. The pack covers three different variations, with 21 tests in total.

 

11+ Spelling Pack 1 (CEM)

11+ Spelling Pack 2 (CEM)

CEM 11+ exams, such as the 11 plus London Consortium Test, focus heavily on assessing a child’s vocabulary. These packs each introduce 200 words within context, helping students to improve both their vocabulary and spelling. This will prove useful for the Verbal Reasoning section of the exam. Pack 2 is designed to be more challenging than Pack 1.

 

Non-Verbal Reasoning Section

11+ Non-Verbal Reasoning

This pack covers a number of the question types that are used in CEM 11+ Non-Verbal Reasoning exams such as Matrices, Box Sequences and Exceptions. There are some extension question types as well. Whilst these are not known to be utilised in CEM exams, they will help develop your child’s Non-Verbal reasoning ability, which will stand them in good stead for the exam.

 

If your total order value is over £60, simply apply the code eppdiscount at checkout to get 10% off your whole order.

 

 

We hope you find this article useful. Please don’t hesitate to get in touch if you need some advice or if you have any questions or queries.

 

The information in this post was correct at the time of publishing. However, please be aware of future changes. We advise you to contact the school directly if you are unsure of anything. School contact details are provided within the post.

 

Related posts:

Queen’s Gate School 11 Plus (11+) Exam – Cognitive Abilities Test

South Hampstead High School 11 Plus (11+) Exam – Cognitive Abilities Test

 

 

11+

screenshot of South Hampstead High School website

Founded in 1876, South Hampstead High School is an independent day school for girls, situated in north west London. The school educates approximately 900 girls aged 4-18 and is one of the UK’s most successful schools.

 

Alongside a challenging, stimulating academic timetable, students are encouraged to be creative and tenacious. The school offers pupils a wide extracurricular timetable, enabling its pupils to pursue activities that boost their overall wellbeing.

 

South Hampstead High School Cognitive Abilities Test Information

 

Registration Closing Date: November

Exam Date: January

Exam Board Type: CEM

Results Date: February

 

South Hampstead High School Admissions Criteria

 

South Hampstead High School is part of the London Consortium alongside 11 other independent schools. Each school administers the same entrance test paper and releases the results on the same day. South Hampstead High School also adheres to the Consortium’s Agreed Code of Practice.

 

For 11+ entry from September 2019 onwards, all schools in the London Consortium now use a Cognitive Abilities Test, replacing the previous English and Mathematics 11+ entrance examinations. The CAT lasts for 75 minutes and is designed to identify academic potential and reduce the reliance on learning by rote.

 

Admission to South Hampstead High School isn’t determined by exam results alone. prospective pupil must also attend an interview at the school after the exam date. This interview is an important part of the school’s selection process and aims to identify whether a pupil will thrive at the school. Places are then offered on the basis of their performance in the Cognitive Abilities Test and interview, as well as the reference from their current school.

 

For further information on South Hampstead High School’s Year 7 admissions process, please call the main office on 020 7435 2899, or email senioradmissions@shhs.gdst.net.

 

How to Apply for 11 plus Entry to South Hampstead High School

 

Before applying for a place at South Hampstead High School, parents and students are encouraged to attend one of the school’s Open Events. At these events, parents can take a tour of the school and attend a talk from the headteacher. To book a place at one of the Open Events, parents should apply online, via the school’s website.

 

To register students for the Cognitive Ability Test, download and complete this registration form. The form should be returned ahead of the deadline in November, alongside a non-returnable examination fee of £125. Once parents receive an acknowledgement of their daughter’s registration, she will be eligible to take the entrance test in January.

 

For more information on the registration process, the school website has a useful FAQs section.

 

South Hampstead High School Year 7 entry, 11 plus Assessment

 

The London Consortium has replaced its traditional eleven plus exam with a bespoke Cognitive Abilities Test. The test assesses Maths, Verbal Reasoning and Non-Verbal Reasoning. This test has been created for the London Consortium by the Centre for Evaluation and Monitoring (CEM). It’s worth noting that the CEM definition of Verbal Reasoning includes question types, such as comprehension, that you would usually find in an English test.

 

Some of the questions will be in a multiple-choice format. Students will be required to mark their answers on a separate answer sheet. The test lasts for approximately 75 minutes, with a 30-minute break midway. CEM tests tend to consist of shorter timed sections, each focusing on a specific question type. These sections are then taken in a mixed order rather than one subject after another. So, for example, a 5-minute Verbal Reasoning comprehension section could be followed by a 10-minute Maths LNR section, followed by a 6-minute Verbal Reasoning cloze section.

 

There will be no other written assessments. The Consortium has implemented this new cognitive test to identify pupils’ overall academic potential, rather than their ability to retain knowledge for a particular exam.

 

Students can take the test at any school in the Consortium and parents will receive test results in February.

 

How to Prepare for the South Hampstead High School 11 plus Entrance Test

 

Whatever a student’s current attainment level, investing additional time for preparation in the lead-up to the entrance test will likely improve their confidence ahead of the actual exam. As the assessment focuses on Maths, Verbal Reasoning and Non-Verbal Reasoning, we would recommend our selection of eleven plus papers that are designed in the CEM style. All our packs include answers so you can quickly check your child’s work and identify where they might need to focus and improve.

 

We would specifically recommend the following resources that can be downloaded and used immediately after purchase:

 

Mathematics Section

 

11+ Short Numerical Reasoning (CEM)

This pack contains 10 tests, each consisting of 20 questions. It focuses on time-pressured problem solving with question styles that are known to have been previously used by CEM.

 

11+ Long Numerical Reasoning (CEM)

This pack contains 10 tests, each consisting of 5 sections, with 5 questions in each section. It focuses on a specific type of question that comes up in CEM exams. These questions are based on some form of chart or diagram that the student must use to work out the answers. The answers must be recorded on a separate sheet in a specific manner. This pack includes separate answer sheets so students can get used to recording their responses in this way, just like they will need to do in the 11+ London Consortium test.

 

11+ MC Numerical Reasoning (CEM)

This pack contains 20 tests, each with 10 questions. It focuses on a different CEM question type in which there are multiple possible answer choices provided and the student must pick the correct one for each question. Separate answer sheets are provided so students can get used to recording their responses in this manner.

 

11+ Mental Arithmetic

This pack contains 15 tests, each with 15 questions. It focuses on fundamental arithmetic skills, developing a strong basis that allows students to work through maths questions efficiently and with confidence.

 

Verbal Reasoning Section

 

Verbal Reasoning, as defined by CEM, is quite different to how it may be traditionally understood. It includes a number of question types that focus on vocabulary and comprehension as well as some more unusual formats. Each of the packs below focuses on a different skill that is assessed in the Verbal Reasoning section of CEM 11+ exams, such as the London Consortium Test.

 

11+ Verbal Reasoning (CEM)

This pack contains plenty of practice for various question types that crop up frequently in CEM exams. These include questions  that assess a student’s grasp of synonyms and antonyms as well as other formats such as shuffled sentences and contextual cloze.

 

11+ Comprehension (CEM)

This pack focuses on multiple-choice comprehension, which will feature in the CEM 11+ London Consortium Test. There are 15 comprehension tests included.

 

11+ Cloze (CEM)

This pack focuses on cloze questions that are used in almost all CEM 11+ exams. The pack covers three different variations, with 21 tests in total.

 

11+ Spelling Pack 1 (CEM)

11+ Spelling Pack 2 (CEM)

CEM 11+ exams, such as the 11 plus London Consortium Test, focus heavily on assessing a child’s vocabulary. These packs each introduce 200 words within context, helping students to improve both their vocabulary and spelling. This will prove useful for the Verbal Reasoning section of the exam. Pack 2 is designed to be more challenging than Pack 1.

 

Non-Verbal Reasoning Section

11+ Non-Verbal Reasoning

This pack covers a number of the question types that are used in CEM 11+ Non-Verbal Reasoning exams such as Matrices, Box Sequences and Exceptions. There are some extension question types as well. Whilst these are not known to be utilised in CEM exams, they will help develop your child’s Non-Verbal reasoning ability, which will stand them in good stead for the exam.

 

If your total order value is over £60, simply apply the code eppdiscount at checkout to get 10% off your whole order.

 

 

We hope you find this article useful. Please don’t hesitate to get in touch if you need some advice or if you have any questions or queries.

 

 

The information in this post was correct at the time of publishing. However, please be aware of future changes. We advise you to contact the school directly if you are unsure of anything. School contact details are provided within the post.

 

Related posts:

Queen’s College London 11 Plus (11+) Exam – Cognitive Abilities Test

Queen’s Gate School 11 Plus (11+) Exam – Cognitive Abilities Test

 

 

11+

screenshot of queens gate school website

Located in South Kensington, Queen’s Gate School was founded in 1891 as an independent day school for girls aged 4-18 years. With a strong academic reputation, the school is relatively small in size, with just over 500 girls attending at any one time.

 

While the school promotes a love of learning, it also actively encourages its girls to push themselves when outside of the classroom, with a variety of extracurricular activities. Many of the girls participate in charitable work, both in their local community and further afield, while maintaining their academic curriculum.

 

Queen’s Gate School Cognitive Abilities Test, 11 Plus Exam Information

 

Registration Closing Date: November

Exam Date: January

Exam Board Type: CEM

Results Date: February

 

Queen’s Gate School Admissions Criteria

 

Queen’s Gate is one of the 12-member schools that make up the London 11 Plus Consortium. As such, Queen’s Gate must follow the Consortium’s formal Code of Practice.

 

Year 7 is a main entry point to Queen’s Gate School and admission is determined by student performance in the school’s entrance test, which takes place in January of the year of entry. Students are also required to attend an interview after the exam date, which gives them an opportunity to showcase their intelligence and creativity in a conversation with school staff. A reference is also requested from the girl’s current school.

 

It is The London Consortium’s policy to offer places based on a student’s overall performance in the cognitive test, interview and reference. Therefore, entry to Year 7 entry is not determined by performance in the exam alone. Queen’s Gate School will consider all three elements before deciding on place allocation.

 

If you have any further questions about Queen’s Gate School’s Year 7 admissions process, simply contact the Registrar on 020 7594 4982, or email registrar@queensgate.org.uk.

 

How to Apply for 11 plus Entry to Queen’s Gate School

 

The London Consortium has made applying to Queen’s Gate relatively easy for those applying for a Year 7 place. However, before a registration form is submitted, Queen’s Gate encourages parents to book a place on one of their Open Events, which take place September to November. You can register for a place at one of these events online.

 

After attending an event, if parents feel that Queen’s Gate is the right learning environment for their daughter, they should download and complete the registration form for the Cognitive Abilities Test.

 

For all outstanding application questions, please refer to Queen’s Gate FAQs section online.

 

Queen’s Gate School Year 7 entry, 11 plus Assessment

 

The London Consortium has replaced its traditional eleven plus exam with a bespoke Cognitive Abilities Test. The test assesses Maths, Verbal Reasoning and Non-Verbal Reasoning. This test has been created for the London Consortium by the Centre for Evaluation and Monitoring (CEM). It’s worth noting that the CEM definition of Verbal Reasoning includes question types, such as comprehension, that you would usually find in an English test.

 

Some of the questions will be in a multiple-choice format. Students will be required to mark their answers on a separate answer sheet. The test lasts for approximately 75 minutes, with a 30-minute break midway. CEM tests tend to consist of shorter timed sections, each focusing on a specific question type. These sections are then taken in a mixed order rather than one subject after another. So, for example, a 5-minute Verbal Reasoning comprehension section could be followed by a 10-minute Maths LNR section, followed by a 6-minute Verbal Reasoning cloze section.

 

There will be no other written assessments. The Consortium has implemented this new cognitive test to identify pupils’ overall academic potential, rather than their ability to retain knowledge for a particular exam.

 

Students can take the test at any school in the Consortium and parents will receive test results in February.

 

How to Prepare for the Queen’s Gate School 11 plus Entrance Test

 

Whatever a student’s current attainment level, investing additional time for preparation in the lead-up to the entrance test will likely improve their confidence ahead of the actual exam. As the assessment focuses on Maths, Verbal Reasoning and Non-Verbal Reasoning, we would recommend our selection of eleven plus papers that are designed in the CEM style. All our packs include answers so you can quickly check your child’s work and identify where they might need to focus and improve.

 

We would specifically recommend the following resources that can be downloaded and used immediately after purchase:

 

Mathematics Section

 

11+ Short Numerical Reasoning (CEM)

This pack contains 10 tests, each consisting of 20 questions. It focuses on time-pressured problem solving with question styles that are known to have been previously used by CEM.

 

11+ Long Numerical Reasoning (CEM)

This pack contains 10 tests, each consisting of 5 sections, with 5 questions in each section. It focuses on a specific type of question that comes up in CEM exams. These questions are based on some form of chart or diagram that the student must use to work out the answers. The answers must be recorded on a separate sheet in a specific manner. This pack includes separate answer sheets so students can get used to recording their responses in this way, just like they will need to do in the 11+ London Consortium test.

 

11+ MC Numerical Reasoning (CEM)

This pack contains 20 tests, each with 10 questions. It focuses on a different CEM question type in which there are multiple possible answer choices provided and the student must pick the correct one for each question. Separate answer sheets are provided so students can get used to recording their responses in this manner.

 

11+ Mental Arithmetic

This pack contains 15 tests, each with 15 questions. It focuses on fundamental arithmetic skills, developing a strong basis that allows students to work through maths questions efficiently and with confidence.

 

Verbal Reasoning Section

 

Verbal Reasoning, as defined by CEM, is quite different to how it may be traditionally understood. It includes a number of question types that focus on vocabulary and comprehension as well as some more unusual formats. Each of the packs below focuses on a different skill that is assessed in the Verbal Reasoning section of CEM 11+ exams, such as the London Consortium Test.

 

11+ Verbal Reasoning (CEM)

This pack contains plenty of practice for various question types that crop up frequently in CEM exams. These include questions  that assess a student’s grasp of synonyms and antonyms as well as other formats such as shuffled sentences and contextual cloze.

 

11+ Comprehension (CEM)

This pack focuses on multiple-choice comprehension, which will feature in the CEM 11+ London Consortium Test. There are 15 comprehension tests included.

 

11+ Cloze (CEM)

This pack focuses on cloze questions that are used in almost all CEM 11+ exams. The pack covers three different variations, with 21 tests in total.

 

11+ Spelling Pack 1 (CEM)

11+ Spelling Pack 2 (CEM)

CEM 11+ exams, such as the 11 plus London Consortium Test, focus heavily on assessing a child’s vocabulary. These packs each introduce 200 words within context, helping students to improve both their vocabulary and spelling. This will prove useful for the Verbal Reasoning section of the exam. Pack 2 is designed to be more challenging than Pack 1.

 

Non-Verbal Reasoning Section

11+ Non-Verbal Reasoning

This pack covers a number of the question types that are used in CEM 11+ Non-Verbal Reasoning exams such as Matrices, Box Sequences and Exceptions. There are some extension question types as well. Whilst these are not known to be utilised in CEM exams, they will help develop your child’s Non-Verbal reasoning ability, which will stand them in good stead for the exam.

 

If your total order value is over £60, simply apply the code eppdiscount at checkout to get 10% off your whole order.

 

 

We hope you find this article useful. Please don’t hesitate to get in touch if you need some advice or if you have any questions or queries.

 

 

The information in this post was correct at the time of publishing. However, please be aware of future changes. We advise you to contact the school directly if you are unsure of anything. School contact details are provided within the post.

 

Related posts:

Notting Hill and Ealing High School 11 Plus (11+) Exam – Cognitive Abilities Test

Queen’s College London 11 Plus (11+) Exam – Cognitive Abilities Test

 

11+

screenshot of the Queen's College London website

Founded in 1848, Queen’s College London is an independent school for girls aged 11–18 and is located in the City of Westminster. In 1853, the College received a Royal Charter from Queen Victoria and, since then, the Patron of the College has always been a queen.

 

The College educates over 500 girls and provides a liberal education. The College aims to provide each of its pupils with the skills to be self-confident and authoritative. Queen’s offers an extensive co-curricular timetable, including art, music and drama and takes full advantage of being situated in the heart of the UK’s capital.

 

Queen’s College London Cognitive Abilities Test, 11 plus exam information

 

Registration Closing Date: November

Exam Date: January

Exam Board Type: CEM

Results Date: February

 

Queen’s College London Admissions Criteria

 

Queen’s is a member of the London Consortium and follows its Agreed Code of Practice.

 

The main point of admission to Queen’s College is at 11+, where there is a three-form entry.

 

Year 7 admission is determined by student performance in the school’s entrance test, which takes place in January, prior to entry in September the same year. All candidates are invited to attend an interview and a reference is requested from the candidate’s current school.

 

In line with the London Consortium’s policy, the College offers places based on exam results, interview performance and the school reference. The College looks at all three of these areas to gauge a candidate’s potential.

 

For further information on Queen’s College London’s Year 7 admissions process, please contact the Registrar on 0207 291 7070, or email admissions@qcl.org.uk.

 

How to Apply for 11 plus Entry to Queen’s College London

 

Before applying for an eleven plus place at Queen’s College, parents should attend one of the Open Days, which take place throughout the academic year. Visitors will have the opportunity to meet the Principal, speak to staff members and take a tour of the College.

 

Parents can download and complete the registration form for the Cognitive Abilities Test from the school website. The completed form should be returned to the school with a registration fee of £150, a passport photograph and a copy of your daughter’s birth certificate.

 

For more information on the registration process, please refer to the school’s FAQs document.  

 

Queen’s College London Year 7 entry, 11 plus Assessment

 

The London Consortium has replaced its traditional eleven plus exam with a bespoke Cognitive Abilities Test. The test assesses Maths, Verbal Reasoning and Non-Verbal Reasoning. This test has been created for the London Consortium by the Centre for Evaluation and Monitoring (CEM). It’s worth noting that the CEM definition of Verbal Reasoning includes question types, such as comprehension, that you would usually find in an English test.

 

Some of the questions will be in a multiple-choice format. Students will be required to mark their answers on a separate answer sheet. The test lasts for approximately 75 minutes, with a 30-minute break midway. CEM tests tend to consist of shorter timed sections, each focusing on a specific question type. These sections are then taken in a mixed order rather than one subject after another. So, for example, a 5-minute Verbal Reasoning comprehension section could be followed by a 10-minute Maths LNR section, followed by a 6-minute Verbal Reasoning cloze section.

 

There will be no other written assessments. The Consortium has implemented this new cognitive test to identify pupils’ overall academic potential, rather than their ability to retain knowledge for a particular exam.

 

Students can take the test at any school in the Consortium and parents will receive test results in February.

 

How to Prepare for the Queen’s College London 11 Plus Entrance Test

 

Whatever a student’s current attainment level, investing additional time for preparation in the lead-up to the entrance test will likely improve their confidence ahead of the actual exam. As the assessment focuses on Maths, Verbal Reasoning and Non-Verbal Reasoning, we would recommend our selection of eleven plus papers that are designed in the CEM style. All our packs include answers so you can quickly check your child’s work and identify where they might need to focus and improve.

 

We would specifically recommend the following resources that can be downloaded and used immediately after purchase:

 

Mathematics Section

 

11+ Short Numerical Reasoning (CEM)

This pack contains 10 tests, each consisting of 20 questions. It focuses on time-pressured problem solving with question styles that are known to have been previously used by CEM.

 

11+ Long Numerical Reasoning (CEM)

This pack contains 10 tests, each consisting of 5 sections, with 5 questions in each section. It focuses on a specific type of question that comes up in CEM exams. These questions are based on some form of chart or diagram that the student must use to work out the answers. The answers must be recorded on a separate sheet in a specific manner. This pack includes separate answer sheets so students can get used to recording their responses in this way, just like they will need to do in the 11+ London Consortium test.

 

11+ MC Numerical Reasoning (CEM)

This pack contains 20 tests, each with 10 questions. It focuses on a different CEM question type in which there are multiple possible answer choices provided and the student must pick the correct one for each question. Separate answer sheets are provided so students can get used to recording their responses in this manner.

 

11+ Mental Arithmetic

This pack contains 15 tests, each with 15 questions. It focuses on fundamental arithmetic skills, developing a strong basis that allows students to work through maths questions efficiently and with confidence.

 

Verbal Reasoning Section

 

Verbal Reasoning, as defined by CEM, is quite different to how it may be traditionally understood. It includes a number of question types that focus on vocabulary and comprehension as well as some more unusual formats. Each of the packs below focuses on a different skill that is assessed in the Verbal Reasoning section of CEM 11+ exams, such as the London Consortium Test.

 

11+ Verbal Reasoning (CEM)

This pack contains plenty of practice for various question types that crop up frequently in CEM exams. These include questions  that assess a student’s grasp of synonyms and antonyms as well as other formats such as shuffled sentences and contextual cloze.

 

11+ Comprehension (CEM)

This pack focuses on multiple-choice comprehension, which will feature in the CEM 11+ London Consortium Test. There are 15 comprehension tests included.

 

11+ Cloze (CEM)

This pack focuses on cloze questions that are used in almost all CEM 11+ exams. The pack covers three different variations, with 21 tests in total.

 

11+ Spelling Pack 1 (CEM)

11+ Spelling Pack 2 (CEM)

CEM 11+ exams, such as the 11 plus London Consortium Test, focus heavily on assessing a child’s vocabulary. These packs each introduce 200 words within context, helping students to improve both their vocabulary and spelling. This will prove useful for the Verbal Reasoning section of the exam. Pack 2 is designed to be more challenging than Pack 1.

 

Non-Verbal Reasoning Section

11+ Non-Verbal Reasoning

This pack covers a number of the question types that are used in CEM 11+ Non-Verbal Reasoning exams such as Matrices, Box Sequences and Exceptions. There are some extension question types as well. Whilst these are not known to be utilised in CEM exams, they will help develop your child’s Non-Verbal reasoning ability, which will stand them in good stead for the exam.

 

If your total order value is over £60, simply apply the code eppdiscount at checkout to get 10% off your whole order.

 

 

We hope you find this article useful. Please don’t hesitate to get in touch if you need some advice or if you have any questions or queries.

 

The information in this post was correct at the time of publishing. However, please be aware of future changes. We advise you to contact the school directly if you are unsure of anything. School contact details are provided within the post.

 

Related posts:

Northwood College 11 Plus (11+) Exam – Cognitive Abilities Test

Notting Hill and Ealing High School 11 Plus (11+) Exam – Cognitive Abilities Test

11+

screenshot of Notting Hill and Ealing High School website

Established in 1873, Notting Hill and Ealing High School (NHEHS) is an independent girls’ school for pupils aged between 4 and 18. Located in Ealing, London, the junior and senior schools educate nearly 900 girls combined. A popular school in the area, it produces consistently good exam results.

 

The school’s primary aim is to provide its students with an excellent academic and extracurricular education. Girls are taught a challenging curriculum to stimulate their learning, but always in a supportive environment. NHEHS puts student wellbeing at the heart of everything it does and, as such, provides excellent pastoral care. The school has a Personal, Social, Health, Citizenship and Economic Education programme that enables each year group to tackle issues tailored to their age.

 

Notting Hill and Ealing High School Cognitive Abilities Test, 11 Plus Exam Information

 

Registration Closing Date: November

Exam Date: January

Exam Board Type: CEM

Results Date: February

 

Notting Hill and Ealing High School Admissions Criteria

 

Notting Hill & Ealing High School is part of the London 11+ Consortium. Currently comprising of twelve independent schools, all these schools use the same test paper, which is taken on the same date in all schools. As such NHEHS adheres to the Consortium’s Agreed Code of Practice.

 

Year 7 is the usual main entry point to NHEHS’s Senior School and admission is determined by student performance in the January entrance test. The school also requires prospective pupils to attend an interview as part of the Year 7 selection process. This interview, which usually takes place in January/February, aims to help the school to identify who will benefit most from attending NHEHS.

 

Year 7 places are offered based on student performance in both the entrance exam and the interview, plus a character reference from their current school will be taken into account.

 

For further information on NHEHS’s Year 7 admissions process, please contact the Admissions team on 020 8991 2165 or email enquiries@nhehs.gdst.net.

 

How to Apply for 11 plus Entry to Notting Hill and Ealing High School

 

The best way to find out if Notting Hill and Ealing High School is the best educational environment for your child is to visit the institution. The school offers a selection of Senior School open days. If you would like to attend an upcoming event, please email the school’s Registrar at l.smith@nhehs.gdst.net.

 

Parents should register their daughter for the cognitive abilities test via this registration form. The form should be returned to the school alongside a non-refundable deposit of £125. Once a child is registered, they will be eligible to take the entrance test. The school offers lots of information about the 11 plus application process and has a useful FAQs document.

 

Notting Hill and Ealing High School Year 7 entry, 11 Plus Assessment

 

The London Consortium has replaced its traditional eleven plus exam with a bespoke Cognitive Abilities Test. The test assesses Maths, Verbal Reasoning and Non-Verbal Reasoning. This test has been created for the London Consortium by the Centre for Evaluation and Monitoring (CEM). It’s worth noting that the CEM definition of Verbal Reasoning includes question types, such as comprehension, that you would usually find in an English test.

 

Some of the questions will be in a multiple-choice format. Students will be required to mark their answers on a separate answer sheet. The test lasts for approximately 75 minutes, with a 30-minute break midway. CEM tests tend to consist of shorter timed sections, each focusing on a specific question type. These sections are then taken in a mixed order rather than one subject after another. So, for example, a 5-minute Verbal Reasoning comprehension section could be followed by a 10-minute Maths LNR section, followed by a 6-minute Verbal Reasoning cloze section.

 

There will be no other written assessments. The Consortium has implemented this new cognitive test to identify pupils’ overall academic potential, rather than their ability to retain knowledge for a particular exam.

 

Students can take the test at any school in the Consortium and parents will receive test results in February.

 

How to Prepare for the Notting Hill and Ealing High School 11 plus Entrance Test

 

Whatever a student’s current attainment level, investing additional time for preparation in the lead-up to the entrance test will likely improve their confidence ahead of the actual exam. As the assessment focuses on Maths, Verbal Reasoning and Non-Verbal Reasoning, we would recommend our selection of eleven plus papers that are designed in the CEM style. All our packs include answers so you can quickly check your child’s work and identify where they might need to focus and improve.

 

We would specifically recommend the following resources that can be downloaded and used immediately after purchase:

 

Mathematics Section

 

11+ Short Numerical Reasoning (CEM)

This pack contains 10 tests, each consisting of 20 questions. It focuses on time-pressured problem solving with question styles that are known to have been previously used by CEM.

 

11+ Long Numerical Reasoning (CEM)

This pack contains 10 tests, each consisting of 5 sections, with 5 questions in each section. It focuses on a specific type of question that comes up in CEM exams. These questions are based on some form of chart or diagram that the student must use to work out the answers. The answers must be recorded on a separate sheet in a specific manner. This pack includes separate answer sheets so students can get used to recording their responses in this way, just like they will need to do in the 11+ London Consortium test.

 

11+ MC Numerical Reasoning (CEM)

This pack contains 20 tests, each with 10 questions. It focuses on a different CEM question type in which there are multiple possible answer choices provided and the student must pick the correct one for each question. Separate answer sheets are provided so students can get used to recording their responses in this manner.

 

11+ Mental Arithmetic

This pack contains 15 tests, each with 15 questions. It focuses on fundamental arithmetic skills, developing a strong basis that allows students to work through maths questions efficiently and with confidence.

 

Verbal Reasoning Section

 

Verbal Reasoning, as defined by CEM, is quite different to how it may be traditionally understood. It includes a number of question types that focus on vocabulary and comprehension as well as some more unusual formats. Each of the packs below focuses on a different skill that is assessed in the Verbal Reasoning section of CEM 11+ exams, such as the London Consortium Test.

 

11+ Verbal Reasoning (CEM)

This pack contains plenty of practice for various question types that crop up frequently in CEM exams. These include questions  that assess a student’s grasp of synonyms and antonyms as well as other formats such as shuffled sentences and contextual cloze.

 

11+ Comprehension (CEM)

This pack focuses on multiple-choice comprehension, which will feature in the CEM 11+ London Consortium Test. There are 15 comprehension tests included.

 

11+ Cloze (CEM)

This pack focuses on cloze questions that are used in almost all CEM 11+ exams. The pack covers three different variations, with 21 tests in total.

 

11+ Spelling Pack 1 (CEM)

11+ Spelling Pack 2 (CEM)

CEM 11+ exams, such as the 11 plus London Consortium Test, focus heavily on assessing a child’s vocabulary. These packs each introduce 200 words within context, helping students to improve both their vocabulary and spelling. This will prove useful for the Verbal Reasoning section of the exam. Pack 2 is designed to be more challenging than Pack 1.

 

Non-Verbal Reasoning Section

11+ Non-Verbal Reasoning

This pack covers a number of the question types that are used in CEM 11+ Non-Verbal Reasoning exams such as Matrices, Box Sequences and Exceptions. There are some extension question types as well. Whilst these are not known to be utilised in CEM exams, they will help develop your child’s Non-Verbal reasoning ability, which will stand them in good stead for the exam.

 

If your total order value is over £60, simply apply the code eppdiscount at checkout to get 10% off your whole order.

 

 

We hope you find this article useful. Please don’t hesitate to get in touch if you need some advice or if you have any questions or queries.

 

The information in this post was correct at the time of publishing. However, please be aware of future changes. We advise you to contact the school directly if you are unsure of anything. School contact details are provided within the post.

 

Related posts:

Channing School 11 Plus (11+) Exam – Cognitive Abilities Test

Northwood College 11 Plus (11+) Exam – Cognitive Abilities Test

 

 

11+

screenshot of Northwood College website

An independent day school for girls aged 3-18, Northwood College was founded in 1870. Located in Northwood, in the London Borough of Hillingdon, over 900 girls attend the school. The school has an excellent academic record and, in 2017, outperformed 95% of all UK schools for core subject GCSEs results.

 

The college places significant emphasis on growing each student as an individual, preparing them for leadership roles and teaching them how to take responsible risks. The college operates a house system with four houses –  Briary, Buchan, Endsleigh and Heathfield. Each house goes head-to-head in a variety of sporting and academic events throughout the year.

 

Northwood College Cognitive Abilities Test Information

 

Registration Closing Date: November

Exam Date: January

Exam Board Type: CEM

Results Date: February

 

Northwood College Admissions Criteria

Northwood College is a member of the London Consortium and as such, follows its Agreed Code of Practice for all admissions. Year 7 is one of the college’s main points of entry and admission is determined by student performance in the school’s entrance test. As per the other schools in the Consortium, the Northwood College entrance test takes place in January of the year of entry.

 

Pupils are required to sit the entrance exam and attend an interview at the college. In this interview, teaching staff will assess each child’s general intelligence and potential. Students must also be able to provide a character reference from their current school.

 

Year 7 places are offered based on a student’s overall performance in the cognitive test, interview and reference.

 

For further information on Northwood College’s Year 7 admissions process, please contact the Registrar on 01923 845007 or email j.davidson@nwc.gdst.net.

 

How to Apply for 11 plus Entry to Northwood College

 

Northwood College hosts a small number of open events for parents. These events give students and parents the opportunity to meet the college’s headteacher and view the Senior School on a normal school day. As places are strictly limited, parents are advised to call 01923 825446 to book a place.

 

To register your daughter at Northwood College, complete this application form in the first instance. Parents should receive an acknowledgement of their daughter’s registration, which enables them to take the entrance test. The college’s Consortium FAQs document offers parents further details about the application process.

 

Northwood College Year 7 entry, eleven plus Assessment

 

The London Consortium has replaced its traditional eleven plus exam with a bespoke Cognitive Abilities Test. The test assesses Maths, Verbal Reasoning and Non-Verbal Reasoning. This test has been created for the London Consortium by the Centre for Evaluation and Monitoring (CEM). It’s worth noting that the CEM definition of Verbal Reasoning includes question types, such as comprehension, that you would usually find in an English test.

 

Some of the questions will be in a multiple-choice format. Students will be required to mark their answers on a separate answer sheet. The test lasts for approximately 75 minutes, with a 30-minute break midway. CEM tests tend to consist of shorter timed sections, each focusing on a specific question type. These sections are then taken in a mixed order rather than one subject after another. So, for example, a 5-minute Verbal Reasoning comprehension section could be followed by a 10-minute Maths LNR section, followed by a 6-minute Verbal Reasoning cloze section.

 

There will be no other written assessments. The Consortium has implemented this new cognitive test to identify pupils’ overall academic potential, rather than their ability to retain knowledge for a particular exam.

 

Students can take the test at any school in the Consortium and parents will receive test results in February.

 

How to Prepare for the Northwood College 11 plus Entrance Test

 

Whatever a student’s current attainment level, investing additional time for preparation in the lead-up to the entrance test will likely improve their confidence ahead of the actual exam. As the assessment focuses on Maths, Verbal Reasoning and Non-Verbal Reasoning, we would recommend our selection of eleven plus papers that are designed in the CEM style. All our packs include answers so you can quickly check your child’s work and identify where they might need to focus and improve.

 

We would specifically recommend the following resources that can be downloaded and used immediately after purchase:

 

Mathematics Section

 

11+ Short Numerical Reasoning (CEM)

This pack contains 10 tests, each consisting of 20 questions. It focuses on time-pressured problem solving with question styles that are known to have been previously used by CEM.

 

11+ Long Numerical Reasoning (CEM)

This pack contains 10 tests, each consisting of 5 sections, with 5 questions in each section. It focuses on a specific type of question that comes up in CEM exams. These questions are based on some form of chart or diagram that the student must use to work out the answers. The answers must be recorded on a separate sheet in a specific manner. This pack includes separate answer sheets so students can get used to recording their responses in this way, just like they will need to do in the 11+ London Consortium test.

 

11+ MC Numerical Reasoning (CEM)

This pack contains 20 tests, each with 10 questions. It focuses on a different CEM question type in which there are multiple possible answer choices provided and the student must pick the correct one for each question. Separate answer sheets are provided so students can get used to recording their responses in this manner.

 

11+ Mental Arithmetic

This pack contains 15 tests, each with 15 questions. It focuses on fundamental arithmetic skills, developing a strong basis that allows students to work through maths questions efficiently and with confidence.

 

Verbal Reasoning Section

 

Verbal Reasoning, as defined by CEM, is quite different to how it may be traditionally understood. It includes a number of question types that focus on vocabulary and comprehension as well as some more unusual formats. Each of the packs below focuses on a different skill that is assessed in the Verbal Reasoning section of CEM 11+ exams, such as the London Consortium Test.

 

11+ Verbal Reasoning (CEM)

This pack contains plenty of practice for various question types that crop up frequently in CEM exams. These include questions  that assess a student’s grasp of synonyms and antonyms as well as other formats such as shuffled sentences and contextual cloze.

 

11+ Comprehension (CEM)

This pack focuses on multiple-choice comprehension, which will feature in the CEM 11+ London Consortium Test. There are 15 comprehension tests included.

 

11+ Cloze (CEM)

This pack focuses on cloze questions that are used in almost all CEM 11+ exams. The pack covers three different variations, with 21 tests in total.

 

11+ Spelling Pack 1 (CEM)

11+ Spelling Pack 2 (CEM)

CEM 11+ exams, such as the 11 plus London Consortium Test, focus heavily on assessing a child’s vocabulary. These packs each introduce 200 words within context, helping students to improve both their vocabulary and spelling. This will prove useful for the Verbal Reasoning section of the exam. Pack 2 is designed to be more challenging than Pack 1.

 

Non-Verbal Reasoning Section

11+ Non-Verbal Reasoning

This pack covers a number of the question types that are used in CEM 11+ Non-Verbal Reasoning exams such as Matrices, Box Sequences and Exceptions. There are some extension question types as well. Whilst these are not known to be utilised in CEM exams, they will help develop your child’s Non-Verbal reasoning ability, which will stand them in good stead for the exam.

 

If your total order value is over £60, simply apply the code eppdiscount at checkout to get 10% off your whole order.

 

 

We hope you find this article useful. Please don’t hesitate to get in touch if you need some advice or if you have any questions or queries.

 

 

The information in this post was correct at the time of publishing. However, please be aware of future changes. We advise you to contact the school directly if you are unsure of anything. School contact details are provided within the post.

 

Related Posts:

Godolphin and Latymer School 11 Plus (11+) Exam – Cognitive Abilities Test

More House School 11 Plus (11+) Exam – Cognitive Abilities Test

 

 

11+

screenshot of More House School website

Founded in 1952, More House School is a Catholic independent girls’ school located in London’s Knightsbridge. The school gives its pupils the opportunity to learn in a caring environment; one that is full of challenges, but low in stress.

 

Due to its deep-rooted religious heritage, the school aims to foster spiritual growth among its students, while developing each girl’s potential during her school life. Pupils are divided among four houses: Canterbury, Iona, Santiago and Walsingham and girls remain in the same house throughout their time at the school. Houses take part in a number of competitive competitions throughout the academic year and girls can choose to participate in a range of extracurricular activities including drama, music and sport.

 

More House School Cognitive Abilities Test, 11 Plus Exam Information

 

Registration Closing Date: November

Exam Date: January

Exam Board Type: CEM

Results Date: February

 

More House School Admissions Criteria

 

As one of the 12 member schools that make up the London Consortium, More House School follows its Agreed Code of Practice for admissions. Year 7 admission is determined by student performance in the school’s entrance test, which takes place in January of the year of entry.

 

In the autumn term, all prospective pupils who have registered for a Year 7 place will be invited to the school for a taster day. Alongside various classes, pupils will have a short, informal interview with the school’s headteacher. Pupils are encouraged to bring along an item of interest, a hobby or a piece of work they are particularly proud of to discuss.

 

It is the policy of The London Consortium to offer places based on a student’s overall performance in the cognitive test, interview, and reference. This means Year 7 entry is not determined by performance in the exam alone.

 

For further information on More House School’s Year 7 admissions process, please contact the Registrar on 0207 235 2855 or email office@morehousemail.org.uk.

 

How to Apply for 11 plus Entry to More House School

 

In the first instance, parents are advised to request a prospectus for More House School. Parents can arrange individual visits to the school or attend a coffee morning event in May or June.

 

Parents can download a registration form for Year 7 entry via the school’s website. Parents are advised to register during the summer term, the year before admission is needed. Parents must submit the completed form alongside a non-refundable deposit of £125. The school also requires a passport photo of the applicant and a copy of the applicant’s birth certificate or passport.

 

For more information on the registration process, please read the school’s FAQs document.

 

More House School Year 7 entry, 11 Plus Assessment

 

The London Consortium has replaced its traditional eleven plus exam with a bespoke Cognitive Abilities Test. The test assesses Maths, Verbal Reasoning and Non-Verbal Reasoning. This test has been created for the London Consortium by the Centre for Evaluation and Monitoring (CEM). It’s worth noting that the CEM definition of Verbal Reasoning includes question types, such as comprehension, that you would usually find in an English test.

 

Some of the questions will be in a multiple-choice format. Students will be required to mark their answers on a separate answer sheet. The test lasts for approximately 75 minutes, with a 30-minute break midway. CEM tests tend to consist of shorter timed sections, each focusing on a specific question type. These sections are then taken in a mixed order rather than one subject after another. So, for example, a 5-minute Verbal Reasoning comprehension section could be followed by a 10-minute Maths LNR section, followed by a 6-minute Verbal Reasoning cloze section.

 

There will be no other written assessments. The Consortium has implemented this new cognitive test to identify pupils’ overall academic potential, rather than their ability to retain knowledge for a particular exam.

 

Students can take the test at any school in the Consortium and parents will receive test results in February.

 

How to Prepare for the More House School 11 plus Entrance Test

 

Whatever a student’s current attainment level, investing additional time for preparation in the lead-up to the entrance test will likely improve their confidence ahead of the actual exam. As the assessment focuses on Maths, Verbal Reasoning and Non-Verbal Reasoning, we would recommend our selection of eleven plus papers that are designed in the CEM style. All our packs include answers so you can quickly check your child’s work and identify where they might need to focus and improve.

 

We would specifically recommend the following resources that can be downloaded and used immediately after purchase:

 

Mathematics Section

 

11+ Short Numerical Reasoning (CEM)

This pack contains 10 tests, each consisting of 20 questions. It focuses on time-pressured problem solving with question styles that are known to have been previously used by CEM.

 

11+ Long Numerical Reasoning (CEM)

This pack contains 10 tests, each consisting of 5 sections, with 5 questions in each section. It focuses on a specific type of question that comes up in CEM exams. These questions are based on some form of chart or diagram that the student must use to work out the answers. The answers must be recorded on a separate sheet in a specific manner. This pack includes separate answer sheets so students can get used to recording their responses in this way, just like they will need to do in the 11+ London Consortium test.

 

11+ MC Numerical Reasoning (CEM)

This pack contains 20 tests, each with 10 questions. It focuses on a different CEM question type in which there are multiple possible answer choices provided and the student must pick the correct one for each question. Separate answer sheets are provided so students can get used to recording their responses in this manner.

 

11+ Mental Arithmetic

This pack contains 15 tests, each with 15 questions. It focuses on fundamental arithmetic skills, developing a strong basis that allows students to work through maths questions efficiently and with confidence.

 

Verbal Reasoning Section

 

Verbal Reasoning, as defined by CEM, is quite different to how it may be traditionally understood. It includes a number of question types that focus on vocabulary and comprehension as well as some more unusual formats. Each of the packs below focuses on a different skill that is assessed in the Verbal Reasoning section of CEM 11+ exams, such as the London Consortium Test.

 

11+ Verbal Reasoning (CEM)

This pack contains plenty of practice for various question types that crop up frequently in CEM exams. These include questions  that assess a student’s grasp of synonyms and antonyms as well as other formats such as shuffled sentences and contextual cloze.

 

11+ Comprehension (CEM)

This pack focuses on multiple-choice comprehension, which will feature in the CEM 11+ London Consortium Test. There are 15 comprehension tests included.

 

11+ Cloze (CEM)

This pack focuses on cloze questions that are used in almost all CEM 11+ exams. The pack covers three different variations, with 21 tests in total.

 

11+ Spelling Pack 1 (CEM)

11+ Spelling Pack 2 (CEM)

CEM 11+ exams, such as the 11 plus London Consortium Test, focus heavily on assessing a child’s vocabulary. These packs each introduce 200 words within context, helping students to improve both their vocabulary and spelling. This will prove useful for the Verbal Reasoning section of the exam. Pack 2 is designed to be more challenging than Pack 1.

 

Non-Verbal Reasoning Section

11+ Non-Verbal Reasoning

This pack covers a number of the question types that are used in CEM 11+ Non-Verbal Reasoning exams such as Matrices, Box Sequences and Exceptions. There are some extension question types as well. Whilst these are not known to be utilised in CEM exams, they will help develop your child’s Non-Verbal reasoning ability, which will stand them in good stead for the exam.

 

If your total order value is over £60, simply apply the code eppdiscount at checkout to get 10% off your whole order.

 

 

We hope you find this article useful. Please don’t hesitate to get in touch if you need some advice or if you have any questions or queries.

 

The information in this post was correct at the time of publishing. However, please be aware of future changes. We advise you to contact the school directly if you are unsure of anything. School contact details are provided within the post.

 

Related posts:

Francis Holland School (SW1) 11 Plus (11+) Exam – Cognitive Abilities Test

Godolphin and Latymer School 11 Plus (11+) Exam – Cognitive Abilities Test

 

 

11+

Screenshot of Godolphin and Latymer School website

Whilst being very strong school academically, Godolphin and Latymer prides itself on delivering much more than excellent exam results. Girls are given the chance to pursue a range of activities and non-academic interests outside of the classroom. The school offers a broad range of extracurricular activities. The school’s excellent pastoral care works to develop the girls’ confidence, ensuring that they are grounded and have plenty of opportunities to shine.

 

Godolphin and Latymer School Cognitive Abilities Test, 11 plus Exam 

 

Registration Closing Date: November

Exam Date: January

Exam Board Type: CEM

Results Date: February

 

Godolphin and Latymer School Admissions Criteria

 

Godolphin and Latymer School is a member of the London Consortium and follows its Agreed Code of Practice.

 

The main entry point to Godolphin and Latymer School is in Year 7 and admission is determined by student performance in the school’s entrance test, which takes place in January of the year of entry.

 

Following the examination, prospective pupils will be assessed principally through an interview and must also provide references from their current school. However, the school may also take into account other relevant factors or circumstances before making a decision on allocating Year 7 places.

 

The London Consortium’s policy is to offer places based on a student’s overall performance in the cognitive test, interview and reference(s). This means that Year 7 entry is not determined by performance in the exam alone.

 

According to the school’s admissions policy, although they do accept siblings, admission is not guaranteed on this basis.

 

For further information on Godolphin and Latymer School’s Year 7 admissions process, please contact the Registrar on 020 8741 1936 or email registrar@godolphinandlatymer.com.

 

How to Apply for 11 plus Entry to Godolphin and Latymer School

 

Before applying for an eleven plus place at Godolphin and Latymer School, parents must be sure that it is a good environment for their child. Attending one of the school’s open events in September or October is an opportunity to find out more about the school’s ethos and admissions process. Everyone is welcome at these events and you do not need to book a place, just turn up.

 

You can download a copy of the school’s registration form for the Cognitive Abilities Test online. Complete the form and return it directly to the school, alongside a non-refundable free of £125.

 

For more information about the registration process, please refer to the school’s FAQs document.

 

Godolphin and Latymer School Year 7 entry, 11 Plus Assessment

 

The London Consortium has replaced its traditional eleven plus exam with a bespoke Cognitive Abilities Test. The test assesses Maths, Verbal Reasoning and Non-Verbal Reasoning. This test has been created for the London Consortium by the Centre for Evaluation and Monitoring (CEM). It’s worth noting that the CEM definition of Verbal Reasoning includes question types, such as comprehension, that you would usually find in an English test.

 

Some of the questions will be in a multiple-choice format. Students will be required to mark their answers on a separate answer sheet. The test lasts for approximately 75 minutes, with a 30-minute break midway. CEM tests tend to consist of shorter timed sections, each focusing on a specific question type. These sections are then taken in a mixed order rather than one subject after another. So, for example, a 5-minute Verbal Reasoning comprehension section could be followed by a 10-minute Maths LNR section, followed by a 6-minute Verbal Reasoning cloze section.

 

There will be no other written assessments. The Consortium has implemented this new cognitive test to identify pupils’ overall academic potential, rather than their ability to retain knowledge for a particular exam.

 

Students can take the test at any school in the Consortium and parents will receive test results in February.

 

How to Prepare for the Channing School 11 plus Entrance Test

 

Whatever a student’s current attainment level, investing additional time for preparation in the lead-up to the entrance test will likely improve their confidence ahead of the actual exam. As the assessment focuses on Maths, Verbal Reasoning and Non-Verbal Reasoning, we would recommend our selection of eleven plus papers that are designed in the CEM style. All our packs include answers so you can quickly check your child’s work and identify where they might need to focus and improve.

 

We would specifically recommend the following resources that can be downloaded and used immediately after purchase:

 

Mathematics Section

 

11+ Short Numerical Reasoning (CEM)

This pack contains 10 tests, each consisting of 20 questions. It focuses on time-pressured problem solving with question styles that are known to have been previously used by CEM.

 

11+ Long Numerical Reasoning (CEM)

This pack contains 10 tests, each consisting of 5 sections, with 5 questions in each section. It focuses on a specific type of question that comes up in CEM exams. These questions are based on some form of chart or diagram that the student must use to work out the answers. The answers must be recorded on a separate sheet in a specific manner. This pack includes separate answer sheets so students can get used to recording their responses in this way, just like they will need to do in the 11+ London Consortium test.

 

11+ MC Numerical Reasoning (CEM)

This pack contains 20 tests, each with 10 questions. It focuses on a different CEM question type in which there are multiple possible answer choices provided and the student must pick the correct one for each question. Separate answer sheets are provided so students can get used to recording their responses in this manner.

 

11+ Mental Arithmetic

This pack contains 15 tests, each with 15 questions. It focuses on fundamental arithmetic skills, developing a strong basis that allows students to work through maths questions efficiently and with confidence.

 

Verbal Reasoning Section

 

Verbal Reasoning, as defined by CEM, is quite different to how it may be traditionally understood. It includes a number of question types that focus on vocabulary and comprehension as well as some more unusual formats. Each of the packs below focuses on a different skill that is assessed in the Verbal Reasoning section of CEM 11+ exams, such as the London Consortium Test.

 

11+ Verbal Reasoning (CEM)

This pack contains plenty of practice for various question types that crop up frequently in CEM exams. These include questions  that assess a student’s grasp of synonyms and antonyms as well as other formats such as shuffled sentences and contextual cloze.

 

11+ Comprehension (CEM)

This pack focuses on multiple-choice comprehension, which will feature in the CEM 11+ London Consortium Test. There are 15 comprehension tests included.

 

11+ Cloze (CEM)

This pack focuses on cloze questions that are used in almost all CEM 11+ exams. The pack covers three different variations, with 21 tests in total.

 

11+ Spelling Pack 1 (CEM)

11+ Spelling Pack 2 (CEM)

CEM 11+ exams, such as the 11 plus London Consortium Test, focus heavily on assessing a child’s vocabulary. These packs each introduce 200 words within context, helping students to improve both their vocabulary and spelling. This will prove useful for the Verbal Reasoning section of the exam. Pack 2 is designed to be more challenging than Pack 1.

 

Non-Verbal Reasoning Section

11+ Non-Verbal Reasoning

This pack covers a number of the question types that are used in CEM 11+ Non-Verbal Reasoning exams such as Matrices, Box Sequences and Exceptions. There are some extension question types as well. Whilst these are not known to be utilised in CEM exams, they will help develop your child’s Non-Verbal reasoning ability, which will stand them in good stead for the exam.

 

If your total order value is over £60, simply apply the code eppdiscount at checkout to get 10% off your whole order.

 

 

We hope you find this article useful. Please don’t hesitate to get in touch if you need some advice or if you have any questions or queries.

 

 

The information in this post was correct at the time of publishing. However, please be aware of future changes. We advise you to contact the school directly if you are unsure of anything. School contact details are provided within the post.

 

Related posts:

Francis Holland School (NW1) 11 Plus (11+) Cognitive Abilities Test

Francis Holland School (SW1) 11 Plus (11+) Cognitive Abilities Test

 

11+

screenshot of Francis Holland School SW1

Founded in 1881, Francis Holland School (SW1) is located in London’s Sloane Square and currently has 450 pupils on roll. An independent day school for girls, the school makes up one half of the Francis Holland School institution; the other is located close to Regent’s Park.

 

A Church of England school, Francis Holland (SW1) follows Christian beliefs, but is open to girls from all religious backgrounds. The school’s mission is to provide its students with a balanced education in a supportive and friendly community. Its curriculum is challenging and encourages pupils to be creative and curious, while its co-curricular timetable includes sports, languages and drama.

 

Francis Holland School (SW1) Cognitive Abilities Test, Exam Information

 

Registration Closing Date: November

Exam Date: January

Exam Board Type: CEM

Results Date: February

 

Francis Holland School (SW1) Admissions Criteria

 

Francis Holland School (SW1) is a member of the London Consortium and follows its Agreed Code of Practice.

 

For prospective pupils to be in with a chance of gaining a Year 7 place at Francis Holland School (SW1), they must sit the school’s 11+ entrance test, which takes place in January of the year of entry. Students are also required to attend an interview, which exists to explore a candidate’s current skill set and intellectual ability. Pupils must also supply a reference from their current school, providing a detailed commentary on their academic performance and character.

 

The school doesn’t place emphasis on one part of the application process alone. The examination, interview and reference are all considered equally important and complementary.

 

For further information on Francis Holland School (SW1)’s Year 7 admissions process, please contact the Registrar on 020 7824 5005, or email registrar@fhs-sw1.org.uk.

 

How to Apply for 11 plus Entry to Francis Holland School (SW1)

 

To apply for a Year 7 place at Francis Holland School (SW1), parents should contact the school directly and request an application form. Please note, that a separate application form needs to be completed for each school applied to, as schools process the applications individually.

 

For parents and students to get a better understanding of whether Francis Holland is the right environment, the school holds open events, which take place between September and November. These events include a talk from the Headteacher and a chance to meet current pupils and teaching staff.

 

For more information on the registration process, the school’s website has a useful FAQs section.

 

Francis Holland School (SW1) Year 7 entry, 11 Plus Assessment

 

The London Consortium has replaced its traditional eleven plus exam with a bespoke Cognitive Abilities Test. The test assesses Maths, Verbal Reasoning and Non-Verbal Reasoning. This test has been created for the London Consortium by the Centre for Evaluation and Monitoring (CEM). It’s worth noting that the CEM definition of Verbal Reasoning includes question types, such as comprehension, that you would usually find in an English test.

 

Some of the questions will be in a multiple-choice format. Students will be required to mark their answers on a separate answer sheet. The test lasts for approximately 75 minutes, with a 30-minute break midway. CEM tests tend to consist of shorter timed sections, each focusing on a specific question type. These sections are then taken in a mixed order rather than one subject after another. So, for example, a 5-minute Verbal Reasoning comprehension section could be followed by a 10-minute Maths LNR section, followed by a 6-minute Verbal Reasoning cloze section.

 

There will be no other written assessments. The Consortium has implemented this new cognitive test to identify pupils’ overall academic potential, rather than their ability to retain knowledge for a particular exam.

 

Students can take the test at any school in the Consortium and parents will receive test results in February.

 

How to Prepare for the Francis Holland School (SW1) 11 plus Entrance Test

 

Whatever a student’s current attainment level, investing additional time for preparation in the lead-up to the entrance test will likely improve their confidence ahead of the actual exam. As the assessment focuses on Maths, Verbal Reasoning and Non-Verbal Reasoning, we would recommend our selection of eleven plus papers that are designed in the CEM style. All our packs include answers so you can quickly check your child’s work and identify where they might need to focus and improve.

 

We would specifically recommend the following resources that can be downloaded and used immediately after purchase:

 

Mathematics Section

 

11+ Short Numerical Reasoning (CEM)

This pack contains 10 tests, each consisting of 20 questions. It focuses on time-pressured problem solving with question styles that are known to have been previously used by CEM.

 

11+ Long Numerical Reasoning (CEM)

This pack contains 10 tests, each consisting of 5 sections, with 5 questions in each section. It focuses on a specific type of question that comes up in CEM exams. These questions are based on some form of chart or diagram that the student must use to work out the answers. The answers must be recorded on a separate sheet in a specific manner. This pack includes separate answer sheets so students can get used to recording their responses in this way, just like they will need to do in the 11+ London Consortium test.

 

11+ MC Numerical Reasoning (CEM)

This pack contains 20 tests, each with 10 questions. It focuses on a different CEM question type in which there are multiple possible answer choices provided and the student must pick the correct one for each question. Separate answer sheets are provided so students can get used to recording their responses in this manner.

 

11+ Mental Arithmetic

This pack contains 15 tests, each with 15 questions. It focuses on fundamental arithmetic skills, developing a strong basis that allows students to work through maths questions efficiently and with confidence.

 

Verbal Reasoning Section

 

Verbal Reasoning, as defined by CEM, is quite different to how it may be traditionally understood. It includes a number of question types that focus on vocabulary and comprehension as well as some more unusual formats. Each of the packs below focuses on a different skill that is assessed in the Verbal Reasoning section of CEM 11+ exams, such as the London Consortium Test.

 

11+ Verbal Reasoning (CEM)

This pack contains plenty of practice for various question types that crop up frequently in CEM exams. These include questions  that assess a student’s grasp of synonyms and antonyms as well as other formats such as shuffled sentences and contextual cloze.

 

11+ Comprehension (CEM)

This pack focuses on multiple-choice comprehension, which will feature in the CEM 11+ London Consortium Test. There are 15 comprehension tests included.

 

11+ Cloze (CEM)

This pack focuses on cloze questions that are used in almost all CEM 11+ exams. The pack covers three different variations, with 21 tests in total.

 

11+ Spelling Pack 1 (CEM)

11+ Spelling Pack 2 (CEM)

CEM 11+ exams, such as the 11 plus London Consortium Test, focus heavily on assessing a child’s vocabulary. These packs each introduce 200 words within context, helping students to improve both their vocabulary and spelling. This will prove useful for the Verbal Reasoning section of the exam. Pack 2 is designed to be more challenging than Pack 1.

 

Non-Verbal Reasoning Section

11+ Non-Verbal Reasoning

This pack covers a number of the question types that are used in CEM 11+ Non-Verbal Reasoning exams such as Matrices, Box Sequences and Exceptions. There are some extension question types as well. Whilst these are not known to be utilised in CEM exams, they will help develop your child’s Non-Verbal reasoning ability, which will stand them in good stead for the exam.

 

If your total order value is over £60, simply apply the code eppdiscount at checkout to get 10% off your whole order.

 

 

We hope you find this article useful. Please don’t hesitate to get in touch if you need some advice or if you have any questions or queries.

 

 

The information in this post was correct at the time of publishing. However, please be aware of future changes. We advise you to contact the school directly if you are unsure of anything. School contact details are provided within the post.

 

Related posts:

Channing School 11 Plus (11+) Exam – Cognitive Abilities Test

Francis Holland School (NW1) 11 Plus (11+) Exam – Cognitive Abilities Test

 

 

11+

screenshot of Francis Holland School NW1

Founded in 1878, Francis Holland School in Regent’s Park, London, is an independent day school for girls. The school makes up one half of the Francis Holland School institution; the other school is located near Sloane Square (SW1). The school has a strong academic reputation, while providing a caring and nurturing environment for its 450+ students. Teachers focus on building the girls’ self-confidence during their time at the school, giving them the independence to thrive in life after education.

 

Alongside a packed academic curriculum, students have countless opportunities to participate in a variety of extracurricular activities, such as sports, drama and music. Francis Holland School takes full advantage of its location in London, giving students the chance to regularly visit the capital throughout their school life.

 

Francis Holland School (NW1) Cognitive Abilities Test, 11+ Information

 

Registration Closing Date: November

Exam Date: January

Exam Board Type: CEM

Results Date: February

 

Francis Holland School (NW1) Admissions Criteria

 

Francis Holland School (NW1) is one of 12 members of the London Consortium and as such, follows its Agreed Code of Practice.

 

Year 7 admission to Francis Holland School (NW1) is determined by student performance in the school’s 11+ entrance test, which takes place in January of the year of entry. Once the exam is complete, students are required to attend one or more interviews, designed to assess their general intelligence. Pupils must also provide both character and academic references from their current school as part of their application to Francis Holland.

 

Year 7 entry is not determined by student performance in the 11 plus exam alone. It is the policy of the London Consortium to consider overall performance in the cognitive test, interview and reference(s). Each of these assessment procedures will allow the school to gauge a student’s potential. Should the school have to decide between two or more candidates who meet the admission requirements, they may give preference to girls:

 

  • who already have a sister in the school
  • whose parent is a former pupil of the school
  • whose parent is a current member of staff
  • with a particular skill, talent or aptitude
  • who are daughters of Church of England clergy

 

However, girls from the above list will not necessarily be given automatic priority.

 

For further information on Francis Holland School’s Year 7 admissions process, please contact the Registrar on 020 7535 2777 or email registrar@fhs-nw1.org.uk.

 

How to Apply for 11 plus Entry to Francis Holland School (NW1)

 

Parents and students are encouraged to attend one of the school’s open events, which take place from September to November. These events give parents the chance to ask current teaching staff questions about the admissions process and to also take a tour of the school with current pupils. Parents can book a place at one of the open events, here. Parents must request a registration form for the Cognitive Abilities Test directly from the school.

 

For more information on the registration process, read the school’s FAQs document.

 

Francis Holland School (NW1) Year 7 Entry, 11 Plus Assessment

 

The London Consortium has replaced its traditional eleven plus exam with a bespoke Cognitive Abilities Test. The test assesses Maths, Verbal Reasoning and Non-Verbal Reasoning. This test has been created for the London Consortium by the Centre for Evaluation and Monitoring (CEM). It’s worth noting that the CEM definition of Verbal Reasoning includes question types, such as comprehension, that you would usually find in an English test.

 

Some of the questions will be in a multiple-choice format. Students will be required to mark their answers on a separate answer sheet. The test lasts for approximately 75 minutes, with a 30-minute break midway. CEM tests tend to consist of shorter timed sections, each focusing on a specific question type. These sections are then taken in a mixed order rather than one subject after another. So, for example, a 5-minute Verbal Reasoning comprehension section could be followed by a 10-minute Maths LNR section, followed by a 6-minute Verbal Reasoning cloze section.

 

There will be no other written assessments. The Consortium has implemented this new cognitive test to identify pupils’ overall academic potential, rather than their ability to retain knowledge for a particular exam.

 

Students can take the test at any school in the Consortium and parents will receive test results in February.

  

How to Prepare for the Francis Holland School (NW1) 11 plus Entrance Test

 

Whatever a student’s current attainment level, investing additional time for preparation in the lead-up to the entrance test will likely improve their confidence ahead of the actual exam. As the assessment focuses on Maths, Verbal Reasoning and Non-Verbal Reasoning, we would recommend our selection of eleven plus papers that are designed in the CEM style. All our packs include answers so you can quickly check your child’s work and identify where they might need to focus and improve.

 

We would specifically recommend the following resources that can be downloaded and used immediately after purchase:

 

Mathematics Section

 

11+ Short Numerical Reasoning (CEM)

This pack contains 10 tests, each consisting of 20 questions. It focuses on time-pressured problem solving with question styles that are known to have been previously used by CEM.

 

11+ Long Numerical Reasoning (CEM)

This pack contains 10 tests, each consisting of 5 sections, with 5 questions in each section. It focuses on a specific type of question that comes up in CEM exams. These questions are based on some form of chart or diagram that the student must use to work out the answers. The answers must be recorded on a separate sheet in a specific manner. This pack includes separate answer sheets so students can get used to recording their responses in this way, just like they will need to do in the 11+ London Consortium test.

 

11+ MC Numerical Reasoning (CEM)

This pack contains 20 tests, each with 10 questions. It focuses on a different CEM question type in which there are multiple possible answer choices provided and the student must pick the correct one for each question. Separate answer sheets are provided so students can get used to recording their responses in this manner.

 

11+ Mental Arithmetic

This pack contains 15 tests, each with 15 questions. It focuses on fundamental arithmetic skills, developing a strong basis that allows students to work through maths questions efficiently and with confidence.

 

Verbal Reasoning Section

 

Verbal Reasoning, as defined by CEM, is quite different to how it may be traditionally understood. It includes a number of question types that focus on vocabulary and comprehension as well as some more unusual formats. Each of the packs below focuses on a different skill that is assessed in the Verbal Reasoning section of CEM 11+ exams, such as the London Consortium Test.

 

11+ Verbal Reasoning (CEM)

This pack contains plenty of practice for various question types that crop up frequently in CEM exams. These include questions  that assess a student’s grasp of synonyms and antonyms as well as other formats such as shuffled sentences and contextual cloze.

 

11+ Comprehension (CEM)

This pack focuses on multiple-choice comprehension, which will feature in the CEM 11+ London Consortium Test. There are 15 comprehension tests included.

 

11+ Cloze (CEM)

This pack focuses on cloze questions that are used in almost all CEM 11+ exams. The pack covers three different variations, with 21 tests in total.

 

11+ Spelling Pack 1 (CEM)

11+ Spelling Pack 2 (CEM)

CEM 11+ exams, such as the 11 plus London Consortium Test, focus heavily on assessing a child’s vocabulary. These packs each introduce 200 words within context, helping students to improve both their vocabulary and spelling. This will prove useful for the Verbal Reasoning section of the exam. Pack 2 is designed to be more challenging than Pack 1.

 

Non-Verbal Reasoning Section

11+ Non-Verbal Reasoning

This pack covers a number of the question types that are used in CEM 11+ Non-Verbal Reasoning exams such as Matrices, Box Sequences and Exceptions. There are some extension question types as well. Whilst these are not known to be utilised in CEM exams, they will help develop your child’s Non-Verbal reasoning ability, which will stand them in good stead for the exam.

 

If your total order value is over £60, simply apply the code eppdiscount at checkout to get 10% off your whole order.

 

 

We hope you find this article useful. Please don’t hesitate to get in touch if you need some advice or if you have any questions or queries.

 

 

The information in this post was correct at the time of publishing. However, please be aware of future changes. We advise you to contact the school directly if you are unsure of anything. School contact details are provided within the post.

 

Related posts:

Channing School 11 Plus (11+) Exam – Cognitive Abilities Test

Francis Holland School (SW1) 11 Plus (11+) Exam – Cognitive Abilities Test

 

 

11+

Screenshot of Channing School website

Founded in 1885, Channing School is an independent day school for girls located in Highgate, North London. Set in beautiful surroundings, Channing School consistently produces excellent exam results. In 2015, the Independent Schools Inspectorate awarded the school the highest possible judgements in its inspection.

 

The school is known for providing excellent pastoral care. When new girls join the school in Year 7, they are paired with a girl in Year 8, who offers support and guidance throughout their first year. Channing School also operates a house system where girls compete in academic and sporting events throughout the year. The four houses are: Sharpe, Spears, Waterlow and Goodwin. From Year 9, girls also have the opportunity to participate in the Duke of Edinburgh Award Scheme.

 

Channing School Cognitive Abilities Test, 11 Plus Information

 

Registration Closing Date: November

Exam Date: January

Exam Board Type: CEM

Results Date: February

 

Channing School Admissions Criteria

 

Channing School is a member of the London Consortium and follows its Agreed Code of Practice.

 

The main entry point to Channing school is in Year 7 and admission is determined by student performance in the school’s entrance test, which takes place in January of the year of entry.

 

After the examination, students are required to attend an interview, which is designed to assess creativity and broader forms of intelligence. The interview is intended to help the school ensure that it can meet the student’s needs. A reference is also requested from the girl’s current school.

 

The London Consortium’s policy is to offer places based on a student’s overall performance in the cognitive test, interview, and reference. Year 7 entry is not determined by performance in the exam alone, and the school looks at the three areas very carefully to gauge each candidate’s potential.

 

Girls who currently have a sister at the school are given careful consideration but are not given automatic priority.

 

For further information on Channing School’s Year 7 admissions process, please contact the Registrar on 020 8340 2328, or email admissions@channing.co.uk.

 

How to Apply for 11 plus Entry to Channing School

 

Before applying for a 11 plus place at Channing School, parents and students are encouraged to attend one of the Open Days from September to November. Parents and their daughters will have the opportunity to tour the school and meet with current pupils and staff. There will also be a talk given by the Head about Channing’s new admissions process. Parents can book a place at one of the Open Day events here.

 

Registration for the cognitive abilities test is completed online here. Parents will receive an acknowledgement of their daughter’s registration, which enables them to take the entrance test. For more information on the registration process, the school website has a useful FAQs section.

 

Channing School Year 7 Entry, 11 Plus Assessment

 

The London Consortium has replaced its traditional eleven plus exam with a bespoke Cognitive Abilities Test. The test assesses Maths, Verbal Reasoning and Non-Verbal Reasoning. This test has been created for the London Consortium by the Centre for Evaluation and Monitoring (CEM). It’s worth noting that the CEM definition of Verbal Reasoning includes question types, such as comprehension, that you would usually find in an English test.

 

Some of the questions will be in a multiple-choice format. Students will be required to mark their answers on a separate answer sheet. The test lasts for approximately 75 minutes, with a 30-minute break midway. CEM tests tend to consist of shorter timed sections, each focusing on a specific question type. These sections are then taken in a mixed order rather than one subject after another. So, for example, a 5-minute Verbal Reasoning comprehension section could be followed by a 10-minute Maths LNR section, followed by a 6-minute Verbal Reasoning cloze section.

 

There will be no other written assessments. The Consortium has implemented this new cognitive test to identify pupils’ overall academic potential, rather than their ability to retain knowledge for a particular exam.

 

Students can take the test at any school in the Consortium and parents will receive test results in February.

 

How to Prepare for the Channing School 11 plus Entrance Test

 

Whatever a student’s current attainment level, investing additional time for preparation in the lead-up to the entrance test will likely improve their confidence ahead of the actual exam. As the assessment focuses on Maths, Verbal Reasoning and Non-Verbal Reasoning, we would recommend our selection of eleven plus papers that are designed in the CEM style. All our packs include answers so you can quickly check your child’s work and identify where they might need to focus and improve.

 

We would specifically recommend the following resources that can be downloaded and used immediately after purchase:

 

Mathematics Section

 

11+ Short Numerical Reasoning (CEM)

This pack contains 10 tests, each consisting of 20 questions. It focuses on time-pressured problem solving with question styles that are known to have been previously used by CEM.

 

11+ Long Numerical Reasoning (CEM)

This pack contains 10 tests, each consisting of 5 sections, with 5 questions in each section. It focuses on a specific type of question that comes up in CEM exams. These questions are based on some form of chart or diagram that the student must use to work out the answers. The answers must be recorded on a separate sheet in a specific manner. This pack includes separate answer sheets so students can get used to recording their responses in this way, just like they will need to do in the 11+ London Consortium test.

 

11+ MC Numerical Reasoning (CEM)

This pack contains 20 tests, each with 10 questions. It focuses on a different CEM question type in which there are multiple possible answer choices provided and the student must pick the correct one for each question. Separate answer sheets are provided so students can get used to recording their responses in this manner.

 

11+ Mental Arithmetic

This pack contains 15 tests, each with 15 questions. It focuses on fundamental arithmetic skills, developing a strong basis that allows students to work through maths questions efficiently and with confidence.

 

Verbal Reasoning Section

 

Verbal Reasoning, as defined by CEM, is quite different to how it may be traditionally understood. It includes a number of question types that focus on vocabulary and comprehension as well as some more unusual formats. Each of the packs below focuses on a different skill that is assessed in the Verbal Reasoning section of CEM 11+ exams, such as the London Consortium Test.

 

11+ Verbal Reasoning (CEM)

This pack contains plenty of practice for various question types that crop up frequently in CEM exams. These include questions  that assess a student’s grasp of synonyms and antonyms as well as other formats such as shuffled sentences and contextual cloze.

 

11+ Comprehension (CEM)

This pack focuses on multiple-choice comprehension, which will feature in the CEM 11+ London Consortium Test. There are 15 comprehension tests included.

 

11+ Cloze (CEM)

This pack focuses on cloze questions that are used in almost all CEM 11+ exams. The pack covers three different variations, with 21 tests in total.

 

11+ Spelling Pack 1 (CEM)

11+ Spelling Pack 2 (CEM)

CEM 11+ exams, such as the 11 plus London Consortium Test, focus heavily on assessing a child’s vocabulary. These packs each introduce 200 words within context, helping students to improve both their vocabulary and spelling. This will prove useful for the Verbal Reasoning section of the exam. Pack 2 is designed to be more challenging than Pack 1.

 

Non-Verbal Reasoning Section

11+ Non-Verbal Reasoning

This pack covers a number of the question types that are used in CEM 11+ Non-Verbal Reasoning exams such as Matrices, Box Sequences and Exceptions. There are some extension question types as well. Whilst these are not known to be utilised in CEM exams, they will help develop your child’s Non-Verbal reasoning ability, which will stand them in good stead for the exam.

 

If your total order value is over £60, simply apply the code eppdiscount at checkout to get 10% off your whole order.

 

 

We hope you find this article useful. Please don’t hesitate to get in touch if you need some advice or if you have any questions or queries.

 

 

The information in this post was correct at the time of publishing. However, please be aware of future changes. We advise you to contact the school directly if you are unsure of anything. School contact details are provided within the post. 

 

Related posts:

Francis Holland School (NW1) 11 Plus (11+) Cognitive Abilities Test

Francis Holland School (SW1) 11 Plus (11+) Cognitive Abilities Test

 

 

11+, Grammar Schools

The 2018 Selective Eligibility Test will take place on Tuesday 18th September 2018.

 

The test will consist of two multiple-choice papers, testing Maths and English. Each paper will be about 45 minutes long.

 

The Selective Eligibility Test (SET) is used by a number of schools in the Surrey area. Click on the links below to learn more about the application process at each school:

 

Nonsuch High School for Girls

Sutton Grammar School for Boys

Wallington County Grammar School

Wallington High School for Girls

Wilson’s School

 

Apart from at Wallington County Grammar School, students who pass the Selective Eligibility Test will be invited back for a second round test in October. This will assess Maths and English in a standard format, not multiple-choice.

 

We have produced a comprehensive set of resources to help you prepare for every element of the exam, including full-length practice tests and subject-specific, targeted exercises.

 

We have made our practice tests as accurate as possible, even replicating the style and format of the answer sheets so your child can get used to marking their answers exactly how they will need to do in the actual test.

 

You can currently take advantage of our special offer and save 30% off our 11+ Sutton bundle. This includes all the resources you will need to help your child prepare for both Round 1 (multiple-choice) and Round 2 (non-multiple-choice) of the exams. To take advantage of this offer, simply add all of the following products to your basket and enter the code suttondeal at checkout to save 30%!

 

Round 1

 

11 Plus Selective Eligibility Test Sutton Practice Test 1

11 Plus Selective Eligibility Test Sutton Practice Test 2

11 Plus Selective Eligibility Test Sutton Practice Test 3

11 Plus Selective Eligibility Test Sutton Practice Test 4

11 Plus Selective Eligibility Test Sutton Practice Test 5

 

For further subject-specific practice, we would recommend the following:

 

11 Plus English Grammar Schools Pack 1

11 Plus English Grammar Schools Pack 2

11 Plus English Grammar School Pack 3

11 Plus English: Spelling Pack 1

11 Plus English: Spelling Pack 2

 

11 Plus Maths Grammar Schools Pack 1

11 Plus Maths Grammar Schools Pack 2

11 Plus Maths Grammar Schools Pack 3

11 Plus Maths: Problem Solving Grammar Schools

 

Round 2 

 

For Round 2, we highly recommend the following packs:

 

11 Plus Mathematics Pack 1 (Open Answer)

11 Plus Mathematics Pack 2 (Open Answer)

11 Plus Mathematics Pack 3 (Open Answer)

11 Plus Mental Arithmetic (Open Answer)

 

11 Plus English Pack 1 (Open Answer)

11 Plus English Pack 2 (Open Answer)

11 Plus English Pack 3 (Open Answer)

11 Plus Spelling Pack 1 (Open Answer)

11 Plus Spelling Pack 1 (Open Answer)

 

 

We hope you find this offer beneficial. Don’t hesitate to get in touch if you have any questions or queries. We are always happy to help and advise!

 

11+, Grammar Schools

Screenshot of the Blue Coat School website

Located in Wavertree, Liverpool, The Blue Coat School was established in 1708. Originally a boys’ boarding school, it became co-educational in 2002. Blue Coat is the only grammar school in Liverpool and educates almost 1,000 pupils aged 11-18.

 

In addition to offering a busy curriculum, The Blue Coat School has a variety of clubs and societies. Students are encouraged to explore their interests outside of the classroom by enrolling in extra-curricular activities and sports.

 

11 Plus Exam Information for The Blue Coat School

 

Address: The Blue Coat School, Church Road, Wavertree, Liverpool, L15 9EE

County: Merseyside

Admissions Info: office@bluecoatschool.org.uk, 0151 733 1407

School Type: Co-Educational Grammar

Number of pupils: 963 (approx.)

Number of Places in Year 7: 180

Open Day Date: July

Exam Date: September

Exam Board Type: Set by School

 

The Blue Coat School 11 Plus Admissions

 

With 180 Year 7 places available, admission to The Blue Coat School is determined by student performance in the 11 Plus exam. Eligibility for places will be based on the following criteria:

 

  • Up to 27 places will be available to the highest scoring applicants who are eligible for free school meals and who achieve an entrance test score of 320 or more
  • The remaining places will be available to all other highest scoring applicants

 

Should there be a tie for the last place(s), the Non-Verbal Reasoning score from the exam will determine the result.

 

How to Apply for 11 Plus Entry to The Blue Coat School

 

The Blue Coat School administers its own 11+ test for Year 7. Parents can apply for a place online via the school’s admissions form – this will be available on the school’s website once registration is open.

 

Parents will receive test results in October and Year 7 places will be allocated in March of the following year.

 

The Blue Coat School 11 Plus Exam Format

 

The Blue Coat School eleven plus exam consists of three tests:

 

  1. Mathematics – 45 minutes
  2. English – 50 minutes
  3. Non-Verbal Reasoning – 20 minutes

 

How to Prepare for The Blue Coat School 11 Plus Exam?

 

In the first instance, we would recommend preparing for the 11+ test well ahead of the exam date. The sooner children start studying for the tests, the more time they will have to improve their performance on exam day.

 

Parents should create a study timetable with their child to ensure that they cover everything they will need to know. By introducing practice exam papers early into a student’s study routine, they will become more familiar with the exam layout and the types of questions they may be asked.

 

As the exam date gets closer, parents should encourage their child to do timed practice papers under exam conditions. This will help students get used to answering questions under time pressure, as will be required in the exam.

 

We specifically recommend the following resources for The Blue Coat School 11 Plus exam:

 

11 Plus Mathematics (Pack 1)

11 Plus Mathematics (Pack 2)

11 Plus Mathematics (Pack 3)

11 Plus Mathematics – Problem Solving

 

11 Plus English Pack 1 (Open Answer)

11 Plus English Pack 2 (Open Answer)

11 Plus English Pack 3 (Open Answer)

11 Plus Spelling Pack 1 (Open Answer)

11 Plus Spelling Pack 2 (Open Answer)

 

11 Plus Non-Verbal Reasoning (Pack 1)

 

The information provided about The Blue Coat School was believed to be correct at the time of publishing. However, please be aware of future changes. We advise you to contact the school directly if you are unsure of anything. School contact details are provided within the post.

11+, Grammar Schools

Screenshot of the King's School Grantham website

Founded in 1528, The King’s School is located in the Lincolnshire market town of Grantham. An all-boys’ grammar school, King’s has academy status and teaches pupils aged 11-18.

 

Over 1,000 pupils are split across six houses and the school offers them a diverse curriculum. It encourages its boys to participate in creatively-led enrichment activities including music, drama and art. The school also has an active Combined Cadet Force.

 

11 Plus Exam Information for The King’s School Grantham

 

Address: The King’s School, Brook Street, Grantham NG31 6RP

County: Lincolnshire

Admissions Info: admin@kings.lincs.sch.uk, 01476 563180

School Type: Boys’ Grammar

Number of pupils: 1,016 (approx.)

Number of Places in Year 7: 174

Open Day Date: June

Exam Date: September

Exam Board Type: GL Assessment

 

The King’s School Grantham 11 Plus Admissions

 

The King’s School Grantham is part of the Lincolnshire Consortium of Grammar Schools. With 174 places available in Year 7, the school is often over-subscribed. In cases where there are more applicants than available places, the following oversubscription criteria are used, giving priority to:

 

  1. Looked after children and all previously looked after children who have achieved the qualifying score (220 and above).
  2. Any remaining places will then be awarded in rank score order for those students who have qualified for entry, up to the total number of children intended to be admitted.

 

For more information about The King’s School admissions process, take a look at the school’s website.

 

How to Apply for 11 Plus Entry to The King’s School Grantham

 

To apply for a Year 7 place at The King’s School, parents should visit their Local Authority (LA) website to register their interest in a place. They should then download and complete the school’s registration form to book their child’s place in the eleven plus exam.

 

Exam results will be sent to parents and guardians in October, ahead of the deadline for returning the parental preference form to the local authority. In March of the following year, the local authority will send out place offers based on the preferences submitted on the application form.

 

The King’s School Grantham 11 Plus Exam Format

 

The 11+ test for The King’s School consists of two multiple-choice papers:

 

  1. Verbal Reasoning – this 50-minute test is made-up of 80 questions.
  2. Non-Verbal Reasoning – this 40-minute test is made-up of 70 questions and is split into five sections. Two of the five sections cover Spatial Reasoning.

 

How to Prepare for the King’s School Grantham 11 Plus Exam?

 

The King’s School, Grantham is a popular grammar in Lincolnshire, so children must be fully prepared for the eleven plus exam well ahead of test day. As the school’s entrance exam focuses on reasoning, we would recommend reading the following articles to gain a better understanding of what the tests involve:

 

11 Plus Verbal Reasoning Exam Preparation

11 Plus Non-Verbal Reasoning Advice

 

Often, the build-up to the 11 plus can be more stressful than the actual exam. To boost your son’s confidence ahead of the test, incorporate practice exam papers into his revision timetable.

 

At Exam Papers Plus, we have a selection of 11+ practice tests that will help your son to prepare for The King’s School Verbal and Non-Verbal Reasoning entrance exams. We would specifically recommend the following packs:

 

11+ Verbal Reasoning Pack 1

11+ Verbal Reasoning Pack 2

11+ Verbal Reasoning Pack 3

 

11+ Non-Verbal Reasoning Pack 1

 

The information provided about the King’s School Grantham was believed to be correct at the time of publishing. However, please be aware of future changes. We advise you to contact the school directly if you are unsure of anything. School contact details are provided within the post.

11+, Grammar Schools

Screenshot of the Cranbrook School website

Founded in 1518, Cranbrook School is a co-educational grammar located in Cranbrook, Kent. It accepts pupils for both day and boarding school – however, as the school’s main point of entry is Year 9, no boarding school places are available at Year 7.

 

Cranbrook is consistently high-performing when it comes to exam results and prides itself on teaching its pupils to be independent. The school offers an array of extracurricular activities set outside of the classroom, including a Combined Cadet Force, Duke of Edinburgh Award Scheme and various community initiatives.

 

11 Plus Exam Information for Cranbrook School

 

Address: Cranbrook School, Waterloo Road, Cranbrook, Kent, TN17 3JD

County: Kent

Admissions Info: admissions@cranbrook.kent.sch.uk, 01580 711805

School Type: Co-Educational Grammar

Number of pupils: 750 (approx.)

Number of Places in Year 7: 60 (day places only)

Open Day Date: May, September, October

Exam Date: September

Exam Board Type: Kent 11 Plus Test

 

Cranbrook School 11 Plus Admissions

 

Traditionally, Cranbrook’s main entry point for new students is Year 9, but it has recently opened up admissions to include more day places at Year 7. To be considered for one of these 60 places, prospective pupils must sit the Kent eleven plus test and achieve the required standard.

 

Parents and children are invited to attend one of the school’s open events to ask any questions they have about the admissions process. Cranbrook hosts open events throughout the academic year, allowing parents to take a tour of the school and meet staff and current pupils.

 

With a relatively small number of places available at Year 7, the school is often oversubscribed. In such instances, the school will apply the following criteria, giving priority to:

 

  1. Children in (or previously in) Local Authority Care
  2. Children entitled to Pupil Premium without the priority area
  3. Children within the priority area who have proven social needs
  4. Children who live within the priority area
  5. Children who live outside of the priority area

 

For more information about Cranbrook’s 11+ admissions, simply visit the school’s website directly.

 

How to Apply for 11 Plus Entry to Cranbrook School

 

Cranbrook School adheres to the coordinated admission scheme from Kent County Council, the LA. As Cranbrook uses the Kent Test as a means of selection in Year 7, parents must register online with the LA in the first instance.

 

Once students have taken the 11+ Kent Test, parents are required to complete the Secondary Common Application Form and submit it to the LA. This process can usually be done online. Parents will receive eleven plus results from the Council in October, with offers sent out in March.

 

Cranbrook School 11 Plus Exam Format

 

Cranbrook School requires pupils to sit the Kent 11 Plus exam. The Kent Test consists of two multiple-choice tests:

 

  1. An hour-long exam that is divided into two sections that cover English and maths. Each section consists of a 5-minute practice exercise and a 25-minute test.
  2. A 60-minute test that focuses on reasoning. It is divided into three sections: verbal reasoning, non-verbal reasoning and spatial reasoning

 

Pupils must also complete a 40-minute writing task. However, this does not form part of the final 11 Plus result but can be used in any borderline or appeal cases.

 

You can learn more about the Kent Test with these sample questions and gain further clarification on what to expect from the exam.

 

How to Prepare for the Cranbrook School 11 Plus Exam?

 

Kent is a hugely competitive grammar school region, with most (if not all) schools oversubscribed at Year 7. For your child to be in with a chance of gaining one of the 60 places at Cranbrook, they should invest additional time into studying and revising in the build-up to the test.

 

The Kent Test requires students to have a good knowledge of a range of subjects. If your child has a particular weak point, you can use practice exam papers to help improve it ahead of the test.

 

Students who are registered to take the Cranbrook School entrance test will benefit from these practice resources:

 

Kent Practice Test 1 (11 Plus)

Kent Practice Test 2 (11 Plus)

Kent Practice Test 3 (11 Plus)

 

These tests are designed to replicate the format, content, structure, question types, style and timings of the actual Kent 11 plus exam.

 

For additional, subject-specific revision of multiple-choice questions, we would also highly recommend these practice exam papers:

 

11 Plus Maths Pack 1 (GL)

11 Plus Maths Pack 2 (GL)

11 Plus Maths Pack 3 (GL)

11 Plus Maths: Problem Solving (GL)

 

11 Plus English Pack 1 (GL)

11 Plus English Pack 2 (GL)

11 Plus English Pack 3 (GL)

11 Plus Spelling

 

11 Plus Verbal Reasoning Pack 1 (GL)

11 Plus Verbal Reasoning Pack 2 (GL)

11 Plus Verbal Reasoning Pack 3 (GL)

 

11 Plus Non-Verbal Reasoning Pack 1 (GL)

 

The information provided about Cranbrook School was believed to be correct at the time of publishing. However, please be aware of future changes. We advise you to contact the school directly if you are unsure of anything. School contact details are provided within the post.

 

11+, Grammar Schools

Screenshot of the Chatham and Clarendon Grammar School website

Chatham and Clarendon Grammar School is a co-educational grammar located in Ramsgate, Kent. In 2011, two schools – Chatham House Grammar School and Clarendon House Grammar School, merged to form the school as it’s currently known.

 

Maintaining the long history of the previous schools, Chatham and Clarendon blends its traditional surroundings with a modern outlook to learning. Students are assigned a house in Year 7 and remain part of it throughout their time at the school.

 

Almost 700 pupils are divided across four houses – Knight-Heath, Mann-Somerville, Rothschild-Pearce and Thomas-Sharman. Throughout each academic year, the houses go head-to-head in a range of activities and competitions.

 

11 Plus Exam Information for Chatham and Clarendon Grammar School

 

Address: Chatham and Clarendon Grammar School, Chatham Street, Ramsgate, Kent CT11 7PS

County: Kent

Admissions Info: registrar@ccgrammarschool.co.uk, 01843 591075

School Type: Co-Educational Grammar

Number of pupils: 700 (approx.)

Number of Places in Year 7: 180

Open Day Date: June, October

Exam Date: September

Exam Board Type: Kent 11 Plus (GL)

 

Chatham and Clarendon Grammar School 11 Plus Admissions

 

Year 7 admission to Chatham and Clarendon Grammar School is determined by student performance in the Kent 11 Plus Test. To be considered for one of the 180 places available, prospective pupils must achieve the required standard in this entrance exam.

 

The school encourages both parents and pupils to attend one of its open events before registering for a Year 7 place. At these events, parents can ask any questions they might have about the school’s curriculum and learning environment.

 

In case of oversubscription, Chatham and Clarendon Grammar School will give priority to:

 

  • Students who are, or have been, in Local Authority Care
  • Pupils who demonstrate health and special access reasons
  • Applicants in receipt of pupil premium
  • Students with a sibling at the school
  • Pupils who live within the school’s catchment area
  • Those living closest to the school

 

For more detail about the defined catchment area and oversubscription criteria, visit the school’s website.

 

How to Apply for 11 Plus Entry to Chatham and Clarendon Grammar School

 

To apply for a Year 7 place at Chatham and Clarendon Grammar School, parents must first register their child for the Kent Test. This can be done online via the Local Authority (LA), Kent County Council.

 

The LA coordinates all Year 7 places, so parents are advised to contact them directly with any specific registration questions. Parents will receive the results of the exam via the LA in October and official places will be confirmed in March of the following year.

 

Chatham and Clarendon Grammar School 11 Plus Exam Format

 

To be considered for a Year 7 place at Chatham and Clarendon Grammar School, all pupils must reach the required standard in the Kent 11 Plus test. Most selective grammar schools in the area adhere to this test.

 

The Kent eleven plus exam is split into three sections:

 

  1. The first section focuses on English and maths. Both subjects consist of a 5-minute practice exercise and a 25-minute test. The test is multiple choice and is an hour long overall.
  2. The second sections tests students’ reasoning abilities. The test is split into three sections: Verbal Reasoning, Non-Verbal Reasoning and Spatial Reasoning. It’s a multiple-choice test that lasts for one hour.
  3. The third section is a writing task that lasts for 40 minutes. Student performance in this task does not contribute to the overall 11+ score, but the paper may be used when looking at borderline cases, or during an appeals process.

 

How to Prepare for the Chatham and Clarendon Grammar School 11 Plus Exam?

 

As Kent is an extremely competitive grammar school region, children sitting the Kent Test at eleven plus must be prepared. A ‘little and often’ approach is usually very effective, as manageable chunks are much easier for children to process, compared with longer revision sessions.

 

We strongly recommend that students use practice exam papers early-on in their revision as they enable parents to monitor their learning and identify any strengths and weaknesses.

 

For students to have the best chance of gaining a Year 7 place at Chatham and Clarendon Grammar School, we would recommend using the following resources:

 

Kent Practice Test 1 (11 Plus)

Kent Practice Test 2 (11 Plus)

Kent Practice Test 3 (11 Plus)

 

And for additional subject-specific revision, we would suggest these practice exam papers:

 

11 Plus Verbal Reasoning Pack 1 (GL)

11 Plus Verbal Reasoning Pack 2 (GL)

11 Plus Verbal Reasoning Pack 3 (GL)

 

11 Plus Non-Verbal Reasoning Pack 1 (GL)

 

11 Plus English Pack 1 (GL)

11 Plus English Pack 2 (GL)

11 Plus English Pack 3 (GL)

11 Plus Spelling (GL)

 

11 Plus Maths Pack 1 (GL)

11 Plus Maths Pack 2 (GL)

11 Plus Maths Pack 3 (GL)

11 Plus Maths: Problem Solving (GL)

 

The information provided about Chatham and Clarendon Grammar School was believed to be correct at the time of publishing. However, please be aware of future changes. We advise you to contact the school directly if you are unsure of anything. School contact details are provided within the post.

11+, Grammar Schools

Screenshot of the King Edward VI Academy website

King Edward VI Academy is a coeducational bilateral school located in the Lincolnshire market town of Spilsby. The school also has academy status. Regular funding has enabled the school to build modern facilities that offer pupils a range of opportunities, whether academic, vocational, artistic or sporting.

 

11 Plus Exam Information for King Edward VI Academy

 

Address: King Edward VI Academy, West End, Spilsby PE23 5EW

County: Lincolnshire

Admissions Info: office@kingedwardacademy.co.uk, 01790 753260

School Type: Co-Educational Grammar

Number of pupils: 417 (approx.)

Number of Places in Year 7: 95 (approx.)

Open Day Date: July

Exam Date: September

Exam Board Type: GL Assessment

 

King Edward VI Academy 11 Plus Admissions

 

Admission to King Edward VI Academy in Year 7 is determined by pupil performance in the 11 Plus exam. There are currently 85 places allocated to Year 7 students, although only around 30 of these are selective. The school strongly encourages prospective students and their parents to attend one of their open evenings before applying for a place.

 

King Edward VI Academy is a member of the Lincolnshire Consortium of Grammar Schools and the Local Authority (LA), Lincolnshire County Council, coordinates the school’s admissions using the 11+ exam.

 

In cases where the school is oversubscribed, the following oversubscription criteria is used, giving priority to:

 

  1. Looked after, or previously looked after, children
  2. Children with a sibling at the school at the time of application
  3. Children who live closest to the school
  4. Children attending a named feeder school

 

You can find out more information about King Edward VI Academy’s admission process at Year 7 by visiting the school’s website.

 

How to Apply for 11 Plus Entry to King Edward VI Academy

 

As an academy, King Edward VI operates under the LA’s admissions scheme. All Year 7 places are managed by Lincolnshire County Council. Once a child has taken the 11+ in September, results will be sent to parents by the LA in October.

 

Parents living in Lincolnshire should complete a Common Application Form (CAF) directly via the LA website. Failure to do so will mean your child will not be considered for a grammar school place in Lincolnshire.

 

King Edward VI Academy 11 Plus Exam Format

 

Prospective pupils for King Edward VI Academy must sit two eleven plus tests. These exams are multiple-choice and students will be tested on:

 

  • Verbal Reasoning – this 50-minute test is made-up of 80 questions.
  • Non-Verbal Reasoning – this 40-minute test is made-up of 70 questions. Questions must be answered one section at a time, with seven minutes allocated to each section. Pupils cannot move onto the next section until they are told to do so. Two of the five sections cover Spatial Reasoning.

 

How to Prepare for the King Edward VI Academy 11 Plus Exam?

 

To give children the best possible chance of achieving the required standard for Year 7 entry to King Edward VI Academy, revision should begin a few months ahead of the actual exam date.

 

The King Edward VI Academy 11 plus exam focuses on reasoning, so parents are advised to read the following articles ahead of scheduling revision sessions:

 

11 Plus Verbal Reasoning Exam Preparation

11 Plus Non-Verbal Reasoning Advice

 

At Exam Papers Plus, we publish practice exam papers to help boost students’ confidence. These papers provide students with a better understanding of what is required in the test.

 

Our 11 Plus practice tests help children prepare for the King Edward VI Academy exam. We would specifically recommend the following packs:

 

Eleven Plus Verbal Reasoning Pack 1

Eleven Plus Verbal Reasoning Pack 2

Eleven Plus Verbal Reasoning Pack 3

 

Eleven Plus Non-Verbal Reasoning Pack 1

 

The information provided about King Edward VI Academy was believed to be correct at the time of publishing. However, please be aware of future changes. We advise you to contact the school directly if you are unsure of anything. School contact details are provided within the post.

 

 

11+, Grammar Schools

Screenshot of the Newport Girls’ High School website

Located in Newport, a market town in Shropshire, Newport Girls’ High School (NGHS) is a selective all-girls school with academy status. The school has specialist status in both maths and computing.

 

Students are split into three houses (Seacole, Roddam and Austen) and compete with each other in a range of activities throughout the academic year. The school holds a number of music events which showcase its chamber choir and orchestras.

 

11 Plus Exam Information for Newport Girls’ High School

 

Address: Newport Girls’ High School, Wellington Road, Newport TF10 7HL

County: Shropshire

Admissions Info: schooloffice@nghs.org.uk, 01952 797550

School Type: Girls’ Grammar

Number of pupils: 412 (approx.)

Number of Places in Year 7: 84 (approx.)

Open Day Date: May, October

Exam Date: September

Exam Board Type: CEM (University of Durham)

 

Newport Girls’ High School 11 Plus Admissions

 

Newport Girls’ operates its admissions arrangements and procedures in-line with the Consortium of Grammar Schools in Shropshire, Walsall and Wolverhampton.

 

The Consortium requires that students are selected for admission based on their combined, age-standardised score in the CEM eleven plus exam. Students must attain the minimum ‘qualifying score’ to be eligible for admission. It should be noted though that attaining the qualifying score does not guarantee pupils a place at NGHS.

 

The school encourages prospective students and their parents to attend an open day, where more information about the admissions process is provided.

 

Initial priority will always be given to girls who live within the school’s catchment area. However, in cases where there are more applicants than available places in Year 7, the school uses its oversubscription criteria, giving priority to:

 

  1. Looked after, or previously looked after, children
  2. Candidates who live out of the catchment area

 

For more information about Newport Girls’ High School, please visit the school’s website directly.

 

How to Apply for 11 Plus Entry to Newport Girls’ High School

 

Parents who wish to apply to NGHS should complete an online test registration form for the Consortium of Grammar Schools in Shropshire, Walsall and Wolverhampton. This can be found via the school’s website when registration opens. Parents should also complete a Common Application Form (CAF) via their Local Authority website.

 

Parents will receive 11+ results in October and will be notified of official place offers in March of the following year.

 

Newport Girls’ High School 11 Plus Exam Format

 

The 11 Plus exam for Newport Girls’ High School assesses:

 

 

The four subjects are split over two tests that each last 45 minutes.

 

How to Prepare for the Newport Girls’ High School 11 Plus Exam?

 

Although NGHS is a relatively small grammar school, it is popular and is regularly oversubscribed in Year 7, with an average of five applications for every place available. In order for students to have the best chance of gaining a place at the school, they must be committed to a structured revision timetable. This timetable will ensure that students cover everything they need to know for the exam, without being overworked.

 

Introducing practice exam papers into a student’s revision plan will help identify their strengths and weaknesses and improve their time management skills.

 

We have a selection of 11 plus practice exam papers that are highly recommended for students preparing for 11+ entry to NGHS:

 

 

The information provided about Newport Girls’ High School was believed to be correct at the time of publishing. However, please be aware of future changes. We advise you to contact the school directly if you are unsure of anything. School contact details are provided within the post.

11+, Grammar Schools

Screenshot of the Holcombe Grammar School for Boys website

Established in 1817, Holcombe Grammar School is a grammar school based in Chatham, Kent. Previously known as Chatham Grammar School for Boys, it is now a selective academy. The school is fully co-educational from the end of 2018.

 

Students aged 11-18 are divided into four houses – Barfleur, Conquest, Guardian and Shannon – all named after ships built at Chatham Dockyard, not too far from the school campus. The houses compete against each other throughout the school year in an effort to secure the House Shield by the end of the summer term.

 

11 Plus Exam Information for Holcombe Grammar School

 

Address: Holcombe, Letchworth Avenue, Chatham, Kent, ME4 6JB

County: Kent (Medway)

Admissions Info: office@holcombegrammar.org.uk, 01634 830 083

School Type: Boys’ Grammar, Co-Educational by 2018

Number of pupils: 963 (approx.)

Number of Places in Year 7: 120

Open Day Date: October

Exam Date: September

Exam Board Type: Medway 11 Plus (CEM)

 

Holcombe Grammar School 11 Plus Admissions

 

There are 120 places available in Year 7 at Holcombe Grammar School, with each place determined by pupil performance in the 11+ exam. Prior to applying for a place, parents are advised to attend the school’s open event to get more information about the admissions process.

 

Along with the other grammar schools in Medway, Holcombe uses The Medway Test for Year 7 admissions. Children who attend a primary school in the area will take the 11 Plus exam at their current school, while those living outside the area will take the exam in an independent test centre.

 

In the event of oversubscription, Holcombe Grammar School applies the following criteria, giving priority to:

 

  1. Looked after, or previously looked after, children
  2. Children who have a sibling attending the school
  3. Children who have a sibling attending any Trust primary school
  4. Children of staff employed by the Trust
  5. Child’s health reasons
  6. Children who live closest to the school

 

Schools within the Medway local authority (LA) use a different admissions criteria, so parents are advised to double check the exact specifications with the school before completing the Common Application Form (CAF). More details about Holcombe Grammar School’s admissions process is available on the school website.

 

How to Apply for 11 Plus Entry to Holcombe Grammar School

 

To apply for a Year 7 place at the school, parents must complete the Common Application Form (CAF), which is administered by the Medway local authority.

 

All primary schools within the Medway area will receive booklets entitled ‘Admission to Secondary School: A Guide for Parents’ to distribute, which explains more about registration. Alternatively, parents can call the Admissions team at Medway Council on 01634 331110 with any pressing questions about the application process.

 

Holcombe Grammar School 11 Plus Exam Format

 

The Holcombe Grammar School 11 Plus exam consists of:

 

 

Both the verbal reasoning and maths tests are multiple choice and last 50 minutes each. The English test often takes the form of an essay and lasts 50 minutes, which includes 10 minutes of planning time.

 

In The Medway Test, the 11 plus maths and English sections are double-weighted in comparison to the verbal reasoning section. This means the maths and writing scores are given twice the importance of the verbal reasoning score in the Medway 11 plus.

 

How to Prepare for the Holcombe Grammar School 11 Plus Exam?

 

The more preparation students put into the eleven plus, the less intimidating it will seem. We advise that students should plan ahead and make use of relevant practice resources.

 

Parents should encourage their child to complete 11 Plus practice papers under timed conditions for the Medway Test as this will help them to establish a rhythm of answering questions quickly under time pressure.

 

For the Holcombe Grammar School 11+ exam, we would recommend the following resources:

 

11 Plus CEM Verbal Reasoning

 

11 Plus CEM Comprehension

11 Plus CEM Cloze

11 Plus CEM Spelling

 

11 Plus CEM Short Numerical Reasoning

11 Plus CEM Long Numerical Reasoning

11 Plus CEM Multiple Choice Numerical Reasoning

 

The information provided about Holcombe Grammar School was believed to be correct at the time of publishing. However, please be aware of future changes. We advise you to contact the school directly if you are unsure of anything. School contact details are provided within the post.

11+, Grammar Schools

Branded image for Wiltshire Grammar Schools 11 Plus (11+) Exam Information

There are two selective grammar schools in Wiltshire; Bishop Wordsworth’s for boys and South Wiltshire for girls. For specific eleven plus details about each school, please read the articles below:

 

Bishop Wordsworth’s School

South Wiltshire Grammar School for Girls

 

11 Plus Exam Information for Wiltshire Grammar Schools

 

Registration Closing Date: Bishop Wordsworth’s: July | South Wilts: September Common Application Form (CAF) Closing Date: October

Exam Date: September

Exam Board Type: Bishop Wordsworth’s: CEM (University of Durham) | South Wilts: GL Assessment

Results Date: October

Pass Mark: Not made public

Allocations Date: March

Appeals Hearings: April, May, June

Admissions Info: Wiltshire County Council, 01225 713010

 

Wiltshire Grammar Schools 11 Plus Admissions

 

Both grammar schools in Wiltshire use the 11 Plus exam to determine Year 7 place allocation. As both schools are regularly oversubscribed, parents and prospective students are encouraged to attend their chosen school’s open event before making an application – this helps to ensure that the school would be a good fit for the pupil.

 

Wiltshire grammar school admissions for Year 7 are coordinated through Wiltshire County Council. However, it is the responsibility of parents to ensure their child is registered for the eleven plus exam ahead of the exam date in September.

 

How to Register for the Wiltshire Grammar Schools 11 Plus Exam

 

In the first instance, parents must submit a Common Application Form (CAF) to Wiltshire County Council – this can be done online. Both schools in the region also require parents to complete a Supplementary Form, available from the school directly.

 

Students who live outside the Wiltshire region should submit the CAF through their own local authority, who will inform Wiltshire County Council of the application.

 

Wiltshire Grammar Schools 11 Plus Exam Format

 

While both Wiltshire grammar schools use the 11+ exam for Year 7 entry, they opt to use different providers. We have outlined the exam format for both entrance exams below:

 

Bishop Wordsworth’s School

 

Bishop Wordsworth’s 11 Plus exam consists of two papers, each lasting 50 minutes. Both papers test verbal reasoning, non-verbal reasoning and numerical ability. All papers are multiple-choice. The verbal reasoning section is likely to include comprehension and cloze, as per previous CEM exam papers.

 

South Wiltsshire Grammar

 

The South Wilts Grammar School for Girls eleven plus test consists of three multiple-choice papers that test maths, English and verbal reasoning. The scores from all three tests are standardised, combined and of equal weighting.

 

Practice Papers for the Wiltshire Grammar Schools 11 Plus Exam

 

For pupils currently preparing for the Bishop Wordsworth eleven plus exam, we would highly recommend the following practice resources:

 

 

Girls preparing for the South Wilts grammar school 11 Plus exam will find the practice resources below most useful:

 

 

 

 

The information provided about Wiltshire grammar schools was believed to be correct at the time of publishing. However, please be aware of future changes. We advise you to contact the schools directly if you are unsure of anything. Contact details are provided within individual school posts.

 

 

 

11+, Grammar Schools

Branded image for Yorkshire Grammar Schools 11 Plus (11+) Exam Information

There are six grammar schools in Yorkshire, split across three Local Authorities. The schools below have been organised according to their boundaries. for 11+ information specific to each particular school, please click on the following links:

 

Calderdale

 

Crossley Heath Grammar School

North Halifax Grammar School

 

Kirklees

 

Heckmondwike Grammar School

 

North Yorkshire

 

Ermysted Grammar School

Ripon Grammar School

Skipton Girls’ High School

 

11 Plus Exam Information for Yorkshire Grammar Schools

 

Registration Closing Date: Calderdale – September, Kirklees – June, North Yorkshire – July

Common Application Form (CAF) Closing Date: October

Exam Date: September

Exam Board Type: Calderdale and North Yorkshire – GL Assessment, Kirklees – CEM (University of Durham)

Results Date: October

Pass Mark: Varies year to year

Allocations Date: March

Appeals Hearings: June

Admissions Info: Calderdale Council, Kirklees Council, North Yorkshire Council

 

Yorkshire Grammar Schools 11 Plus Admissions

 

To be considered for a Year 7 place at a Yorkshire grammar school, pupils must pass the eleven plus exam. While some schools in the area are responsible for their own admissions, they must comply with the North Yorkshire Coordinated Scheme for secondary school admissions to Year 7.

 

The schools encourage prospective pupils and parents to attend an open evening during the academic year. Usually at these events, school staff will provide additional information about the admissions process and visitors will have the opportunity to tour the school and meet staff members.

 

How to Register for the Yorkshire Grammar Schools 11 Plus Exam

 

Year 7 admission to any of the Yorkshire grammar schools is based on the results of an 11 Plus exam entrance test. To enter for this exam, parents must register their child with their local authority (LA) before the closing date. Parents must also complete a Supplementary Information Form via the preferred school’s website.

 

Please note, late applications will only be considered once the initial round of allocations has been completed.

 

Yorkshire Grammar Schools 11 Plus Exam Format

 

For Calderdale schools:

 

Prospective pupils to both Crossley Heath Grammar School and North Halifax Grammar School must sit three tests at 11+. These tests cover English, mathematics and verbal reasoning. The maths paper is written by the school, while the Verbal Reasoning paper is created by GL Assessment.

 

For Kirklees:

 

Children will sit two exams, created by CEM (University of Durham) that test verbal reasoning, non-verbal reasoning and numerical reasoning. Each paper contains a mix of multiple choice and standard format questions.

 

For North Yorkshire:

 

All three grammar schools in North Yorkshire set their own admissions policies. North Yorkshire Council manages admissions for Ermysted Grammar School and Ripon Grammar School. Skipton High School administers its own tests.

 

For Ermysted and Ripon:

 

The 11 Plus tests for both schools consists of two multiple choice papers that focus on both verbal and non-verbal reasoning.

 

For Skipton Girls:

 

Pupils will sit three tests that cover mathematics, English and verbal reasoning. All three exams are multiple choice and there is no extended writing exercise.

 

Practice Papers for the Yorkshire Grammar Schools 11 Plus Exam

 

For Crossley Heath and North Halifax grammar schools, we would recommend the following resources:

 

 

 

 

 

For  schools in the North Yorkshire authority, we would highly recommend these 11 Plus practice resources:

 

NB: For Ermysted Grammar School and Ripon Grammar School, only the Verbal and Non-Verbal Reasoning practice papers below are relevant.

 

11+ English Pack 1

11+ English Pack 2

11+ English Pack 3

11+ English Spelling

 

11+ Mathematics Pack 1

11+ Mathematics Pack 2

11+ Mathematics Pack 3

11+ Mathematics: Problem Solving

 

11+ Verbal Reasoning Pack 1

11+ Verbal Reasoning Pack 2

11+ Verbal Reasoning Pack 3

 

11+ Non-Verbal Reasoning: Pack 1

 

For those preparing for the Kirklees 11 Plus exam, we specifically recommend:

 

11 Plus CEM Mathematics Short Numerical Reasoning

11 Plus CEM Maths Long Numerical Reasoning

11 Plus CEM Maths Multiple Choice Reasoning

 

11 Plus CEM Verbal Reasoning (Pack 1)

11 Plus English Cloze (Pack 1)

11 Plus English/Verbal Reasoning: Comprehension (Pack 1)

11 Plus CEM Spelling (CEM)

 

For those preparing for the Skipton High School 11 Plus exam, we specifically recommend:

 

11+ Maths Pack 1 (GL)

11+ Maths Pack 2 (GL)

11+ Maths Pack 3 (GL)

11+ Maths: Problem Solving (GL)

 

11+ English Pack 1 (GL)

11+ English Pack 2 (GL)

11+ English Pack 3 (GL)

11+ Spelling Pack 1

11+ Spelling Pack 2

 

11+ Verbal Reasoning Pack 1 (GL)

11+ Verbal Reasoning Pack 2 (GL)

11+ Verbal Reasoning Pack 3 (GL)

 

The information provided about Yorkshire grammar schools was believed to be correct at the time of publishing. However, please be aware of future changes. We advise you to contact the schools directly if you are unsure of anything. Contact details are provided within individual school posts.

11+, Grammar Schools

Branded image for Wolverhampton and Wrekin Grammar Schools 11 Plus (11+) Exam Information

There are five grammar schools in the Wolverhampton and Wrekin region. Since 2012, each of these schools has been part of The Consortium of Grammar Schools in Shropshire, Walsall and Wolverhampton. For 11+ details and admissions information about each individual school, please read the articles below:

 

Adams’ Grammar School

Newport Girls’ High School

Queen Mary’s Grammar School

Queen Mary’s High School

Wolverhampton High School for Girls

 

11 Plus Exam Information for Wolverhampton and Wrekin Grammar Schools

 

Registration Closing Date: July

Common Application Form (CAF) Closing Date: October

Exam Date: September

Exam Board Type: CEM (University of Durham)

Results Date: October

Pass Mark: Varies from year to year

Allocations Date: March

Appeals Hearings: June

Admissions Info: Consortium of Grammar Schools in Shropshire, Walsall and Wolverhampton

 

Wolverhampton and Wrekin Grammar Schools 11 Plus Admissions

 

Year 7 admission to all of the grammar schools in Wolverhampton and Wrekin is solely determined by pupil performance in the eleven plus exam. Each of the schools in the region encourages prospective students and their parents to attend an open event, where more information about the admissions process is provided.

 

Year 7 admissions to Wolverhampton and Wrekin grammar schools are coordinated through the Consortium of Grammar Schools in Shropshire, Walsall and Wolverhampton and parents must register online ahead of their child’s 11+ exam date in September.

 

How to Register for the Wolverhampton and Wrekin Grammar Schools 11 Plus Exam

 

To apply for a Year 7 place at a Wolverhampton and Wrekin grammar school, parents must register their child with the Consortium. Parents need to complete two forms for 11+ entry: The Entrance Test Registration Form and the Local Authority (LA) form, also known as a Secondary School Preference Form. The latter document needs to be returned to the LA directly by the deadline date specified on the form.

 

Late candidates will only be considered following the initial allocation of places, so it is always advised to meet the registration deadline in the first instance.

 

Wolverhampton and Wrekin Grammar Schools 11 Plus Exam Format

 

Wolverhampton and Wrekin grammar schools all use the same 11 Plus entrance assessment. The exam tests a child’s verbal reasoning, non-verbal reasoning, maths and English. The four subjects are split over two tests, each lasting 45 minutes.

 

Some of the questions are multiple choice and the papers will be divided into smaller, individually-timed sections.

 

Practice Papers for the Wolverhampton and Wrekin Grammar Schools 11 Plus Exam

 

At Exam Papers Plus, we have a selection of practice exam papers that are highly recommended for those sitting the Wolverhampton and Wrekin 11 Plus:

 

 

The information provided about Wolverhampton and Wrekin grammar schools was believed to be correct at the time of publishing. However, please be aware of future changes. We advise you to contact the schools directly if you are unsure of anything. Contact details are provided within individual school posts.

 

11+, Grammar Schools

Branded image for Warwickshire Grammar Schools 11 Plus (11+) Exam Information

There are five fully selective grammar schools in the Warwickshire region. For 11 Plus exam admissions information for each specific school, please visit the pages below:

 

Alcester Grammar School

Lawrence Sheriff School

King Edward VI School

Rugby High School

Stratford Girls’ Grammar School

 

11 Plus Exam Information for Warwickshire Grammar Schools

 

Registration Closing Date: July

Common Application Form (CAF) Closing Date: October

Exam Date: September

Exam Board Type: CEM (University of Durham)

Results Date: October

Pass Mark: Varies per school

Allocations Date: March

Appeals Hearings: April, May, June

Admissions Info: Warwickshire County Council, 01926 414143

 

Warwickshire Grammar Schools 11 Plus Admissions

 

All Year 7 places in Warwickshire grammar schools are allocated based on pupil performance in the 11+ exam. Parents are advised to attend their preferred schools’ open day(s), which usually take place in June, before applying for a place. At these events, parents can learn more about the admissions process and prospective pupils can take a tour of the school.

 

Year 7 admissions to Warwickshire grammar schools are coordinated by Warwickshire County Council and parents must register online ahead of their child’s 11+ exam date in September.

 

How to Register for the Warwickshire Grammar Schools 11 Plus Exam

 

Warwickshire County Council’s Admissions Service, known as Warwickshire Admissions, oversees 11 Plus entry to all grammar schools in the region. This service operates the same entrance test procedure as the Grammar Schools in the Birmingham Consortium. To apply for entry to a school in Year 7, parents must register their child for the entrance examination by completing the Common Application Form (CAF).

 

The deadline for registration is usually in July and the form needs to be handed in to the local authority. Please note that schools in the region will not consider late registrations in the first round of placements.

 

Warwickshire Grammar Schools 11 Plus Exam Format

 

The Warwickshire eleven plus exam consists of two papers that last approximately 45 minutes each. They contain a mix of standard format and multiple-choice questions and cover verbal reasoning, non-verbal reasoning and mathematics.

 

The verbal reasoning exam includes an English component, containing a comprehension and cloze test. The maths exam involves a numeracy section, which tests ability in mental arithmetic and problem-solving questions.

 

Practice Papers for the Warwickshire Grammar Schools 11 Plus Exam

 

If your child is preparing for the Warwickshire grammar school entrance exam, we have several 11 Plus practice papers that can help:

 

11+ Verbal Reasoning (CEM)

11+ Comprehension (CEM)

11+ Cloze (CEM)

11+ Spelling

11+ Short Numerical Reasoning (CEM)

11+ Long Numerical Reasoning (CEM)

11+ Multiple Choice Numerical Reasoning (CEM)

 

The information provided about Warwickshire grammar schools was believed to be correct at the time of publishing. However, please be aware of future changes. We advise you to contact the schools directly if you are unsure of anything. Contact details are provided within individual school posts.

 

11+, Grammar Schools

Branded image for the Wirral and Liverpool Grammar Schools 11 Plus (11+) Exam Information

There are six grammar schools in the Wirral region, and one in Liverpool (The Blue Coat School).

 

The 11 plus in Wirral is administered by the Wirral County Council for:

 

Calday Grange Grammar School

West Kirby Grammar School

Wirral Grammar School for Girls

Wirral Grammar School for Boys

 

and Upton Hall School administer their own tests. For more details about each individual school’s eleven plus exam and their admissions procedures, please visit the pages above.

 

11 Plus Exam Information for Wirral and Liverpool Grammar Schools

 

Registration Closing Date: May (Wirral), September (Liverpool)

Common Application Form (CAF) Closing Date: October

Exam Date: September

Exam Board Type: Wirral – CEM (University of Durham) | St. Anselm’s and The Blue Coat School – set by school | Upton Hall – GL Assessment

Results Date: October

Pass Mark: Upton Hall – 236 (subject to change), others not revealed

Allocations Date: March

Appeals Hearings: June

Admissions Info: Wirral County Council, 0151 606 2000 | Upton Hall School, 0151 677 7696 | Liverpool City Council, 0151 233 3006

 

Wirral and Liverpool Grammar Schools 11 Plus Admissions

 

Despite Wirral and Liverpool grammar schools using different admissions assessments, all Year 7 places at the schools are determined by pupil performance in the 11+ exam. Parents are advised to visit their preferred schools ahead of applying for a secondary school place in order to learn more about the admissions process. Each school also has detailed documentation about their admissions process available on their respective websites.

 

How to Register for the Wirral and Liverpool Grammar Schools 11 Plus Exam

 

To apply for a Year 7 place at one of the four Wirral grammar schools, where the exam administered by Wirral County Council, parents must register their child with the local authority (LA) before October. This can be done online.

 

Both St. Anselm’s College and Upton Hall School administer their own tests and so parents should register their child directly with their chosen school.

 

For The Blue Coat School in Liverpool, parents should register their child for the eleven plus exam via Liverpool City Council.

 

Parents are advised to consult their chosen school’s website directly to ensure they fully understand the 11+ registration process.

 

Wirral and Liverpool Grammar Schools 11 Plus Exam Format

 

For Wirral schools:

 

Pupils taking the 11 Plus test for Wirral grammar schools will be tested on verbal reasoning, non-verbal reasoning and mathematics. There are two tests, each lasting approximately 50 minutes.

 

For St. Anselm’s College:

 

Pupils will sit three tests that cover verbal reasoning, maths and English and a mental maths paper. The maths and English papers are both set by the school.

 

For Upton Hall School:

 

Students must sit two multiple choice verbal reasoning test, with each test lasting approximately 50 minutes.

 

For The Blue Coat School:

 

Students will sit three tests:

 

  1. Maths – 45 minutes long
  2. English – 50 minutes long
  3. Non-Verbal Reasoning – 20 minutes long

 

Parents will receive the results of their child’s 11+ exam online in October, with final Year 7 place allocations published in March.

 

Practice Papers for the Wirral and Liverpool Grammar Schools 11 Plus Exam

 

For those sitting the Wirral grammar school eleven plus exam, we recommend the following resources:

 

11+ CEM Short Numerical Reasoning

11+ CEM Long Numerical Reasoning

11+ CEM M.C. Numerical Reasoning

 

11+ CEM Verbal Reasoning

11+ Comprehension

11+ Cloze

11+ Spelling

 

As the Upton Hall School entrance exam focuses on verbal reasoning, we would specifically recommend:

 

11+ Verbal Reasoning: Pack 1 (GL)

11+ Verbal Reasoning: Pack 2 (GL)

11+ Verbal Reasoning: Pack 3 (GL)

 

For the St Anselm’s College 11+ exam, we would highly recommend the following practice papers:

 

11+ English Pack 1 (Open Answer)

11+ English Pack 2 (Open Answer)

 

11+ Maths Pack 1 (Open Answer)

11+ Maths Pack 2 (Open Answer)

 

11+ Verbal Reasoning: Pack 1

11+ Verbal Reasoning: Pack 2

11+ Verbal Reasoning: Pack 3

 

For The Blue Coat’s School 11 Plus entrance exam, pupils will benefit from the following practice resources:

 

11+ Maths Pack 1 (GL)

11+ Maths Pack 2 (GL)

11+ Maths Pack 3 (GL)

11+ Maths: Problem Solving (GL)

 

11 Plus English Pack 1 (Open Answer)

11 Plus English Pack 2 (Open Answer)

11 Plus English Pack 3 (Open Answer)

11 Plus Spelling Pack 1 (Open Answer)

11 Plus Spelling Pack 2 (Open Answer)

 

 

11+ Non-Verbal Reasoning Pack 1 (GL)

 

The information provided about Wirral and Liverpool grammar schools was believed to be correct at the time of publishing. However, please be aware of future changes. We advise you to contact the schools directly if you are unsure of anything. Contact details are provided within individual school posts.

11+, Grammar Schools

Screenshot of the St. Anselm's College school website

Founded in 1933, St Anselm’s College is a Roman Catholic all-boys’ grammar school based in Birkenhead, Merseyside. The school currently teaches over 900 pupils aged between 11 and 18 and has had academy status since 2011.

 

St. Anselm’s provides a broad and balanced curriculum and has built on its background as a technology college to prepare its pupils for modern life. Away from academia, the College values pupil participation in a range of sporting and extracurricular pursuits, enabling students to develop their talents.

 

For an insight into life at St. Anselm’s College, watch this short promotional video:

 

 

11 Plus Exam Information for St. Anselm’s College

 

Address: St Anselm’s College, Manor Hill, Birkenhead, Merseyside, CH43 1UQ

County: Merseyside

Admissions Info: info@st-anselms.com, 0151 652 1408

School Type: Boys’ Grammar

Number of pupils: 907

Number of Places in Year 7: 140

Open Day Date: June, September

Exam Date: September

Exam Board Type: Set by School

 

St. Anselm’s College 11 Plus Admissions

 

St. Anselm’s administers its own entrance test for its 140 Year 7 places and admission is based on student performance in this eleven plus exam.

 

Competition for Year 7 places at the school is high, with over eight applications for every Year 7 place. In cases where the school is oversubscribed, the following admissions criteria are used, giving priority to:

 

  1. Baptised Catholic boys, living in the relevant area (defined as Wirral, Cheshire West and Chester and any other areas within 5 miles of the College).
  2. Baptised Christian, non-Catholic boys, living in the relevant area.
  3. Non-Catholic boys whose parents wish them to have a Catholic education.

 

The school’s full admissions policy can be downloaded directly from their website.

 

How to Apply for 11 Plus Entry to St. Anselm’s College

 

To apply for a place at St. Anselm’s College, parents must complete two documents. The first, St. Anselm’s College’s Registration Form, can be found on the school’s website when registration opens. This form must be completed and returned to the school, along with a copy of the student’s baptismal certificate, if applicable.

 

Secondly, parents must complete a Parental Preference Form from Wirral Local Authority. Parents will receive 11+ test results in October and Year 7 places will be allocated in March of the following year.

 

St. Anselm’s College 11 Plus Exam Format

 

The 11 Plus exam for St. Anselm’s College consists of three tests that cover:

 

  1. Verbal Reasoning
  2. Maths – 45 minutes, standard format
  3. English – 45 minutes, including comprehension with open answer questions

 

How to Prepare for the St. Anselm’s College 11 Plus Exam?

 

Eleven plus exam dates are set well in advance, which allows students plenty of time to prepare for the tests. The key to preparing well for the exam is to start revision early. Before students begin their revision, we recommend that parents read our 11 Plus guide for parents.

 

Competition for Year 7 places at St. Anselm’s College is high, so we recommend that students use practice exam papers as part of their study routine. These papers allow children to get a better idea of the 11+ exam layout and the types of questions they may be asked on the day. They also help parents identify any weaker areas that may need improving.

 

For students taking the St. Anselm’s College eleven plus exam, we highly recommend the following resources:

 

11 Plus Verbal Reasoning Pack 1

11 Plus Verbal Reasoning Pack 2

11 Plus Verbal Reasoning Pack 3

 

11 Plus English Pack 1

11 Plus English Pack 2

11 Plus English Pack 3

11 Plus English: Spelling

11 Plus English Pack 1 (Open Answer)

11 Plus English Pack 2 (Open Answer)

 

11 Plus Maths Pack 1

11 Plus Maths Pack 2

11 Plus Maths Pack 3

11 Plus Maths: Problem Solving

11 Plus Mathematics Pack 1 (Open Answer)

11 Plus Mathematics Pack 2 (Open Answer)

 

The information provided about St. Anselm’s College was believed to be correct at the time of publishing. However, please be aware of future changes. We advise you to contact the school directly if you are unsure of anything. School contact details are provided within the post.

11+, Grammar Schools

Branded image for Redbridge, Essex Grammar Schools 11 Plus (11+) Exam Information

There are two grammar schools in the London Borough of Redbridge, Essex. For more detailed information about each school’s 11 Plus exam and their admissions process, please visit the pages below:

 

Ilford County High School

Woodford County High School for Girls

 

11 Plus Exam Information for Redbridge Grammar Schools

 

Registration Closing Date: June

Common Application Form (CAF) Closing Date: October

Exam Date: September

Exam Board Type: CEM (University of Durham)

Results Date: October

Pass Mark: Varies

Allocations Date: March

Appeals Hearings: April, May

Admissions Info: London Borough of Redbridge, 0208 554 5000

 

Redbridge Grammar Schools 11 Plus Admissions

 

All Year 7 places at Redbridge grammar schools are allocated based on pupil performance in the eleven plus entrance exam. Both schools in the region have limited places and are consistently oversubscribed. Before applying for a Year 7 place, parents are advised to visit their chosen school at one of their open events in order to better understand the school’s structure and curriculum.

 

Year 7 admissions to Redbridge grammar schools are managed by the local authority (LA), the London Borough of Redbridge (LBR), and parents must register online with LBR ahead of their child’s 11+ exam date in September.

 

How to Register for the Redbridge Grammar Schools 11 Plus Exam

 

To apply for a Year 7 place at a Redbridge grammar school, parents must register their child for the 11 Plus before the closing date via the LBR’s website.

 

LBR does not accept any late applications, even under exceptional circumstances, and there is no waiting list either.

 

Redbridge Grammar Schools 11 Plus Exam Format

 

The Redbridge 11+ exam covers verbal reasoning, non-verbal reasoning and numerical reasoning. The test is multiple choice and results are fully standardised and age weighted.

 

Practice Papers for the Redbridge Grammar Schools 11 Plus Exam

 

Practice exam papers will provide students with a good understanding of what type of test questions to expect from the Redbridge 11 Plus exam.

 

To maximise your child’s chances of gaining a place at their chosen Redbridge grammar school, we would highly recommend that students use the following resources:

 

 

 

The information provided about Redbridge grammar schools was believed to be correct at the time of publishing. However, please be aware of future changes. We advise you to contact the schools directly if you are unsure of anything. Contact details are provided within individual school posts.

 

11+, Grammar Schools

Branded image for Dorset Grammar Schools 11 Plus (11+) Exam Information

There are currently four grammar schools in the region of Dorset, with two based in Bournemouth and two in Poole. For specific eleven plus and admissions information for each school, please click on the links below:

 

Bournemouth School

Bournemouth School for Girls

Parkstone Grammar School

Poole Grammar School

 

11 Plus Exam Information for Dorset Grammar Schools

 

Registration Closing Date: September

Common Application Form (CAF) Closing Date: October

Exam Date:  September

Exam Board Type: GL Assessment

Results Date: October

Pass Mark: Scores are standardised; pass mark is not released

Allocations Date: March

Appeals Hearings: April, May, June

Admissions Info: Bournemouth Borough Council, 01202 456222 or Borough of Poole, 01202 261936

 

Dorset Grammar Schools 11 Plus Admissions

 

All Year 7 places at Dorset grammar schools are determined by pupil performance in the 11 Plus exam. Before applying for a place, parents and prospective pupils should attend their preferred school’s open event in July. At these events, parents will have the opportunity to meet members of staff and current pupils and acquire more information about the admissions process.

 

The four grammar schools in Dorset share the same admissions process, although parents must apply to their own Local Authority (LA) in the first instance.

 

How to Register for the Dorset Grammar Schools 11 Plus Exam

 

Parents who wish to register their child to sit the Dorset 11+ entrance test must register with their preferred schools before the September deadline. Registration forms can be completed online via each school’s website. As all four grammar schools in Dorset share the same eleven plus test, children only need to sit one test and results will be shared with the other schools.

 

Dorset Grammar Schools 11 Plus Exam Format

 

The 11 Plus exam for Dorset grammar schools consists of three multiple choice tests that cover mathematics, English and verbal reasoning. Each test paper includes questions typical to the Key Stage 2 national curriculum and lasts around 50 minutes.

 

Parents will be notified of the test results in October and Year 7 places will be allocated in March.

 

Practice Papers for the Dorset Grammar Schools 11 Plus Exam

 

For pupils currently preparing for the Dorset entrance exam, we highly recommend the following resources, all of which are suitable for those taking the 11+ exam set by GL Assessment:

 

11+ Mathematics Pack 1

11+ Mathematics Pack 2

11+ Mathematics Pack 3

11+ Mathematics Problem Solving

 

11+ English Pack 1

11+ English Pack 2

11 + English Pack 3

11+ English Spelling

 

11+ Verbal Reasoning: Pack 1

11+ Verbal Reasoning: Pack 2

11 + Verbal Reasoning: Pack 3

 

The information provided about Dorset grammar schools was believed to be correct at the time of publishing. However, please be aware of future changes. We advise you to contact the schools directly if you are unsure of anything. Contact details are provided within individual school posts.

11+, Grammar Schools

Branded image for Devon Grammar Schools 11 Plus (11+) Exam Information

There are seven grammar schools in Devon, with three Local Authorities (LA) involved in admissions: Devon County Council, Plymouth and Torbay. Because there are several local authorities involved, 11 Plus admissions in Devon can seem quite confusing. We recommend reading these individual posts for specific schools to learn more about the eleven plus exams and general admissions process:

 

Colyton Grammar School (Devon LA)

Devonport High School for Boys (Plymouth LA)

Devonport High School for Girls (Plymouth LA)

Plymouth High School for Girls (Plymouth LA)

Churston Ferrers Grammar School (Torbay LA)

Torquay Boys’ Grammar School (Torbay LA)

Torquay Girls’ Grammar School (Torbay LA)

 

11 Plus Exam Information for Devon Grammar Schools

 

Registration Closing Date: August (Torbay LA), September (Devon LA and Plymouth LA)

Common Application Form (CAF) Closing Date: October

Exam Date: September

Exam Board Type: Devon and Torbay use CEM (University of Durham), Plymouth, uses GL Assessment

Results Date: October

Pass Mark: Not revealed

Allocations Date: March

Appeals Hearings: April, May, June

Admissions Info: Devon LA, 01752 307469 | Plymouth LA, 01752 668000 | Torbay LA, 01803 201201

 

Devon Grammar Schools 11 Plus Admissions

 

Application for admission to any Devon grammar school is made through the Local Authority directly. All prospective Year 7 pupils must take the 11 Plus exam in September before the year of entry.

 

Before applying for a place, parents and prospective students are encouraged to attend their preferred school’s open event, where they will receive more detailed information about the admissions process.

 

How to Register for the Devon Grammar Schools 11 Plus Exam

 

Registration forms for all grammar schools in Devon are available to download from each of the school’s own websites. You can register with the following LAs, depending on which schools you are applying for:

Devon County Council
Plymouth LA
Torbay Council

 

As parents could be applying to various schools across the county, they are advised to visit each school’s website and consult their admissions documents individually, as registration dates can vary from school to school.

 

Devon Grammar Schools 11 Plus Exam Format

 

As you might expect, 11+ tests at the region’s grammar schools vary. All seven schools set both English and mathematics papers, with schools in Devon and Torbay opting to assess verbal reasoning and non-verbal reasoning too. Devon and Torbay schools also include a short writing assessment.

 

Children should expect to answer a range of question types, including multiple-choice, short answer questions and even extended creative writing. Please refer to the individual school posts above for more detail on specific 11 Plus exam formats in the Devon grammar schools.

 

Practice Papers for the Devon Grammar Schools 11 Plus Exam

 

For pupils currently preparing for the Devon 11 Plus exam, we’d recommend the following resources:

 

For Devon and Torbay Grammar Schools:

 

11+ CEM Cloze

11+ CEM Comprehension

11+ Spelling

 

11+ CEM Short Numerical Reasoning

11+ CEM Long Numerical Reasoning

11+ CEM Multiple Choice Numerical Reasoning

11+ CEM Verbal Reasoning

 

For Plymouth Grammar Schools:

 

11+ GL English Pack 1

11+ GL English Pack 2

11+ GL English Pack 3

11+ Spelling

 

11+ GL Maths Pack 1

11+ GL Maths Pack 2

11+ GL Maths Pack 3

11+ GL Maths: Problem Solving

 

The information provided about grammar schools in Devon was believed to be correct at the time of publishing. However, please be aware of future changes. We advise you to contact the schools directly if you are unsure of anything. Contact details are provided within individual school posts.

11+, Grammar Schools

Branded image for Bromley Grammar Schools 11 Plus (11+) Exam Information

There are currently two grammar schools located in the London Borough of Bromley. For more information about the 11 Plus entrance exam at either of these schools, or for details on the admissions process, please consult the articles below:

 

Newstead Wood School

St. Olave’s Grammar School

 

11 Plus Exam Information for Bromley Grammar Schools

 

Registration Closing Date: June (Newstead Wood), July (St. Olave’s)

Common Application Form (CAF) Closing Date: October

Exam Date: September

Exam Board Type: Newstead Wood – GL Assessment | St Olave’s – Selective Eligibility Test (SET), set by the school

Results Date: October

Pass Mark: Places allocated according to highest score (figures not revealed)

Allocations Date: March

Appeals Hearings: April, May, June

Admissions Info: The London Borough of Bromley, 0208 313 4044

 

Bromley Grammar Schools 11 Plus Admissions

 

Year 7 admission to both Bromley grammar schools is by academic selection, via an entrance exam. Due to oversubscription at the schools, parents and students are actively encouraged to attend an open event at their chosen school to ensure that it is the right learning environment.

 

Both schools participate in the coordinated admissions process operated by the London Borough of Bromley and so parents must register their child online ahead of the eleven plus exam dates in September.

 

How to Register for the Bromley Grammar Schools 11 Plus Exam

 

Although Newstead Wood and St Olave’s Grammar School use different entrance exams to determine Year 7 admission, both follow the London Borough of Bromley’s registration process. Parents must complete the Local Authority’s (LA) online application form, marking their preferred school.

 

Next, parents should download their preferred school’s Supplementary Information Form (SIF), which registers their child to sit the entrance exam. The SIF is available via the schools’ websites and must be submitted directly to the school before the public deadline.

 

Bromley Grammar Schools 11 Plus Exam Format

 

The grammar schools in Bromley use different 11 Plus exams. We’ve outlined their formats in more detail below:

 

Newstead Wood School

 

Prospective pupils will sit two tests that cover Verbal Reasoning and Non-Verbal Reasoning. Both these tests are multiple-choice and take between 40-50 minutes each. The scores achieved by girls in these tests will be age adjusted and placed in ranked order based on the total score achieved.

 

St Olave’s Grammar School

 

St. Olave’s operate a two-stage process for their 11 Plus:

 

Stage 1

 

Boys must sit the Selective Eligibility Test (SET); this is a multiple-choice test that covers English comprehension, mathematics, verbal and non-verbal reasoning questions.

 

Stage 2

 

Boys who pass the SET will be invited to sit the school’s second stage tests in English and mathematics.

 

For both schools, parents will receive the results of their child’s eleven plus exam in October and Year 7 places will be allocated in March of the following year.

 

Practice Papers for the Bromley Grammar Schools 11 Plus Exam

 

For girls due to sit the Newstead Wood School 11 Plus exam, we would specifically recommend the following resources:

 

11 Plus Verbal Reasoning Pack 1 (GL)

11 Plus Verbal Reasoning Pack 2 (GL)

11 Plus Verbal Reasoning Pack 3 (GL)

 

11 Plus Non-Verbal Reasoning Pack 1 (GL)

 

For boys preparing for the St. Olave’s Grammar School entrance test, we would recommend the resources below, which are relevant for both stages of the exam:

 

11 Plus English Grammar Schools Pack 1

11 Plus English Grammar Schools Pack 2

11 Plus English Grammar School Pack 3

11 Plus English: Spelling

 

11 Plus Maths Grammar Schools Pack 1

11 Plus Maths Grammar Schools Pack 2

11 Plus Maths Grammar Schools Pack 3

11 Plus Maths: Problem Solving Grammar Schools

11 Plus Maths (Open Answer)

11 Plus Maths (Open Answer)

 

11 Plus Verbal Reasoning Grammar Schools Pack 1

11 Plus Verbal Reasoning Grammar Schools Pack 2

11 Plus Verbal Reasoning Grammar Schools Pack 3

 

11 Plus Non-Verbal Reasoning Grammar Schools Pack 1

 

The information provided about the Bromley grammar schools was believed to be correct at the time of publishing. However, please be aware of future changes. We advise you to contact the schools directly if you are unsure of anything. Contact details are provided within individual school posts.

 

11+, Grammar Schools

Branded image for Berkshire Grammar Schools 11 Plus (11+) Exam Information

There are currently six grammar schools in Berkshire, with four based in Slough. Read our guide to the Slough Grammar School Consortium for more details on the 11 Plus exam in that region.

 

The two remaining schools are based in Berkshire itself. For 11+ exam details and admissions information for each of these schools, please click on the links below:

 

Kendrick School

Reading School for Boys

 

11 Plus Exam Information for Berkshire Grammar Schools

 

Registration Closing Date: June

Common Application Form (CAF) Closing Date: October

Exam Date: September

Exam Board Type: CEM (University of Durham)

Results Date: October

Pass Mark: 108 – 114 (this varies and is subject to change)

Allocations Date: March

Appeals Hearings: April, May, June

Admissions Info: admin@kendrick.reading.sch.uk, 0118 901 5859 | secretary@reading-school-co.uk, 0118 901 5600

 

Berkshire Grammar Schools 11 Plus Admissions

 

Year 7 admission to both grammar schools in Berkshire is determined by pupil performance in the 11 Plus exam. If you are considering either of these schools as an option, you are advised to attend an open day, which usually take place in the summer term. At these events, parents can take a tour of the school, ask questions to school staff members and have the opportunity to learn more about the school’s curriculum.

 

How to Register for the Berkshire Grammar Schools 11 Plus Exam

 

The Berkshire grammar schools use the same 11+ entrance exam as the Slough Consortium schools. If applying to more than one school, students must be registered with each school by June, in accordance with each school’s admissions policy.

 

Scores from the 11+ exam can only be shared with the schools for which a child is registered, so parents must ensure registration is complete for all preferred schools before the deadline. Registration forms can be found on the schools’ websites.

 

Parents must complete a Common Application Form (CAF) by October, which can be downloaded from the Local Authority website.

 

Berkshire Grammar Schools 11 Plus Exam Format

 

The Berkshire 11 Plus exam consists of two papers that last approximately 50 minutes each. Both grammar schools in Berkshire use the same test papers, which assess a child’s Verbal Reasoning, Non-Verbal Reasoning and Numerical Reasoning skills. Throughout these tests, children will be required to show competence in KS2 English and maths.

 

Parents will receive the results of their child’s eleven plus exam in October. Results will be available online and the final Year 7 place allocations will be published in March.

 

Practice Papers for the Berkshire Grammar Schools 11 Plus Exam

 

For children preparing for the Berkshire 11+ exam, we’d highly recommend the following resources to maximise their chances of success:

 

11+ Short Numerical Reasoning (CEM)

11+ Long Numerical Reasoning

11+ Multiple-Choice Numerical Reasoning

 

11+ Verbal Reasoning (CEM)

11+ Comprehension (CEM)

11+ Cloze (CEM)

11+ CEM Spelling (CEM)

 

The information provided about the Berkshire Grammar Schools was believed to be correct at the time of publishing. However, please be aware of future changes. We advise you to contact the schools directly if you are unsure of anything. Contact details are provided within individual school posts.

 

 

11+, Grammar Schools

Branded image for Bexley Grammar Schools 11 Plus (11+) Exam Information

There are four grammar schools in the London Borough of Bexley. For more information on the 11 Plus exam at each of these schools and for guidance on their admissions process, please click on the links below:

 

Bexley Grammar School

Beths Grammar School

Chislehurst & Sidcup Grammar School

Townley Grammar School

 

11 Plus Exam Information for Bexley Grammar Schools

 

Registration Closing Date: July

Common Application Form (CAF) Closing Date: October

Exam Date: September

Exam Board Type: CEM (University of Durham)

Results Date: October

Pass Mark: 216 (subject to change)

Allocations Date: March

Appeals Hearings: April, May

Admissions Info: London Borough of Bexley, 0208 303 7777

 

Bexley Grammar Schools 11 Plus Admissions

 

All four grammar schools adhere to the Bexley Coordinated Secondary School Admissions Scheme. Only children who pass the Bexley entrance test can be considered for admission in Year 7. However, parents should be aware that achieving the necessary pass mark in the 11+ exam isn’t a guarantee of a Year 7 place at a Bexley grammar school.

 

Parents and prospective students are invited to attend an open event at their preferred school, which usually takes place in October. These events give parents and students the opportunity to tour the school, meet members of staff and talk to current pupils.

 

To be considered for a Year 7 place at a Bexley grammar school, parents must register their child for the eleven plus exam, which takes place in September.

 

How to Register for the Bexley Grammar Schools 11 Plus Exam

 

To apply for a Year 7 place at a Bexley grammar school, parents must complete an online application form via their Local Authority (LA). Parents are advised to contact the LA directly with any specific admission questions, rather than contacting the schools themselves. Contact details for the LA can be found above.

 

Bexley Grammar Schools 11 Plus Exam Format

 

The Bexley grammar school eleven plus exam consists of two test papers, each lasting around 50 minutes. The two tests cover the following subjects:

  • Verbal reasoning (including some literacy)
  • Numerical reasoning (maths)
  • Non-verbal reasoning

 

The papers are divided into timed sections and most questions are multiple-choice. Children will have a short break between the two test papers.

 

Practice Papers for the Bexley Grammar Schools 11 Plus Exam

 

The resources below will prove useful for children currently preparing for the Bexley grammar school eleven plus exam:

 

11 Plus Verbal Reasoning (CEM)

11 Plus Comprehension (CEM)

11 Plus Cloze (CEM)

11 Plus Spelling (CEM)

 

11 Plus Short Numerical Reasoning (CEM)

11 Plus Long Numerical Reasoning (CEM)

11 Plus Multiple Choice Numerical Reasoning (CEM)

 

The information provided about the Bexley Grammar Schools was believed to be correct at the time of publishing. However, please be aware of future changes. We advise you to contact the schools directly if you are unsure of anything. Contact details are provided within individual school posts.

11+, Grammar Schools

Branded image for the Lincolnshire Consortium of Grammar Schools 11 Plus (11+) Exam

There are 15 grammar schools in the Lincolnshire Grammar School Consortium at present. For 11 Plus and admissions information about each specific school, please visit the pages below:

 

Boston Grammar School

Boston High School

Bourne Grammar School

Carre’s Grammar School

Kesteven and Grantham Girls’ School

Kesteven and Sleaford High School Selective Academy

King Edward VI Grammar School

King Edward VI Academy

Queen Elizabeth’s Grammar School, Alford

Queen Elizabeth’s Grammar School, Horncastle

Queen Elizabeth’s High School

Skegness Grammar School

Spalding Grammar School

Spalding High School

The King’s School Grantham

 

11 Plus Exam Information for Lincolnshire Grammar Schools

 

Registration Closing Date: March

Common Application Form (CAF) Closing Date: October

Exam Date: September

Exam Board Type: GL Assessment

Results Date: October

Pass Mark: 220 (subject to change)

Allocations Date: March

Appeals Hearings: April, May, June

Admissions Info: Lincolnshire County Council, 01522 552 222

 

Lincolnshire Grammar Schools 11 Plus Admissions

 

Year 7 admission to all of the grammar schools in Lincolnshire are subject to pupil performance in the 11+ exam. When a child is in year 5 or 6, parents will have the opportunity to attend their preferred schools’ open events, which include a tour of the school and talks by senior members of staff.

 

Each of the Lincolnshire grammar schools fully comply with Lincolnshire County Council’s coordinated admission arrangement for Year 7 and are part of the Lincolnshire Grammar Schools’ Consortium.

 

How to Register for the Lincolnshire Grammar Schools 11 Plus Exam

 

To apply for a Year 7 place at one of the grammar schools in Lincolnshire, parents should visit their Local Authority (LA) website to register their interest before the March closing date. To book a place for the 11 Plus exam, parents should also complete a registration form on one of the grammar schools’ websites.

 

Lincolnshire Grammar Schools 11 Plus Exam Format

 

The eleven plus test for the Lincolnshire grammar schools consists of two multiple-choice papers that test children’s Verbal (about 50 minutes) and Non-Verbal (about 40 minutes) Reasoning skills. The Non-Verbal test also assesses Spatial Reasoning.

 

Following the exam, parents should receive the results from the LA in October, ahead of the deadline for returning the CAF. In March of the following year, the LA will send out place offers based on the preferences submitted on the application form.

 

Practice Papers for the Lincolnshire Grammar Schools 11 Plus Exam

 

Practice tests can help your child to prepare for the Lincolnshire grammar schools 11+ exams. We would highly recommend the following packs:

 

11 Plus Verbal Reasoning Pack 1

11 Plus Verbal Reasoning Pack 2

11 Plus Verbal Reasoning Pack 3

 

11 Plus Non-Verbal Reasoning Pack 1

 

The information provided about the Lincolnshire Grammar School Consortium was believed to be correct at the time of publishing. However, please be aware of future changes. We advise you to contact the schools directly if you are unsure of anything. Contact details are provided within individual school posts.

 

 

 

11+, Grammar Schools

Branded image for the Trafford Grammar Schools Consortium 11 Plus (11+) Exam Information

Since 2016, there have been four schools within the Trafford Grammar Schools Consortium. Read the linked articles below for 11+ information and admissions details about each school specifically:

 

Altrincham Grammar School for Girls

Sale Grammar School

Stretford Grammar School

Urmston Grammar School

 

The following schools are not part of the Trafford Consortium but still use the 11 Plus exam. You can find more details on these schools using the links below:

 

Altrincham School for Boys

Loreto Grammar School

St Ambrose College

 

11 Plus Exam Information for Trafford Grammar Schools

 

Registration Closing Date: June

Common Application Form (CAF) Closing Date: October

Exam Date: September

Exam Board Type: CEM (University of Durham)

Results Date: October

Pass Mark: 334 (subject to change)

Allocations Date: March

Appeals Hearings: April, May, June

Admissions Info: school.admissions@trafford.gov.uk, 0161 912 5007

 

Trafford Grammar Schools 11 Plus Admissions

 

Year 7 admission to any of the four grammar schools in Trafford is determined by pupil performance in the 11 Plus exam. Each of the schools hosts an open event annually in June. At the event, students and parents have the opportunity to tour the school and learn more about their approaches to learning.

 

While all four schools are part of Trafford Grammar Schools CEM Consortium, they are each responsible for their own admissions into Year 7. Each of the schools within the Consortium use the same 11+ test.

 

How to Register for the Trafford Grammar Schools 11 Plus Exam

 

To apply for a place at one of Trafford’s grammar schools, parents must register their child for the 11 Plus entrance examination. Online forms are available on each school’s admissions page when registration is open.

 

In addition to completing the registration form, parents also need to complete a Local Authority Common Preference Form. Parents should list the schools in ranked order of preference.

 

Trafford Grammar Schools 11 Plus Exam Format

 

The Trafford 11+ exam consists of two test papers that cover Verbal Reasoning, Non-Verbal Reasoning and Numerical Reasoning. Each paper lasts approximately one hour and contains a mix of multiple choice and standard format questions.

 

Once the test has been taken, parents will receive the results of their child’s eleven plus exam in October, with final Year 7 place allocations published in March.

 

Practice Papers for the Trafford Grammar Schools 11 Plus Exam

 

For students currently studying for the Trafford 11+ exam, we would highly recommend using the following resources to prepare for the CEM 11 plus test:

 

11 Plus Verbal Reasoning (CEM)

 

11 Plus Comprehension (CEM)

11 Plus Cloze (CEM)

11 Plus Spelling Pack 1 (CEM)

11 Plus Spelling Pack 2 (CEM)

 

11 Plus Short Numerical Reasoning (CEM)

11 Plus Long Numerical Reasoning (CEM)

11 Plus M.C. Numerical Reasoning (CEM)

 

The information provided about the Trafford Grammar School Consortium was believed to be correct at the time of publishing. However, please be aware of future changes. We advise you to contact the schools directly if you are unsure of anything. Contact details are provided within individual school posts.

 

 

11+, Grammar Schools

Branded image for Buckinghamshire Grammar School Consortium 11 Plus (11+) Exam

There are currently 13 grammar schools in Buckinghamshire. For eleven plus and admissions information about each specific school, please visit the pages below:

 

Aylesbury Grammar School

Aylesbury High School

Beaconsfield High School

Burnham Grammar School

Chesham Grammar School

Dr. Challoner’s Grammar School

Dr. Challoners High School

John Hampden Grammar School

Royal Grammar School

The Royal Latin School

Sir Henry Floyd Grammar School

Sir William Borlase School

Wycombe High School

 

11 Plus Exam Information for Buckinghamshire Grammar Schools

 

Registration Closing Date: June (for those outside of the county)

Common Application Form (CAF) Closing Date: October

Exam Date: September

Exam Board Type: GL Assessment

Results Date: October

Pass Mark: 121 qualifying score (subject to change)

Allocations Date: March

Appeals Hearings: April, May, June

Admissions Info: Buckinghamshire County Council, 01296 395000

 

Buckinghamshire Grammar Schools 11 Plus Admissions

 

From 2018, admission to Buckinghamshire grammar schools in Year 7 is determined by student performance in the 11 plus Secondary Transfer Test, which aims to select students based on academic ability. Admission into Year 7 at all schools is managed by Buckinghamshire County Council.

 

Each of the Buckinghamshire grammar schools host a range of open events, often in the summer term, which give prospective pupils and parents the opportunity to take a tour of the school campus, meet senior staff and current pupils.

 

How to Register for the Buckinghamshire Grammar Schools 11 Plus Exam

 

Pupils who currently attend a primary school in Buckinghamshire are automatically registered to take the county’s 11 plus Secondary Transfer Test. However, parents must complete and return a Supplementary Information Form. These are available to download via any of the schools’ websites.

 

Students who live outside of Buckinghamshire but wish to attend a school in the county from Year 7 must register using the Bucks online application portal.

 

Buckinghamshire Grammar Schools 11 Plus Exam Format

 

From 2019, the exam board for the 11+ test in Buckinghamshire is GL Assessment. The Buckinghamshire Secondary Transfer Test is split into two papers that test:

 

  1. Comprehension, technical English and verbal reasoning
  2. Non-verbal reasoning, spatial reasoning and mathematics

 

Each test paper lasts for approximately 45 minutes and all questions are multiple-choice. The 11+ Secondary Transfer Test is weighted as follows:

 

  • Verbal skills section – 50%
  • Non-verbal section – 25%
  • Mathematics section – 25%

 

Parents will receive online results of their child’s eleven plus exam in October, with final Year 7 places published in March.

 

Practice Papers for the Buckinghamshire Grammar Schools 11 Plus Exam

 

 

Full-length practice tests specifically designed for the Bucks 11 plus exam:

11+ Buckinghamshire Practice Test 1
11+ Buckinghamshire Practice Test 2
11+ Buckinghamshire Practice Test 3
11+ Buckinghamshire Practice Test 4
11+ Buckinghamshire Practice Test 5

 

Subject and skill-specific practice relevant for the Bucks 11 plus exam:

11+ Verbal Reasoning Pack 1

11+ Verbal Reasoning Pack 2

11+ Verbal Reasoning Pack 3

 

11+ Non-Verbal Reasoning Pack 1

 

11+ English Grammar Schools Pack 1

11+ English Grammar Schools Pack 2

11+ English Grammar School Pack 3

11+ English: Spelling Pack 1

11+ English: Spelling Pack 2

11+ English: Punctuation

 

11+ Maths Grammar Schools Pack 1

11+ Maths Grammar Schools Pack 2

11+ Maths Grammar Schools Pack 3

11+ Maths: Problem Solving Grammar Schools

 

 

 

The information provided about the Buckinghamshire Grammar School Consortium was believed to be correct at the time of publishing. However, please be aware of future changes. We advise you to contact the schools directly if you are unsure of anything. Contact details are provided within individual school posts.

 

11+, Grammar Schools

Barnet & Enfield, Hertfordshire Grammar Schools 11 Plus Exam

There are currently two grammar schools in Barnet and one in Enfield. For specific 11 Plus and admissions information about each school, please click on the links below:

 

Henrietta Barnett School (Barnet)

Queen Elizabeth’s School (Barnet)

The Latymer School (Enfield)

 

11 Plus Exam Information for Hertfordshire (Barnet and Enfield) Grammar Schools

 

Registration Closing Date: July

Common Application Form (CAF) Closing Date: October

Exam Date: September

Exam Board Type: Henrietta Barnett School – CEM (University of Durham) | Queen Elizabeth’s School and The Latymer School – GL Assessment

Results Date: October

Pass Mark: Barnet – not revealed | Enfield – 210 (subject to change)

Allocations Date: March

Appeals Hearings: April, May, June

Admissions Info: Barnet Local Authority, 0208 359 7651 | Enfield Council, 0208 379 1000

 

Hertfordshire (Barnet and Enfield) Grammar Schools 11 Plus Admissions

 

Hertfordshire grammar schools in Barnet and Enfield use different assessment providers but nevertheless, all Year 7 places are determined by pupil performance in the 11+ exams.

Each grammar school in the area is significantly oversubscribed and so parents are encouraged to attend their preferred schools’ open events ahead of applying for a place.

 

Parents must apply to their local authority (LA) ahead of the eleven plus exam date. For students in Barnet, parents can apply directly to Barnet Local Authority, while those in Enfield should apply to Enfield Council only.  

 

How to Register for the Hertfordshire (Barnet and Enfield) Grammar Schools 11 Plus Exam

 

To apply for a place in Year 7 at either a Barnet or Enfield grammar school, parents must register their child with their LA. Both LAs require parents to complete both a Common Application Form (CAF) and an entrance test entry form for their preferred school. Both forms can be completed online and must be sent on time, as late applications are not accepted.

 

Hertfordshire (Barnet and Enfield) Grammar Schools 11 Plus Exam Format

 

As stated above, Barnet and Enfield grammar schools use different eleven plus exams. Below we have outlined the test format used by each school:

 

Henrietta Barnett School

 

This test consists of two rounds, with the first-round testing verbal reasoning and numerical reasoning. The test lasts for approximately 70 minutes. The top 300 students from round one will be invited back to sit the second exam.

 

This second test consists of English (comprehension and creative writing) and problem-solving maths questions.

 

Queen Elizabeth’s School

 

The eleven plus entrance exam at Queen Elizabeth’s Barnet consists of two multiple choice test papers, covering English and mathematics. Both papers are taken by candidates in the same session.

 

The Latymer School

 

This 11+ test consists of two tests;

Test 1 is a multiple-choice mathematics and verbal reasoning test that last 50 minutes.

Test 2 is an open-answer English test. Overall, this test lasts one hour and is split into two sections that test reading comprehension and creative writing.

 

Practice Papers for the Hertfordshire (Barnet and Enfield) Grammar Schools 11 Plus Exam

 

For the Henrietta Barnet 11 plus exam, we would recommend the following resources:

 

Round 1

 

11 Plus Maths: Short Numerical Reasoning (CEM) Pack 1

11 Plus Maths: Long Numerical Reasoning (CEM) Pack 1

11 Plus Maths: Multiple Choice Reasoning (CEM) Pack 1

11 Plus Verbal Reasoning (CEM) Pack 1

11 Plus Verbal Reasoning (CEM) Synonyms and Antonyms

11 Plus Comprehension (Verbal Reasoning CEM) Pack 1 (fiction)

11 Plus Comprehension (Verbal Reasoning CEM) Pack 2 (non-fiction)

11 Plus Cloze (Verbal Reasoning CEM) Pack 1

 

Round 2

 

11 Plus Mathematics Pack 1 (Open Answer)

11 Plus Mathematics Pack 2 (Open Answer)

11 Plus Mathematics Pack 3 (Open Answer)

11 Plus Mental Arithmetic (Open Answer)

 

11 Plus English Pack 1 (Open Answer)

11 Plus English Pack 2 (Open Answer)

11 Plus English Pack 3 (Open Answer)

11 Plus Spelling Pack 1 (Open Answer)

11 Plus Spelling Pack 1 (Open Answer)

 

 

For the Queen Elizabeth School for Boys 11 plus exam, we would recommend the following resources:

 

 

 

 

For The Latymer School 11 plus exam, we would recommend the following resources:

 

Test 1

 

 

 

Test 2

 

11 Plus English Pack 1 (Open Answer)

11 Plus English Pack 2 (Open Answer)

11 Plus English Pack 3 (Open Answer)

11 Plus Spelling Pack 1 (Open Answer)

11 Plus Spelling Pack 1 (Open Answer)

 

 

The information provided about Hertfordshire (Barnet and Enfield) grammar schools was believed to be correct at the time of publishing. However, please be aware of future changes. We advise you to contact the schools directly if you are unsure of anything. Contact details are provided within individual school posts.

 

 

11+, Grammar Schools

Medway Grammar Schools 11 Plus (11+) Exam Information

There are six grammar schools in the Medway region. For eleven plus information and specific details about each school’s admissions process, we suggest reading the articles below:

 

Chatham Grammar School for Girls

Fort Pitt Grammar School

Holcombe Grammar School for Boys

Rainham Mark Grammar School

Sir Joseph Williamson’s Mathematical School

The Rochester Grammar School

 

11 Plus Exam Information for Medway Grammar Schools

 

Registration Closing Date: June

Common Application Form (CAF) Closing Date: October

Exam Date: September

Exam Board Type: CEM

Results Date: October

Pass Mark: Varies each year

Allocations Date: March

Appeals Hearings: April, May, June

Admissions Info: Medway Council, 01634 331110

 

Medway Grammar Schools 11 Plus Admissions

 

Year 7 places for Medway grammar schools are determined by pupil performance in the eleven plus exam. Prior to applying for a place, parents are advised to attend their preferred schools’ open event to get more information about the admissions process.

 

Schools within the Medway local authority use different allocation criteria for Year 7 places, so parents are advised to confirm the criteria of their preferred school(s) directly before completing the Common Application Form (CAF).

 

How to Register for the Medway Grammar Schools 11 Plus Exam

 

To apply for a Year 7 place at any of the Medway grammar schools, parents must complete a Common Application Form (CAF), as administered by the Medway local authority. All primary schools within the Medway area will receive booklets entitled ‘Admission to Secondary School: A Guide for Parents’ to distribute, which explains more about the registration process.

 

Alternatively, parents can call the admissions team at Medway Council on 01634 331110 with any Year 7 application questions. Parents are advised to contact their local authority, rather than individual schools, with 11+ registration questions.

 

Medway Grammar Schools 11 Plus Exam Format

 

The eleven plus exam for Medway grammar schools test verbal reasoning, maths and English. Both the verbal reasoning and maths tests are multiple choice and last around 50 minutes each. The English test usually takes the form of an essay and lasts 50 minutes, which includes 10 minutes of planning time.

 

In previous years, the maths and English sections have been double-weighted, compared with verbal reasoning. This means that the maths and writing scores are given twice the importance of the verbal reasoning score.

 

Practice Papers for the Medway Grammar Schools 11 Plus Exam

 

At Exam Papers Plus, we would advise that students use 11+ practice papers under timed conditions so that they are used to answering questions quickly and under pressure.

 

For students currently preparing for the Medway grammar schools eleven plus exam, we would highly recommend the following resources:

 

11 Plus Maths: Short Numerical Reasoning (CEM) Pack 1  

11 Plus Maths: Long Numerical Reasoning (CEM) Pack 1

11 Plus Maths: Multiple Choice Reasoning (CEM) Pack 1

 

11 Plus Verbal Reasoning (CEM) Pack 1

11 Plus Comprehension (Verbal Reasoning CEM) Pack 1

11 Plus Cloze (Verbal Reasoning CEM) Pack 1

11 Plus Spelling

 

The information provided about Medway grammar schools was believed to be correct at the time of publishing. However, please be aware of future changes. We advise you to contact the schools directly if you are unsure of anything. Contact details are provided within individual school posts.

 

 

 

11+, Grammar Schools

Surrey Grammar Schools 11 Plus (11+) Exam Information

The selective schools in Surrey are divided between two areas of the county: Kingston-upon-Thames and Sutton. Please refer to the specific articles below for information about each school’s 11 Plus admissions information.

 

The grammar schools in Kingston-upon-Thames are:

 

Tiffin School (for Boys)

Tiffin Girls’ School

 

The Sutton grammar schools are:

 

Nonsuch High School for Girls

Sutton Grammar School for Boys

Wallington County Grammar School

Wallington High School for Girls

Wilson’s School

 

11 Plus Exam Information for Surrey Grammar Schools

 

Registration Closing Date: August (Sutton), September (Kingston)

Common Application Form (CAF) Closing Date: October

Exam Date: September and October (Sutton), October and November (Kingston)

Results Date: October

Pass Mark: No set pass mark for Sutton schools, Kingston schools average 200 (subject to change)

Allocations Date: March

Appeals Hearings: May and June

Admissions Info: For Sutton schools: Sutton Council, 0208 7705000 | For Kingston schools: Kingston Upon Thames, 0208 5474610

 

Surrey Grammar Schools 11 Plus Admissions

 

All Sutton grammar schools use the Selective Eligibility Test (SET) to determine Year 7 place allocation. For some of the Sutton schools, the SET is the first stage in a two-step assessment process. The Kingston-upon-Thames grammar schools also use a two-stage entrance exam process to allocate places. As Surrey is one of the most competitive grammar school areas in the country, parents are always encouraged to visit their preferred school(s) ahead of applying for a Year 7 place.

 

All of Surrey’s Year 7 places are allocated via local authorities, whether that’s Sutton Council or Kingston Upon Thames. Parents should confirm their local authority (LA) and check more detailed admission criteria via their LA’s website.

 

How to Register for the Surrey Grammar Schools 11 Plus Exam

 

For Sutton grammar schools, parents can visit Sutton Council’s website, which provides direct links to the schools in the area, their admissions policies and how to register to take the SET.

 

For Kingston Schools, parents must complete a Supplementary Information Form (SIF), which is available on each of the school’s websites. Parents can also visit Kingston Upon Thames’s LA website for more details.

 

Surrey Grammar Schools 11 Plus Exam Format

 

The SET, used by all Sutton schools, consists of two multiple-choice tests that last 40-45 minutes each and focus on mathematics and English. Students who achieve the required standard at stage one will be asked, at some schools, to sit an extended English writing task for stage two.

 

Both the Kingston-Upon-Thames schools have a two-stage process that test students’ English skills and mathematical knowledge. The first round at both schools is multiple-choice. The second round is open-anser can involve written tasks such as story writing and mathematical problem solving.

 

Parents will receive the results of their child’s entrance exam online in October, and final Year 7 place allocations will be published in March.

 

Practice Papers for the Surrey Grammar Schools 11 Plus Exam

 

For pupils currently preparing for the SET at Sutton schools, we would recommend the following practice resources:

 

11 Plus Selective Eligibility Test Sutton Practice Test 1

11 Plus Selective Eligibility Test Sutton Practice Test 2

11 Plus Selective Eligibility Test Sutton Practice Test 3

11 Plus Selective Eligibility Test Sutton Practice Test 4

11 Plus Selective Eligibility Test Sutton Practice Test 5

 

And for further subject-specific practice:

 

11 Plus English Grammar Schools Pack 1

11 Plus English Grammar Schools Pack 2

11 Plus English Grammar School Pack 3

11 Plus English: Spelling Pack 1

11 Plus English: Spelling Pack 2

 

11 Plus Maths Grammar Schools Pack 1

11 Plus Maths Grammar Schools Pack 2

11 Plus Maths Grammar Schools Pack 3

11 Plus Maths: Problem Solving Grammar Schools

 

For Sutton schools that have a second round exam, we recommend the following:

 

11 Plus English 1 (Open answer)

11 Plus English 2 (Open answer)

11 Plus English 3 (Open answer)

 

11 Plus Maths 1 (Open answer)

11 Plus Maths 2 (Open answer)

11 Plus Maths 3 (Open answer)

 

For those studying for either of the Kingston-Upon-Thames grammar school entrance exams, we recommend the following:

 

Stage 1

 

11 Plus English Pack 1

11 Plus English Pack 2

11 Plus English Pack 3

11 Plus Spelling

11 Plus Verbal Reasoning (Pack 1)

11 Plus Comprehension (Pack 1)

11 Plus Cloze (Pack 1)

 

11 Plus Maths Pack 1

11 Plus Maths Pack 2

11 Plus Maths Pack 3

11 Plus Maths: Problem Solving

11 Plus Mathematics Short Numerical Reasoning

11 Plus Long Numerical Reasoning

11 Plus Multiple Choice Numerical Reasoning

 

Stage 2

 

11 Plus English 1 (Open answer)

11 Plus English 2 (Open answer)

11 Plus English 3 (Open answer)

 

11 Plus Maths 1 (Open answer)

11 Plus Maths 2 (Open answer)

11 Plus Maths 3 (Open answer)

 

The information provided about Surrey grammar schools was believed to be correct at the time of publishing. However, please be aware of future changes. We advise you to contact the schools directly if you are unsure of anything. Contact details are provided within individual school posts.

11+, Grammar Schools

Lancashire and Cumbria Grammar Schools 11 Plus (11+) Exam Information

There are four grammar schools in the Lancashire region and one in Cumbria. For 11 Plus details and admissions information about each specific school, please visit the pages below:

 

Bacup & Rawtenstall Grammar School

Clitheroe Royal Grammar School

Lancaster Girls’ Grammar School

Lancaster Royal Grammar School

Queen Elizabeth Grammar School, Penrith (Cumbria)

 

11 Plus Exam Information for Lancashire and Cumbria Grammar Schools

 

Registration Closing Date: Lancashire – September, Cumbria – June

Common Application Form (CAF) Closing Date: October

Exam Date: September

Exam Board Type: GL Assessment (Lancashire)

Results Date: October

Pass Mark: Varies year to year

Allocations Date: March

Appeals Hearings: April, May, June

Admissions Info: Lancashire County Council, 0300 123 6707 | Cumbria County Council, 01228 221582

 

Lancashire and Cumbria Grammar Schools 11 Plus Admissions

 

Year 7 places to Lancashire and Cumbria grammar schools are allocated based on student performance in the eleven plus entrance examination, which takes place in September.

 

Each of the schools organises an open event during the academic year to give students and parents the opportunity to meet staff members and find out more about the admissions process before applying for a place.

 

The Lancashire grammar schools comply with the admission criteria as set out by the Lancashire Coordinated Scheme for secondary schools. Those applying for a place at Queen Elizabeth Grammar School in Cumbria should refer to Cumbria County Council.

 

How to Register for the Lancashire and Cumbria Grammar Schools 11 Plus Exam

 

Both Lancashire and Cumbrian grammar schools require parents to complete two application forms, one from their preferred school, and one from their Local Authority (LA). Both of these forms can be completed online and must be done before the exam entrance date.

 

Lancashire and Cumbria Grammar Schools 11 Plus Exam Format

 

The 11 Plus exam for Lancashire grammar schools consists of three multiple-choice papers covering English, mathematics and verbal reasoning.

 

The eleven plus exam for Cumbria’s grammar school is split into three papers that test mathematics, verbal reasoning and non-verbal reasoning.

 

All three tests are taken on the same day and each paper includes questions typical to the KS2 National Curriculum.

 

Practice Papers for the Lancashire and Cumbria Grammar Schools 11 Plus Exam

 

For Lancashire grammar schools 11+ preparation, we highly recommend the following 11 plus resources:

 

11+ English Pack 1

11+ English Pack 2

11+ English Pack 3

11+ English: Spelling

 

11+ Mathematics Pack 1

11+ Mathematics Pack 2

11+ Mathematics Pack 3

11+ Mathematics: Problem Solving

 

11+ Verbal Reasoning: Pack 1 (GL-style)

11+ Verbal Reasoning: Pack 2 (GL-style)

11+ Verbal Reasoning: Pack 3 (GL-style)

 

For Queen Elizabeth Grammar School in Cumbria, we highly recommend the following 11+ practice resources:

 

11+ Mathematics Pack 1

11+ Mathematics Pack 2

11+ Mathematics Pack 3

11+ Mathematics: Problem Solving

 

11+ Verbal Reasoning: Pack 1

11+ Verbal Reasoning: Pack 2

11+ Verbal Reasoning: Pack 3

 

11+ Non-Verbal Reasoning Pack 1

 

The information provided about Lancashire and Cumbria grammar schools was believed to be correct at the time of publishing. However, please be aware of future changes. We advise you to contact the schools directly if you are unsure of anything. Contact details are provided within individual school posts.

 

11+, Grammar Schools

Kent Grammar Schools 11 Plus (11+) Exam Information

Kent is currently the largest grammar school area in the UK. Due to the number of schools involved, we recommend you visit the pages below for specific 11+ details and admissions information. You may also wish to read this article that explains the format of the test in more detail.

 

Barton Court Grammar School

Borden Grammar School

Chatham & Clarendon Grammar School

Cranbrook School

Dane Court Grammar School

Dartford Grammar School

Dartford Grammar School for Girls

Dover Grammar School for Boys

Dover Grammar School for Girls

Gravesend Grammar School

Highsted School

Highworth Grammar School

Invicta Grammar School

Maidstone Grammar School

Maidstone Grammar School for Girls

Mayfield Grammar School

Oakwood Park Grammar School

Simon Langton Girls’ Grammar School

Simon Langton Grammar School for Boys

Sir Roger Manwood’s School

The Folkestone School for Girls

The Harvey Grammar School

The Judd School

The Norton Knatchbull School

The Skinners’ School

Tonbridge Grammar School

Tunbridge Wells Girls’ Grammar School

Tunbridge Wells Grammar School for Boys

Weald of Kent Grammar School

Wilmington Grammar School for Boys

Wilmington Grammar School for Girls

 

11 Plus Exam Information for Kent Grammar Schools

 

Registration Closing Date: July

Common Application Form (CAF) Closing Date: October

Exam Date: September

Exam Board Type: GL Assessment

Results Date: October

Pass Mark: Varies – 320 for total score (subject to change year-by-year)

Allocations Date: March

Appeals Hearings: April and May

Admissions Info: Kent County Council, 03000 412121

Kent Grammar Schools 11 Plus Admissions

 

To be considered for a Year 7 place at any Kent grammar school, prospective pupils must sit the Kent eleven plus test and achieve the required standard. Before applying for a place, parents and children can attend the schools’ open events, where they can tour the school and ask questions about the admissions process.

 

Year 7 admissions to Kent grammar schools are coordinated through Kent County Council and parents must register online ahead of their child’s 11 Plus exam date in September.

 

How to Register for the Kent Grammar Schools 11 Plus Exam

 

In the first instance, parents must register their child to sit the Kent Test, which can be done online via Kent County Council. Once students have taken the test in September, parents will receive their results in October and must then submit their Secondary School Common Application Form (SCAF), again via the Kent local authority website.

 

Kent Grammar Schools 11 Plus Exam Format

 

The Kent Test consists of two multiple choice tests:

 

  1. An hour-long exam divided into two sections that cover English and maths. Each section has a 5-minute practice exercise and a 25-minute test.
  2. An hour-long test that focuses on reasoning. This is divided into three sections:
  • Verbal reasoning
  • Non-verbal reasoning
  • Spatial reasoning

 

Pupils are also required to complete a 40-minute writing task. This does not form part of the final 11 Plus result but exists in case of borderline or appeal cases.

 

Practice Papers for the Kent Grammar Schools 11 Plus Exam

 

The Kent Test covers a range of subject areas, so practice exam papers are an excellent way to improve your child’s overall 11+ performance.

 

Students sitting the Kent Test with a view of gaining a Year 7 place at a Kent grammar school will benefit from these practice tests that are specifically designed to be as accurate as possible:

 

 

Additionally, if students require further practice in a particular subject area ahead of the exam, consider the following practice papers:

 

 

 

 

 

The information provided about Kent grammar schools was believed to be correct at the time of publishing. However, please be aware of future changes. We advise you to contact the schools directly if you are unsure of anything. Contact details are provided within individual school posts.

11+, Grammar Schools

Gloucestershire Grammar Schools 11 Plus (11+) Exam Information

There are seven grammar schools in Gloucestershire. For eleven plus details and admissions information for each school, please visit the pages below:

 

High School for Girls, Gloucester

Marling School

Pate’s Grammar School

Ribston Hall High School

The Crypt School

Sir Thomas Rich’s School

Stroud High School

 

11 Plus Exam Information for Gloucestershire Grammar Schools

 

Registration Closing Date: June

Common Application Form (CAF) Closing Date: October

Exam Date: September

Exam Board Type: CEM (University of Durham)

Results Date: October

Pass Mark: No specific pass mark revealed

Allocations Date: March

Appeals Hearings: April, May, June

Admissions Info: Gloucestershire County Council, 01452 425000

 

Gloucestershire Grammar Schools 11 Plus Admissions

 

All Year 7 places across the grammar schools in Gloucestershire are determined by pupil performance in the 11+ exam. Each school hosts various open events throughout the academic year, which are open to both parents and prospective pupils. More information about the admissions process is provided at these events and students will have the opportunity to take a tour around the school campus as well as meet with staff and current pupils.

 

All admissions to Gloucestershire grammar schools in Year 7 are coordinated by Gloucestershire County Council. For children to be considered for a grammar school place, parents must register online ahead of their child’s 11 Plus exam date in September.

 

How to Register for the Gloucestershire Grammar Schools 11 Plus Exam

 

To apply for a Year 7 place at a Gloucestershire grammar school, parents must register their child with the Local Authority, Gloucestershire County Council. Next, parents should complete a Common Application Form (CAF) before October, which can be done online via the Council’s website.

 

Gloucestershire Grammar Schools 11 Plus Exam Format

 

All grammar schools in the region use the same 11+ exam from CEM (University of Durham). The test consists of two multiple choice papers containing questions related to verbal reasoning, non-verbal reasoning and numerical reasoning.

 

Each exam takes around an hour to complete, which includes reading the instructions and completing some worked examples at the beginning. The tests themselves are around 45 to 50 minutes. Both tests are taken on the same day and there is a 20-minute break between the papers.

 

Results will be available for parents in October, with notification of final Year 7 place allocations published in March.

 

Practice Papers for the Gloucestershire Grammar Schools 11 Plus Exam

 

Practice exam papers are an effective tool to help prepare  successfully for the Gloucestershire 11 Plus. We would highly recommend the resources below for students taking the exam in the near future:

 

 

The information provided about the Gloucestershire grammar schools was believed to be correct at the time of publishing. However, please be aware of future changes. We advise you to contact the schools directly if you are unsure of anything. Contact details are provided within individual school posts.

 

 

11+, Grammar Schools

Screenshot of the Wallington High School for Girls website

Founded in 1888, Wallington High School for Girls (WHSG) is an all-girls selective grammar school for students aged 11-18. The school is located in the London Borough of Sutton. In 2015, the school became part of the Nonsuch and Wallington Education Trust.

 

In recent years, school numbers have significantly increased, resulting in an expansion of new teaching and extracurricular facilities on campus. WHSG has specialist status in engineering and languages. Outside of the classroom, students are encouraged to participate in a number of extracurricular activities including sport, music, drama and arts. The school also has its own Combined Cadet Force.

 

11 Plus Exam Information for Wallington High School for Girls

 

Address: Wallington High School for Girls, Woodcote Road, Wallington SM6 0PH

County: London – Borough of Sutton

Admissions Info: info@wallingtongirls.org.uk, 020 8647 2380

School Type: Girls’ Grammar

Number of pupils: 1,303 (approx.)

Number of Places in Year 7: 210

Open Day Date: July

Exam Date: September

Exam Board Type: Part One: multiple-choice maths and English (SET). Part Two: open answer maths and English

 

Wallington High School for Girls 11 Plus Admissions

 

Wallington High School for Girls is part of Sutton’s Coordinated Admissions Scheme, meaning admission to the school is determined by pupil performance in the Selective Eligibility Test (SET), similar to the standard 11 Plus exam. There is huge competition for the 210 Year 7 places, so prospective students and their parents are actively encouraged to attend an open event before applying for a place.

 

At the open events, parents and students can learn more about the admissions process and have an opportunity to tour the school and speak to staff and current pupils.

 

It is likely that WHSG will be oversubscribed for places. In such cases, the school applies the following criteria, giving priority to:

 

  1. Looked after and previously looked after children
  2. Students in receipt of the Pupil Premium
  3. Students in highest rank order according to their predicted Average Point Score

 

Take a look at the full breakdown of WHSG’s admission policy.

 

How to Apply for 11 Plus (11+) Entry to Wallington High School for Girls

 

Parents who wish to register their daughter to sit the SET (part one) must complete a Supplementary Form, which can be found on the school’s website when registration opens. To apply for a place at the school, parents must complete the Common Application Form (CAF) issued by their Local Authority. Those who live in London, or Surrey, can complete the CAF online.

 

If students are successful in the SET, they will be invited to sit WHSG’s second stage exam. Should they pass this test, parents must include the school on the CAF for pupils to be eligible for consideration of a Year 7 place.

 

Wallington High School for Girls 11 Plus Exam Format

 

Wallington High School for Girls’ 11+ assessment is split into two stages:

 

Stage 1 – Maths and English, both multiple-choice and each lasting approximately 45 minutes.

 

This Selective Eligibility Test is run in conjunction with other local schools in the Borough of Sutton. The result of the SET determines whether or not a student is eligible for the second stage test.

 

Stage 2 – English and Mathematics, the English test is an extended writing task to test comprehension skills, while the maths test is based on the KS2 curriculum and is standard format. Both tests last 40-45 minutes.

 

At WHSG, the final rank order is determined by the aggregate scores of the SET and the two parts of the second test in the ratio of 1:1:1. This means it is equally weighted across subjects.

 

How to Prepare for the Wallington High School for Girls 11 Plus Exam?

 

Sutton is a fiercely competitive grammar school area. In order for students to maximise their chances of gaining a place at Wallington High School for Girls, it is important that they are fully prepared heading into the exam room.

 

Parents should help their daughter create a revision plan months ahead of the test date, to ensure all subjects are thoroughly covered. Online practice papers can help parents to identify weaker areas that require additional work before the exam.

 

We have specifically designed practice papers to help students prepare for the Selective Eligibility Test:

 

Round 1 (S.E.T)

 

11 Plus Selective Eligibility Test Sutton Practice Test 1

11 Plus Selective Eligibility Test Sutton Practice Test 2

11 Plus Selective Eligibility Test Sutton Practice Test 3

11 Plus Selective Eligibility Test Sutton Practice Test 4

11 Plus Selective Eligibility Test Sutton Practice Test 5

 

For more subject-specific practice, we recommend the following:

 

11 Plus English Grammar Schools Pack 1

11 Plus English Grammar Schools Pack 2

11 Plus English Grammar School Pack 3

11 Plus English: Spelling Pack 1

11 Plus English: Spelling Pack 2

 

11 Plus Maths Grammar Schools Pack 1

11 Plus Maths Grammar Schools Pack 2

11 Plus Maths Grammar Schools Pack 3

11 Plus Maths: Problem Solving Grammar Schools

 

Round 2

 

For Round 2, we highly recommend the following packs:

 

11 Plus Mathematics Pack 1 (Open Answer)

11 Plus Mathematics Pack 2 (Open Answer)

11 Plus Mathematics Pack 3 (Open Answer)

11 Plus Mental Arithmetic (Open Answer)

 

11 Plus English Pack 1 (Open Answer)

11 Plus English Pack 2 (Open Answer)

11 Plus English Pack 3 (Open Answer)

11 Plus Spelling Pack 1 (Open Answer)

11 Plus Spelling Pack 1 (Open Answer)

 

 

The information provided about Wallington High School for Girls was believed to be correct at the time of publishing. However, please be aware of future changes. We advise you to contact the school directly if you are unsure of anything. School contact details are provided within the post.

11+, Grammar Schools

Consortium of Grammar Schools: Shropshire, Walsall & Wolverhampton

There are currently five grammar schools in the Shropshire, Walsall and Wolverhampton Grammar School Consortium. For specific details on each school’s 11 Plus process and for further information about admissions, please visit the pages below:

 

Adams Grammar School

Newport Girls’ High School

Queen Mary’s Grammar School

Queen Mary’s High School

Wolverhampton High School for Girls

 

11 Plus Exam Information for Shropshire, Walsall and Wolverhampton Grammar Schools

 

 

Registration Closing Date: July

Common Application Form (CAF) Closing Date: October

Exam Date: September

Exam Board Type: CEM (University of Durham)

Results Date: October

Pass Mark: Varies from year-to-year

Allocations Date: March

Appeals Hearings: April onwards

Admissions Info: Walsall Council, 01922 652585

 

Shropshire, Walsall and Wolverhampton Grammar Schools 11 Plus Admissions

 

Year 7 admission to the Shropshire, Walsall and Wolverhampton grammar schools is determined by pupil performance in the 11 Plus exam. Each of the five schools encourage prospective students and their parents to attend an open event, where more information about the admissions process is provided.

 

The schools operate their admissions arrangements and procedures in line with their Local Authority’s coordinated scheme for school admissions, although Queen Mary’s Grammar does administer its own 11+ test. Parents must register their child online ahead of the eleven plus exam date in September.

 

How to Register for the Shropshire, Walsall and Wolverhampton Grammar Schools 11 Plus Exam

 

To register for a Year 7 place at a Shropshire, Walsall and Wolverhampton grammar school, parents must register their child with the Consortium before July. The schools within the Consortium require parents to complete both an Entrance Test Registration Form and a Local Authority (LA) form, which can be completed online via the local council website.

 

Shropshire, Walsall and Wolverhampton Grammar Schools 11 Plus Exam Format

 

The Shropshire, Walsall and Wolverhampton 11+ exam tests children’s Verbal Reasoning, Non-Verbal Reasoning, Mathematics and English comprehension. These four subjects are split over two tests, which each last 45 minutes.

 

Online results will be available to parents through their LA in October and Year 7 places will be formally allocated in March.

 

Practice Papers for the Shropshire, Walsall and Wolverhampton Grammar Schools 11 Plus Exam

 

To give children the best chance of success in the Shropshire, Walsall and Wolverhampton 11+ exam, we specifically recommend the following resources:

 

11+ Verbal Reasoning CEM (Pack 1)

 

11+ English Cloze Test CEM (Pack 1)

11+ English Comprehension CEM (Pack 1)

11+ English Spelling CEM

 

11+ Mathematics Short Numerical Reasoning CEM

11+ Long Numerical Reasoning CEM

11+ Multiple Choice Numerical Reasoning CEM

 

The information provided about the Shropshire, Walsall and Wolverhampton Grammar School Consortium was believed to be correct at the time of publishing. However, please be aware of future changes. We advise you to contact the schools directly if you are unsure of anything. Contact details are provided within individual school posts.

 

11+, Grammar Schools

South West Herts Grammar School Consortium

There are currently eight partially-selective grammar schools that make up the Hertfordshire, South West Herts Consortium:

 

Bushey Meads School

Croxley Danes

Parmiter’s School

Queens’ School

Rickmansworth School

St Clement Danes School

Watford Grammar School for Boys

Watford Grammar School for Girls

 

11 Plus Exam Information for South West Hertfordshire Grammar Schools

 

Registration Closing Date: June

Common Application Form (CAF) Closing Date: October

Exam Date: September

Exam Board Type: CEM and GL Assessment

Results Date: October

Pass Mark: No fixed pass mark to date

Allocations Date: March

Admissions Info: South West Herts Consortium

 

South West Herts Grammar Schools 11 Plus Admissions

 

To be eligible for a Year 7 place at any of the grammar schools within the South West Herts Consortium, students must sit the eleven plus test. During September and October, the schools host specific open events for prospective Year 7 pupils and their parents. Not only do these events give parents the chance to learn more about the schools and their ethos, but they also provide the opportunity to ask questions about the admissions process.

 

How to Register for the South West Hertforshire Grammar Schools 11 Plus Exam

 

Parents should register their child for the 11+ test via the Consortium’s website. The majority of the grammar schools in the area also require parents to complete a Supplementary Information Form (SIF), which can usually be found on each school’s website.

 

South West Herts Grammar Schools 11 Plus Exam Format

 

The South West Herts 11 Plus exam consists of two tests:

 

  • A Maths paper set by GL Assessment – this lasts for approximately 50 minutes
  • A Verbal Reasoning paper set by CEM – this lasts for approximately one hour

 

Prospective pupils to Bushey Meads School also have the opportunity to take the Technological Aptitude Test, which is based on non-verbal reasoning questions. This optional exam has two test papers, both of which are multiple choice.

 

Practice Papers for the South West Hertforshire Grammar Schools 11 Plus Exam

 

Those studying for the South West Herts eleven plus exam would benefit from using the following resources:

 

11+ Maths Pack 1 (GL)

11+ Maths Pack 2 (GL)

11+ Maths Pack 3 (GL)

11+ Maths: Problem Solving (GL)

 

11+ Verbal Reasoning (CEM)

 

11+ Comprehension (CEM)

11+ Cloze (CEM)

11+ Spelling

 

The information provided about the South West Hertfordshire Grammar School Consortium was believed to be correct at the time of publishing. However, please be aware of future changes. We advise you to contact the schools directly if you are unsure of anything. Contact details are provided within individual school posts.

 

 

11+, Grammar Schools

Slough Grammar School Consortium

There are currently four grammar schools in the Slough Grammar School Consortium. For 11 Plus and admissions information about each specific school, please visit the pages below:

 

 

11 Plus Exam Information for Slough Grammar Schools

 

Registration Closing Date: October

Common Application Form (CAF) Closing Date: June

Exam Date: September

Exam Board Type: CEM (University of Durham)

Results Date: October

Pass Mark: 111 (subject to change)

Allocations Date: March

Appeals Hearings: April, May and June

Admissions Info: Slough Borough Council, 01753 875728

 

Slough Grammar Schools 11 Plus Admissions

 

All Year 7 places in Slough grammar schools are determined by pupil performance in the 11 Plus exam. Each individual school typically hosts its own open event that provides detailed information on its admissions process. These events normally provide parents and prospective students with the opportunity to take a tour of the school, meet staff members and talk to current pupils at the school.

 

Year 7 admissions to Slough grammar schools are coordinated through the Slough Consortium of Grammar Schools and parents must register online ahead of their child’s 11+ exam date in September.

 

How to Register for the Slough Grammar Schools 11 Plus Exam

 

To apply for a Year 7 place at a Slough grammar school, parents must register their child with the Slough Consortium before October. The next step is for parents to complete a Common Application Form (CAF) before June, which can be done online via the Slough County Council website.

 

Parents are advised to consult this key dates document to ensure their child is registered in time for the 11 Plus exam.

 

Slough Grammar Schools 11 Plus Exam Format

 

The Slough 11 Plus exam consists of two papers that last approximately 60-65 minutes each. All four schools within the Slough Consortium use the same test papers, which test children’s Verbal Reasoning, Non-Verbal Reasoning and Numerical Reasoning skills.

 

Parents will receive the results of their child’s 11+ exam online in October, and final Year 7 place allocations will be published in March.

 

Practice Papers for the Slough Grammar Schools 11 Plus Exam

 

To maximise your child’s chances of passing the Slough 11 Plus exam, we highly recommend the following resources:

 

11+ Cloze CEM

11+ Comprehension CEM Pack 1

11+ Comprehension CEM Pack 2

11+ Spelling CEM Pack 1

11+ Spelling CEM Pack 2

 

11+ Verbal Reasoning CEM

11+ Verbal Reasoning – Synonyms + Antonyms CEM Pack 1

11+ Verbal Reasoning – Synonyms + Antonyms CEM Pack 2

11+ Verbal Reasoning – Shuffled Sentences CEM

 

11+ Multiple-Choice Reasoning CEM

11+ Long Numerical Reasoning CEM

11+ Short Numerical Reasoning CEM

 

 

The information provided about the Slough Grammar School Consortium was believed to be correct at the time of publishing. However, please be aware of future changes. We advise you to contact the schools directly if you are unsure of anything. Contact details are provided within individual school posts.

11+, Grammar Schools

Birmingham Grammar School Consortium

There are currently eight grammar schools in the Birmingham Grammar School Consortium. For 11 Plus and admissions information about each specific school, please visit the pages below:

 

Bishop Vesey’s Grammar School

King Edward VI Aston School

King Edward VI Camp Hill School for Boys

King Edward VI Camp Hill School for Girls

King Edward VI Five Ways School

King Edward VI Handsworth School

Sutton Coldfield Grammar School for Girls

Handsworth Grammar School for Boys

 

11 Plus Exam Information for Birmingham Grammar Schools

 

Registration Closing Date: June

Common Application Form (CAF) Closing Date: October

Exam Date: September

Exam Board Type: CEM (University of Durham)

Results Date: October

Pass Mark: Varies, according to school – previously 204-215 (subject to change)

Allocations Date: March  

Appeals Hearings: May and June

Admissions Info: Birmingham City Council, 0121 303 1888

 

Birmingham Grammar Schools 11 Plus Admissions

 

Prospective pupils aiming to gain a Year 7 place at a Birmingham grammar school must sit the 11 Plus exam. Each of the eight schools mentioned above host specific open events for prospective pupils and parents to visit the schools, learn more about their curriculum and ask any questions about admission to Year 7.

 

With admissions coordinated by the Birmingham Grammar Schools Consortium, parents must register their child for the eleven plus exam before the deadline.

 

How to Register for the Birmingham Grammar Schools 11 Plus Exam

 

Parents must register their child for a Year 7 place at a Birmingham grammar school via the Birmingham Consortium before June. Following this, parents should complete a Common Application Form (CAF) before October; this step can be completed online via the Birmingham City Council website. Parents can select more than one preferred school on this form.

Birmingham Grammar Schools 11 Plus Exam Format

 

The Birmingham 11+ exam consists of two papers that each last approximately 50 minutes. All eight schools within the Birmingham Consortium use the same test papers, which assess a child’s Verbal Reasoning, Non-Verbal Reasoning, Numerical Reasoning and Reading skills.

 

Results from the 11 Plus will be available to parents online in October, with final Year 7 place allocations published in March the following year.

 

Practice Papers for the Birmingham Grammar Schools 11 Plus Exam

 

For students currently preparing for the Birmingham 11 Plus exam, we would recommend the following practice resources:

 

Eleven Plus Verbal Reasoning CEM (Pack 1)

 

Eleven Plus CEM Short Numerical Reasoning

Eleven Plus CEM Long Numerical Reasoning

Eleven Plus CEM M.C. Numerical Reasoning

 

Eleven Plus English: Comprehension (CEM) (Pack 1)

Eleven Plus English: Cloze (CEM) (Pack 1)

Eleven Plus English: Spelling

 

The information provided about the Birmingham Grammar School Consortium was believed to be correct at the time of publishing. However, please be aware of future changes. We advise you to contact the schools directly if you are unsure of anything. Contact details are provided within individual school posts.

 

 

11+, Grammar Schools

Screenshot of the Wycombe High School website

Please note: The information in this post reflects the changes to the Buckinghamshire grammar school admissions criteria as of 2018.

 

Founded in 1901, Wycombe High School is an all-girls’ grammar school located in High Wycombe, Buckinghamshire. It was the first state grammar school for girls in the area and now has more than 1,300 girls on the school roll. It became an academy in 2011 and admission to the school is determined by pupil performance in the Secondary Transfer Test.

 

The school offers its students a range of facilities, including a music centre and large library. Pupils are split across six houses, named after influential females:  Austen, Brontë, Curie, Parks, Pankhurst and Nightingale.

 

 

Secondary Transfer Test Information for Wycombe High School

 

Address: Wycombe High School, Marlow Road, High Wycombe HP11 1TB

County: Buckinghamshire

Admissions Info: office@whs.bucks.sch.uk, 01494 523961

School Type: Girls’ Grammar

Number of pupils: 1,296 (approx.)

Number of Places in Year 7: 180 (approx.)

Open Day Date: July, September

Exam Date: September

Exam Board Type: GL Assessment

 

Wycombe High School Year 7 Admissions

 

Wycombe High School is part of the Buckinghamshire Grammar Schools Consortium. From 2018, Year 7 entry is determined by pupil performance in the 11 plus Secondary Transfer Test. The test is produced by GL Assessment and administered by Buckinghamshire County Council as part of its coordinated admissions scheme.

 

All applications for Year 7 places are handled by the local authority. Full details of Wycombe High School’s admissions process can be found on Buckinghamshire County Council’s website, and via the school website. The school’s admissions team can answer any further enquiries about the Secondary Transfer Test by email at admissions@whs.bucks.sch.uk, or by phone, on 01494 523961.

 

Parents are encouraged to visit Wycombe High School before applying for a Year 7 place. The school hosts open events, which usually take place in July and September. At these events, parents and prospective pupils will be able to talk to school staff members and current pupils. Find out more about Wycombe High School’s open events, here.

 

In cases where there are more applicants than available Year 7 places at Wycombe High School, the following oversubscription criteria is applied, giving priority to:

 

  1. Looked after, or previously looked after girls
  2. Girls living in the catchment area of the school
  3. Girls who have a sister that attends the school
  4. Girls who have a sister attending another secondary school in the Wycombe High School Academies Trust
  5. Girls eligible for Free School Meals
  6. Daughter/s of a member of Wycombe High School staff
  7. Girls that live closest to the school

 

From 2018, a waiting list will be maintained from 1 January to 31 August by Wycombe High School itself for Year 7 admissions.

 

How to Apply for Year 7 Entry to Wycombe High School via the 11+ Exam

 

Girls who attend a Buckinghamshire primary school will be automatically registered to sit the 11 plus Secondary Transfer Test for Year 7 entry. Parents of students who live outside of the school’s catchment area can find details of how to register on the Buckinghamshire County Council website before registration opens.

 

Parents will receive eleven plus exam test results before the end of October and must submit secondary school applications at this point. For students who live outside of the catchment area, more information on how to apply via local authorities can be found on the registration portal.

 

Parents who require information about the application process for Wycombe High School should contact Buckinghamshire County Council directly, using this Admissions Team Contact Form.

 

Wycombe High School 11 Plus Exam Format

 

The Wycombe High School Secondary Transfer Test at 11+ consists of two test papers:

 

  1. Comprehension, technical English and verbal reasoning questions
  2. Non-verbal reasoning, spatial reasoning and maths questions

 

Both tests are multiple choice and are answered on a separate answer sheet. Each correct answer is worth one raw mark and both tests last for approximately 45 minutes. The verbal skills section is weighted at 50%, with the non-verbal and maths sections each weighted at 25%.

 

The 11 plus exam at Wycombe High School is taken by students in September of Year 6. All children take the test on the same day whether they are within the Buckinghamshire catchment area or not. Both tests are fully age standardised to ensure that no students have an advantage based on their age.

 

The Secondary Transfer Test does not have a pass mark but does have a qualifying score of 121 or above. Students must meet this score in order to be considered for a Year 7 place. Please note that achieving the Secondary Transfer Test Score (STTS), does not guarantee a place at the school. Each grammar school in Buckinghamshire sets its own additional admissions criteria.

 

Students will have the opportunity to take a practice 11 plus test two days before the Secondary Transfer Test. This aims to give students the experience of exam conditions and to help familiarise them with the layout of the eleven plus test.

 

For more information on the Secondary Transfer Test, please see the Buckinghamshire County Council website.

 

How to Prepare for the Wycombe High School 11 Plus Exam?

 

The first step towards preparing for the Wycombe High School Secondary Transfer Test is to be organised. In the first instance, parents should aim to create an in-depth study timetable with their child that covers all the required subjects. We would recommend starting 11 Plus exam revision a few months ahead of the actual exam.

 

Our practice tests help children to prepare for grammar school admission exams, including the 11 plus Secondary Transfer Test at Wycombe High School. Not only do these practice papers allow students to become more familiar with the types of questions they could be asked, but they also allow parents to see where their child’s strengths and weaknesses lie.

 

For the 11 plus Wycombe High School Secondary Transfer Test, we recommend the following practice resources:

 

 

Full-length practice tests specifically designed for the Wycombe High School 11 plus exam:

 

11+ Buckinghamshire Practice Test 1
11+ Buckinghamshire Practice Test 2
11+ Buckinghamshire Practice Test 3
11+ Buckinghamshire Practice Test 4
11+ Buckinghamshire Practice Test 5

 

Subject and skill-specific practice resources relevant for the Wycombe High School 11 plus exam:

 

11+ Verbal Reasoning Pack 1

11+ Verbal Reasoning Pack 2

11+ Verbal Reasoning Pack 3

 

11+ Non-Verbal Reasoning Pack 1

 

11+ English Grammar Schools Pack 1

11+ English Grammar Schools Pack 2

11+ English Grammar School Pack 3

11+ English: Spelling Pack 1

11+ English: Spelling Pack 2

11+ English: Punctuation

 

11+ Maths Grammar Schools Pack 1

11+ Maths Grammar Schools Pack 2

11+ Maths Grammar Schools Pack 3

11+ Maths: Problem Solving Grammar Schools

The information provided about Wycombe High School was believed to be correct at the time of publishing. However, please be aware of future changes. We advise you to contact the school directly if you are unsure of anything. School contact details are provided within the post.

11+, Grammar Schools

Screenshot of the Royal Latin School website

Established in 1423, Royal Latin School (RLS) is a co-educational grammar that educates students aged between 11 and 18. Located in Buckingham, the school has an interesting history, being almost 600 years old and the only pre-Reformation grammar school in the county.

 

Royal Latin School is a DfES Specialist School in Science and a training school. In 2011, the school became an academy. In previous years, RLS has been rated as ‘outstanding’ by Ofsted. The school operates a house system where students compete in various activities throughout the academic year. The six houses are Barton, Denton, Newton, Ruding, Stratton, and Verney.

 

For an insight into academic life at Royal Latin School, take a look at this welcome video:

 

 

 

Secondary Transfer Test Information for Royal Latin School

 

Address: Royal Latin School, Chandos Road, Buckingham, MK18 1AX

County: Buckinghamshire

Admissions Info: office@royallatin.org, 01280 813065

School Type: Co-educational Grammar

Number of pupils: 1,277 (approx.)

Number of Places in Year 7: 174 (approx.)

Open Day Date: June/July

Exam Date: September

Exam Board Type: 11 plus Secondary Transfer Test, GL Assessment

 

Royal Latin School 11 plus Year 7 Admissions

 

Royal Latin School is a selective grammar and an academy, so Year 7 admission is based on students meeting the academic criteria.

 

From 2018, admission to Year 7 is determined by student performance in the 11 plus Secondary Transfer Test, which is produced by GL Assessment and administered by Buckinghamshire County Council as part of its co-ordinated admissions scheme.

 

For more information about the full admissions process at Royal Latin Grammar School, parents can visit the admissions pages on the school’s website here, and on the Buckinghamshire County Council’s website.

 

If parents have any questions about the Secondary Transfer Test, they should contact the Admissions Team at the local authority by emailing office@ahs.bucks.sch.uk, or by telephone on 01296 388222.

 

RLS has an Open Evening in June, where parents and prospective students are invited to take a tour of the school and meet staff members. The school also welcomes visits during school hours in the autumn and spring terms. To find out more about the Open Evening or to arrange a private visit, parents should contact the school office on 01280 813065.

 

The school often receives more applications than there are available places. In such cases, the following oversubscription criteria are used, giving priority to:

 

  • Looked after and previously looked after children
  • Children living in the catchment area of the school
  • Students who have a brother or sister at the school
  • Children with exceptional medical or social needs
  • Students who qualify for Free School Meals
  • Students that live closest to the school

 

Royal Latin Grammar also operates a waiting list. Pupils who are added to the waiting list are ranked again, in accordance with the school’s oversubscription criteria.

 

Royal Latin School’s full admissions policy is available to download from their website.

 

How to Apply for 11 plus Year 7 Entry to Royal Latin School

 

Children who attend a Buckinghamshire Local Authority primary school are automatically registered to sit the Secondary Transfer Test at their current school. Students who attend a partner school, or live outside the catchment area, need to be registered for testing using the Bucks online application portal.

 

As with all 11+ Secondary Transfer Tests in Buckinghamshire, results are sent to parents before the end of October.

 

11 plus Royal Latin School Secondary Transfer Test Format

 

Royal Latin School uses the 11 plus Secondary Transfer Test for Year 7 entry. There are two test papers. The first tests students’ comprehension, technical English and verbal reasoning skills. The second test paper consists of non-verbal reasoning, spatial reasoning and maths questions.

 

Each test is multiple-choice and lasts approximately 45 minutes. The Secondary Transfer Test is weighted as follows:

 

  • Verbal skills section – 50%
  • Non-verbal section – 25%
  • Maths section – 25%

 

Each test is age standardised and students need to meet the minimum qualifying score of 121 or above to be considered for a Year 7 place.

 

Students will have the opportunity to take two practice tests, two days before the actual exam, to familiarise them with the format of the Secondary Transfer Test.

 

For more information on the 11 plus Secondary Transfer Test, please see the Buckinghamshire County Council website.

 

How to Prepare for the Royal Latin School Secondary Transfer Test?

 

Preparing for the 11+ Secondary School Transfer Test requires students to be organised. The sooner they start studying for the test, the more time they’ll have to cover each topic. We believe that the best way for students to get organised for an exam is to create a study schedule that outlines what needs to be studied and when. Parents should help their child create a plan that’s manageable and flexible enough to be adjusted when extra practice is needed in certain areas.

 

At Exam Papers Plus, we publish practice exam papers that help students prepare for entrance exams like the Royal Latin 11 plus exam. Our test papers are a great resource for identifying a student’s strengths and weaknesses. By introducing our practice papers into a student’s preparation early, parents can allocate more time in their child’s schedule to focus on their weaker areas.

 

As the Secondary Transfer Test approaches, we’d recommend that students take our practice tests under timed conditions so that they get used to answering questions quickly whilst under pressure.

 

For the Royal Latin School Secondary Transfer Test, we would highly recommend the following practice resources:

 

Full-length practice tests specifically designed for the Royal Latin School 11 plus exam:

 

11+ Buckinghamshire Practice Test 1
11+ Buckinghamshire Practice Test 2
11+ Buckinghamshire Practice Test 3
11+ Buckinghamshire Practice Test 4
11+ Buckinghamshire Practice Test 5

 

Subject and skill-specific practice resources relevant for the Royal Latin School 11 plus exam:

 

11+ Verbal Reasoning Pack 1

11+ Verbal Reasoning Pack 2

11+ Verbal Reasoning Pack 3

 

11+ Non-Verbal Reasoning Pack 1

 

11+ English Grammar Schools Pack 1

11+ English Grammar Schools Pack 2

11+ English Grammar School Pack 3

11+ English: Spelling Pack 1

11+ English: Spelling Pack 2

11+ English: Punctuation

 

11+ Maths Grammar Schools Pack 1

11+ Maths Grammar Schools Pack 2

11+ Maths Grammar Schools Pack 3

11+ Maths: Problem Solving Grammar Schools

 

 

The information provided about Royal Latin School was believed to be correct at the time of publishing. However, please be aware of future changes. We advise you to contact the school directly if you are unsure of anything. School contact details are provided within the post.

11+, Grammar Schools

Screenshot of the Sir William Borlase’s Grammar School website

Established in 1624, Sir William Borlase’s Grammar School, often referred to as ‘Borlase’, is a co-educational, selective state grammar school. Educating students aged between 11 and 18, the school is located in Marlow, Buckinghamshire. The school became co-educational in 1987, having previously been a boys’ grammar. Borlase is a specialist Performing Arts College and has academy status.

 

The school holds a number of awards, including the Sportsmark Award, the NACE Challenge Award, the Healthy Schools Mark and the Continuing Professional Development Mark. It is also designated as a National Support School. In previous years, Borlase has been rated as ‘outstanding’ by Ofsted.

 

For an insight into academic life at Sir Henry Floyd, take a look at this welcome video:

 

 

11 plus Secondary Transfer Test Information for Sir William Borlase’s Grammar School

 

Address: Sir William Borlase’s Grammar School, West Street, Marlow, SL7 2BR

County: Buckinghamshire

Admissions Info: enquiries@swbgs.com, 01628 816500

School Type: Co-educational Grammar

Number of pupils: 986 (approx.)

Number of Places in Year 7: 120 (approx.)

Open Day Date: September

Exam Date: September

Exam Board Type: 11 plus exam, Secondary Transfer Test, GL Assessment

 

Sir William Borlase’s Grammar School Year 7 Admissions

 

Year 7 admission to Sir William Borlase’s Grammar School is determined by student performance in the 11+ exam known as the Secondary Transfer Test, which is created by GL Assessment and administered by Buckinghamshire County Council.

 

More information about the admissions process at Sir William Borlase’s Grammar is available on the school’s website, here, and on the Buckinghamshire County Council’s website.

 

If parents have any questions about the Secondary Transfer Test, they should contact the Admissions Team at the local authority, by emailing office@ahs.bucks.sch.uk, or by telephone on 01296 388222.

 

The school holds an Open Evening in September for parents and prospective students, where there are exhibitions and demonstrations in various departments. The Open Evening also includes a guided tour by pupils at the school and a presentation by the Head and Deputy Head. To book a place at the Open Evening, parents should contact the school reception on 01628 816500.

 

The school often receives more applications than there are available places. In such cases, the following oversubscription criteria are used, giving priority to:

 

  • Looked after or previously looked after children
  • Pupils who are eligible for free school meals
  • Students that live within the catchment area of the school
  • Students who have a brother or sister who already attends the school
  • Students who have exceptional medical or social needs
  • Students who live closest to the school

 

Sir William Borlase also has a waiting list system in place, where students are ranked in accordance with the school’s oversubscription criteria. If parents decline an offer of a place, they may subsequently re-join the waiting list upon request.

 

Sir William Borlase’s Grammar School’s full admissions policy is available to download from their website.

 

How to Apply for 11 plus Year 7 Entry to Sir William Borlase’s Grammar School

 

Students who already attend a Buckinghamshire primary school are automatically registered to sit the 11+ Secondary Transfer Test. Those who attend a partner school, or live outside of Borlase’s catchment area, need to be registered for testing and sit the test at a central venue in Buckinghamshire.

 

The Registration Form can be accessed on the Grammar Schools and Transfer Test page on the Bucks County Council website.

 

Parents who have any questions about the admissions procedure at Sir William Borlase are encouraged to contact the Admissions team at County Hall, Aylesbury, Bucks on 01296 395 000. Alternatively, parents can email using the Contact Us form on their website.

 

Results from the 11+ exam are sent to parents before the end of October.

 

Sir William Borlase’s Grammar 11 pus School Secondary Transfer Test Format

 

Sir William Borlase’s Grammar School uses the Secondary Transfer Test for Year 7 entry. There are two test papers. The first tests students’ comprehension, technical English and verbal reasoning skills. The second test paper consists of non-verbal reasoning, spatial reasoning and maths questions.

 

Each test last approximately 45 minutes and is multiple-choice. The Secondary Transfer Test is weighted as follows:

 

  • Verbal skills section – 50%
  • Non-verbal section – 25%
  • Maths section – 25%

 

Each test is age standardised to ensure that no student has an advantage based on their age. In order to be considered for a Year 7 place at Borlase, students need to achieve a minimum qualifying score of 121 or above.

 

As with all Buckinghamshire Grammar schools, students will have the opportunity to take two practice tests, two days before the actual exam, to familiarise themselves with the format of the Secondary Transfer Test.

 

For more information on the 11 plus Secondary Transfer Test, please see the Buckinghamshire County Council website.

 

How to Prepare for the Sir William Borlase’s Grammar School Secondary Transfer Test?

 

Students who are prepared for the Secondary Transfer Test are likely to feel more confident on the day of the test. At Exam Papers Plus, we believe that a ‘little but often’ approach to exam revision is the best way to improve a child’s performance.

 

We advise that parents should create a revision timetable with their child to ensure that they cover each topic. The timetable should outline what subjects need to be studied on what days and allow for flexibility as the test approaches.

 

Exam Papers Plus publishes exam practice tests to help students prepare for entrance exams like the 11 plus Secondary Transfer Test at Sir William Borlase. Our practice tests are designed to improve students’ confidence by familiarising them with the test format and the types of questions they may be asked on the day.

 

Our practice tests can also be a great way for parents to identify their child’s strengths and weaknesses. Parents can then adjust their child’s revision to focus on improving their weaker areas. As the test approaches, we’d suggest that pupils take our tests under exam conditions so they get used to answering questions under time pressure.

 

For Sir William Borlase’s Grammar School Secondary Transfer Test, we would highly recommend the following practice resources:

 

Full-length practice tests specifically designed for Sir William Borlase’s 11 plus exam:

 

11+ Buckinghamshire Practice Test 1
11+ Buckinghamshire Practice Test 2
11+ Buckinghamshire Practice Test 3
11+ Buckinghamshire Practice Test 4
11+ Buckinghamshire Practice Test 5

 

Subject and skill-specific practice resources relevant for the Sir William Borlases’s 11 plus exam:

 

11+ Verbal Reasoning Pack 1

11+ Verbal Reasoning Pack 2

11+ Verbal Reasoning Pack 3

 

11+ Non-Verbal Reasoning Pack 1

 

11+ English Grammar Schools Pack 1

11+ English Grammar Schools Pack 2

11+ English Grammar School Pack 3

11+ English: Spelling Pack 1

11+ English: Spelling Pack 2

11+ English: Punctuation

 

11+ Maths Grammar Schools Pack 1

11+ Maths Grammar Schools Pack 2

11+ Maths Grammar Schools Pack 3

11+ Maths: Problem Solving Grammar Schools

 

 

 

The information provided about Sir William Borlase’s Grammar School was believed to be correct at the time of publishing. However, please be aware of future changes. We advise you to contact the school directly if you are unsure of anything. School contact details are provided within the post.

11+, Grammar Schools

Screenshot of the Sir Henry Floyd Grammar School website

Founded in 1947, Sir Henry Floyd Grammar School is a co-educational grammar school located in Aylesbury, Buckinghamshire. The school is situated close to Aylesbury College and the new Aylesbury Technical College. One of three grammar schools in Aylesbury, it is named after Sir Henry Floyd, who was a Lord Lieutenant of Buckinghamshire. The school educates students aged between 11 and 18 and has its largest intake of pupils in Year 7.

 

The school offers its students excellent facilities, particularly in performing arts. It has its own dedicated performing arts building with a theatre, music practice rooms and a recording studio. The school also has a modern library with a range of multimedia resources. Sir Henry Floyd offers an extensive range of sporting activities, including football, rugby, hockey, cricket, netball, tennis and athletics.

 

For an insight into academic life at Sir Henry Floyd, take a look at this ‘personal views’ video, created by the school:

 

 

11 plus Secondary Transfer Test Information for Sir Henry Floyd Grammar School

 

Address: Sir Henry Floyd Grammar School, Oxford Road, Aylesbury, HP21 8PE.

County: Buckinghamshire

Admissions Info: admissions@sirhenryfloyd.co.uk, 01296 424781

School Type: Co-educational Grammar

Number of pupils: 1,030 (approx.)

Number of Places in Year 7: 150 (approx.)

Open Day Date: September

Exam Date: September

Exam Board Type: 11 plus Secondary Transfer Test, GL Assessment

 

Sir Henry Floyd Grammar School Year 7 Admissions

 

Admission to Year 7 at Sir Henry Floyd is determined by student performance in the 11+ exam known as the Secondary Transfer Test, which is designed to select students based on academic ability.

 

Created by GL Assessment, the 11 plus Secondary Transfer Test is administered by Buckinghamshire County Council as part of its co-ordinated admissions scheme.

 

More information about the admissions process at Sir Henry Floyd Grammar is available on the school’s website, here, and on the Buckinghamshire County Council’s website.

 

If parents have any questions about the Secondary Transfer Test, they should contact the Admissions Team at the local authority, by emailing office@ahs.bucks.sch.uk, or by telephone on 01296 388222.

 

The school holds regular Open Events throughout the year for parents and prospective students that want to visit the school before applying. The Open Events include a presentation from the Headteacher and a tour of the school. To book a place at one of the Open Events, parents need to visit http://www.schoolinterviews.co.uk/ and enter the relevant event code. Alternatively, parents can contact the school by calling 01296 424781, or by emailing office@sirhenryfloyd.co.uk.

 

The school often receives more applications than there are available places. In such cases, the following oversubscription criteria are used, giving priority to:

 

  • Looked after students and previously looked after students
  • Students who qualify for Free School Meals
  • Pupils who qualify for a Pupil Premium grant
  • Students who already have a brother or sister at the school
  • Siblings of former students at the school
  • Students who live within the school’s catchment area
  • Pupils that live closest to the school

 

Sir Henry Floyd has a waiting list, where pupils are ranked again in accordance with the school’s oversubscription criteria. If parents decline an offer of a place, they may subsequently re-join the waiting list upon request.

 

Sir Henry Floyd Grammar School’s full admissions policy is available to download from their website.

 

How to Apply for 11+ Year 7 Entry to Sir Henry Floyd Grammar School

 

Children who attend a Buckinghamshire primary school are automatically registered to sit the 11 plus Secondary Transfer Test at their current school. Students who attend a partner school, or live outside of the school’s catchment area, need to be registered online. Parents can complete the Registration Form on the school’s website and email it to admissions@sirhenryfloyd.co.uk Parents will then receive email confirmation of their child’s registration.

 

For more information on how to register for a Year 7 Place at Sir Henry Floyd, parents can call Mrs. Willoughby, or Mrs. Morey on 01296 424781 or email admissions@sirhenryfloyd.co.uk.

 

Results from the 11 Plus Secondary Transfer Test are sent to parents before the end of October.

 

Sir Henry Floyd Grammar School Secondary Transfer Test Format

 

Sir Henry Floyd Grammar School uses the 11 plus Secondary Transfer Test for Year 7 entry. There are two test papers that focus on the following topics:

 

  1. Comprehension, technical English and verbal reasoning skills
  2. Non-verbal reasoning, spatial reasoning and maths skills

 

Each test last approximately 45 minutes and is multiple-choice. The Secondary Transfer Test is weighted as follows:

 

  • Verbal skills section – 50%
  • Non-verbal section – 25%
  • Maths section – 25%

 

Each test is age standardised to ensure that no student has an unfair advantage based on their age.  In order to be considered for a Year 7 place at Sir Henry Floyd, students need to achieve a minimum qualifying score of 121 or above.

 

As with all Buckinghamshire Grammar schools, students will have the opportunity to take two practice tests, two days before the actual exam, to familiarise them with the format of the 11 plus exam that they will take.

 

For more information on the 11 plus Secondary Transfer Test, please see the Buckinghamshire County Council website.

 

How to Prepare for the Sir Henry Floyd Grammar School 11+ Secondary Transfer Test?

 

The best way to prepare for the Sir Henry Floyd Grammar School Secondary Transfer Test is to be organised. We encourage parents to help their child create a study schedule that outlines what topics need to be covered and when. By approaching test preparation in a structured way, students are more likely to feel confident on test day.

 

At Exam Papers Plus, we specialise in publishing practice tests that help students prepare for grammar school exams, like the 11 plus Secondary Transfer Test at Sir Henry Floyd. Our practice tests benefit students by familiarising them with the format of the test and getting them used to the types of questions that they may be asked.

 

We’d recommend that parents introduce our tests early into their child’s revision so that any weak areas are identified early. As their studying progresses, our practice tests can then be used to monitor their progress and build confidence.

 

For the Sir Henry Floyd Grammar School 11 plus Secondary Transfer Test, we would highly recommend the following practice resources:

 

Full-length practice tests specifically designed for the Sir Henry Floyd Grammar School 11 plus exam:

 

11+ Buckinghamshire Practice Test 1
11+ Buckinghamshire Practice Test 2
11+ Buckinghamshire Practice Test 3
11+ Buckinghamshire Practice Test 4
11+ Buckinghamshire Practice Test 5

 

Subject and skill-specific practice resources relevant for the Sir Henry Floyd Grammar School 11 plus exam:

 

11+ Verbal Reasoning Pack 1

11+ Verbal Reasoning Pack 2

11+ Verbal Reasoning Pack 3

 

11+ Non-Verbal Reasoning Pack 1

 

11+ English Grammar Schools Pack 1

11+ English Grammar Schools Pack 2

11+ English Grammar School Pack 3

11+ English: Spelling Pack 1

11+ English: Spelling Pack 2

11+ English: Punctuation

 

11+ Maths Grammar Schools Pack 1

11+ Maths Grammar Schools Pack 2

11+ Maths Grammar Schools Pack 3

11+ Maths: Problem Solving Grammar Schools

 

 

The information provided about Sir Henry Floyd Grammar School was believed to be correct at the time of publishing. However, please be aware of future changes. We advise you to contact the school directly if you are unsure of anything. School contact details are provided within the post.

11+, Grammar Schools

Screenshot of the John Hampden Grammar School website

Founded in 1893, John Hampden Grammar School, known as ‘JHGS’ for short, is a selective state boys’ grammar school that educates students aged between 11 and 18. Located in High Wycombe, Buckinghamshire, the school is named after the English Civil War commander and local Member of Parliament, John Hampden.

 

In 2011, the school became an Academy and in previous years has been rated as ‘Outstanding’ by Ofsted. Known for providing excellent sports facilities, John Hampden  Grammar School offers hockey, rugby, climbing and Rock-it-Ball as extra-curricular sporting activities.

 

For an insight into academic life at John Hampden’s, take a look at this short welcome video:

 

 

11 plus Secondary Transfer Test Information for John Hampden Grammar School

 

Address: John Hampden Grammar School, Marlow Hill, High Wycombe, HP11 1SZ

County: Buckinghamshire

Admissions Info: office@jhgs.bucks.sch.uk, 01494 529589

School Type: Boys’ Grammar

Number of pupils: 1,036 (approx.)

Number of Places in Year 7: 150 (approx.)

Open Day Date: September

Exam Date: September

Exam Board Type: 11 plus Secondary Transfer Test, GL Assessment

 

John Hampden Grammar School Year 7 Admissions

 

Year 7 entry to John Hampden Grammar School is determined by student performance in the 11 plus Secondary Transfer Test. The 11+ test is produced by the exam board GL Assessment and administered by Buckinghamshire County Council as part of its co-ordinated admissions scheme.

 

More information about the admissions process at John Hampden Grammar School is available on the school’s website, as well as the Local Authority website.

 

For more details on the Secondary Transfer Test, parents are encouraged to contact the Admissions Team at Buckinghamshire County Council on 01296 388222, or by emailing office@ahs.bucks.sch.uk.

 

John Hampden Grammar School encourages all parents and prospective pupils interested in applying to the school, to arrange a visit. Visits typically include a tour of the school and the opportunity to meet with staff members. To arrange a visit to John Hampden Grammar, parents should contact the school office to make an appointment, on 01494 529589, or by emailing office@jhgs.bucks.sch.uk.

 

The school often receives more applications than there are available places. In such cases, the following oversubscription criteria is used, giving priority to:

 

  • Looked after or previously looked after boys
  • Students eligible for Pupil Premium or Free School Meals
  • Students who have brothers that already attend the school
  • Students who have exceptional medical or social needs
  • Students that live closest to the school

 

John Hampden Grammar School also has a waiting list system in place. Students who are added to the waiting list are ranked in accordance with the school’s oversubscription criteria. If parents decline an offer of a place, they may subsequently re-join the waiting list upon request.

 

John Hampden Grammar School’s full admissions policy is available to download from their website.

 

How to Apply for Year 7 Entry to John Hampden Grammar School

 

Students that live within the school’s catchment area are automatically registered for a Year 7 place, unless parents withdraw them from the application process.

 

In all other cases, parents need to make an application for testing to the Testing Administrator, using the Bucks online application portal by the deadline date. Parents should also inform their home local authority by completing a Common Application Form (CAF), stating their child’s school preference. The CAF should be sent alongside evidence of the boys’ home address.

 

As with all 11+ Secondary Transfer Tests in Buckinghamshire, results are sent to parents before the end of October.

 

John Hampden Grammar School 11 plus Secondary Transfer Test Format

 

John Hampden Grammar School uses the 11+ exam to determine Year 7 entry.

The test is used to assess the academic suitability of candidates. There are two test papers that focus on:

 

  1. Comprehension, technical English and verbal reasoning
  2. Non-verbal reasoning, spatial reasoning and maths

 

Each test is multiple choice and lasts approximately 45 minutes. The Secondary Transfer Test is weighted as follows:

 

  • Verbal skills section – 50%
  • Non-verbal section – 25%
  • Maths section – 25%

 

In order to be considered for a Year 7 place at John Hampden Grammar School, students need to achieve a minimum qualifying score of 121 or above. Each test is age standardised to ensure fairness to all students.

 

Two days before the 11 plus Secondary Transfer test, pupils will have the opportunity to take two practice tests in order to become familiar with the layout of the actual exam.

 

For more information on the Secondary Transfer Test, please see the Buckinghamshire County Council website.

 

How to Prepare for the John Hampden Grammar 11 plus School Secondary Transfer Test?

 

When it comes to preparing for the Secondary Transfer Test, the sooner students start revising, the more time they’ll have to improve before test day. We’d advise that parents create a study schedule with their son that maps out what needs to be covered. As the test approaches, the schedule can be adjusted to focus on specific areas that need improving.

 

At Exam Papers Plus, we publish practice tests that help pupils prepare for independent and grammar school entrance exams, like the Secondary Transfer Test at John Hampden Grammar. Our practice tests help familiarise students with the format of the entrance exam and get them used to the types of questions they may be asked in the two test papers.

 

As the exam date approaches, our practice tests can be taken under exam conditions to help students improve their time managements skills. As each test paper on the day lasts 45 minutes, students need to get used to answering questions quickly, under time pressure.

 

For for the John Hampden Grammar School Secondary Transfer Test, we would specifically recommend the following practice resources:

 

Full-length practice tests specifically designed for the John Hampden Grammar 11 plus exam:

 

11+ Buckinghamshire Practice Test 1
11+ Buckinghamshire Practice Test 2
11+ Buckinghamshire Practice Test 3
11+ Buckinghamshire Practice Test 4
11+ Buckinghamshire Practice Test 5

 

Subject and skill-specific practice resources relevant for the John Hampden Grammar 11 plus exam:

 

11+ Verbal Reasoning Pack 1

11+ Verbal Reasoning Pack 2

11+ Verbal Reasoning Pack 3

 

11+ Non-Verbal Reasoning Pack 1

 

11+ English Grammar Schools Pack 1

11+ English Grammar Schools Pack 2

11+ English Grammar School Pack 3

11+ English: Spelling Pack 1

11+ English: Spelling Pack 2

11+ English: Punctuation

 

11+ Maths Grammar Schools Pack 1

11+ Maths Grammar Schools Pack 2

11+ Maths Grammar Schools Pack 3

11+ Maths: Problem Solving Grammar Schools

 

 

The information provided about John Hampden Grammar School was believed to be correct at the time of publishing. However, please be aware of future changes. We advise you to contact the school directly if you are unsure of anything. School contact details are provided within the post.

11+, Grammar Schools

Screenshot of the Royal Grammar School High Wycombe website

Established in 1548, Royal Grammar School High Wycombe (RGSHW for short) is a selective boys’ grammar school in High Wycombe, Buckinghamshire. The school became an Academy in 2011. Parents do not need to pay fees for their child to attend and admission is based on pupil performance in the 11 plus Secondary Transfer Test.

 

The school educates boys aged between 11 and 18 and offers day and boarding places. It is a DfES-designated Language College, as well as a Mathematics and ICT College. In previous years, the school has achieved Grade 1 in every area of Ofsted inspections and it regularly produces some of the best GCSE and A-Level results in England.

 

For an insight into academic life at Royal Grammar School, take a look at this Year 7 welcome video:

 

 

Secondary Transfer Test Information for Royal Grammar School

 

Address: Royal Grammar School, Amersham Road, High Wycombe, HP13 6QT

County: Buckinghamshire

Admissions Info: 01494 524955

School Type: Boys’ Grammar

Number of pupils: 1.358 (approx.)

Number of Places in Year 7: 192 (182 day places, 10 boarding places)

Exam Date: September

Exam Board Type: 11 plus Secondary Transfer Test, GL Assessment

 

Royal Grammar School Year 7 Admissions

 

For boys that wish to board at Royal Grammar School, parents need to complete the school’s Boarding Registration Form, which can be requested from the school. A Common Application Form (CAF) also needs to be completed and returned to the Local Authority.

 

Before boarding places are allocated, boys and their parents are invited to an interview with the Head of Boarding to see if the student will benefit from a boarding environment.

 

Admission to Year 7 is determined by student performance in the 11 plus exam known as the Secondary Transfer Test, which is created by GL Assessment and administered by Buckinghamshire County Council.

 

More information about the admissions process for day places at Royal Grammar School is available on the school’s website here, and for boarding places here.

 

If parents have any questions about the 11 plus Secondary Transfer Test, they should contact the Admissions Team at the local authority, by emailing office@ahs.bucks.sch.uk, or by telephone on 01296 388222.

 

The school has an Open Event for prospective students and their parents to meet the Senior Teaching Team. The event includes presentations, a tour of the school campus and a tour of the boarding facilities.

 

The school often receives more applications for day places than can be accommodated. In such cases, the following oversubscription criteria are used, giving priority to:

 

  • Looked after and previously looked after boys
  • Boys living in the catchment area of the school
  • Boys who already have a brother at the school
  • Boys who are in receipt of Free School Meals
  • Boys whose parents are employed by the school

 

Information on the boarding oversubscription criteria can be found on the school website here.

 

Royal Grammar School also operates a waiting list. Pupils who are added to the waiting list are ranked in accordance with the school’s oversubscription criteria. If parents decline an offer of a place, they may subsequently re-join the waiting list upon request.

 

Royal Grammar School’s full admissions policy is available to download from their website. The school website also has a useful FAQs page that provides additional information on Year 7 entry.

 

How to Apply for 11 plus Year 7 Entry to Royal Grammar School

 

Students who attend a primary school in Buckinghamshire are automatically registered to sit the Secondary Transfer Test at their current school. Those that attend a partner school need to be registered using the Bucks online application portal. Those who attend a primary school outside the Local Authority also need to register for testing and will sit the test at a central location in Buckinghamshire.

 

Results from the 11 plus exam are sent to parents before the end of October.

 

Royal Grammar School 11 plus exam: Secondary Transfer Test Format

 

Year 7 entry to Royal Grammar School is determined by student performance in the Secondary Transfer Test. There are two test papers. The first focuses on comprehension, technical English and verbal reasoning. The second focuses on non-verbal reasoning, spatial reasoning and maths.

 

Each test lasts approximately 45 minutes and is multiple-choice. The exams are weighted as follows:

 

  • Verbal skills section – 50%
  • Non-verbal section – 25%
  • Maths section – 25%

 

Each test is age standardised to ensure fairness to all students.

 

The minimum qualifying score for the Secondary Transfer Test is 121 and students need to achieve this score in order to be considered for a Year 7 place at Royal Grammar School.

 

As with all Buckinghamshire Grammar schools, students will have the opportunity to take two practice tests, two days before the actual exam to familiarise themselves with its format.

 

For more information on the Secondary Transfer Test, please see the Buckinghamshire County Council website.

 

How to Prepare for the 11 plus Royal Grammar School Secondary Transfer Test?

 

The sooner students start studying for the test, the more time they will have to improve any weak areas. At Exam Papers Plus, we recommend a structured approach to preparing for the test that includes a combination of topic revision and practice test papers.

 

Parents should create a study schedule with their child to ensure that they cover all the topics they need to know. As test day approaches, the schedule can be adjusted to focus on any areas that need improving.

 

We publish practice tests that help students prepare for entrance exams like the 11 plus Royal Grammar School Secondary Transfer Test. We believe that a little practice can go a long way to improving a student’s confidence.

 

Not only do our practice tests help familiarise students with the format of the Secondary Transfer Test but they help them identify the types of questions that they could be asked on the day. As both test papers last 45 minutes, students need to be confident that they can answer as many questions as possible within the allocated time. As test day approaches, we’d recommend that students take our practice tests under timed conditions to get used to answering questions quickly under time pressure.

 

For the Royal Grammar School 11+ Secondary Transfer Test, we would specifically recommend the following practice resources:

 

Full-length practice tests specifically designed for the Royal Grammar School 11 plus exam:

 

11+ Buckinghamshire Practice Test 1
11+ Buckinghamshire Practice Test 2
11+ Buckinghamshire Practice Test 3
11+ Buckinghamshire Practice Test 4
11+ Buckinghamshire Practice Test 5

 

Subject and skill-specific practice resources relevant for the Royal Grammar School 11 plus exam:

 

11+ Verbal Reasoning Pack 1

11+ Verbal Reasoning Pack 2

11+ Verbal Reasoning Pack 3

 

11+ Non-Verbal Reasoning Pack 1

 

11+ English Grammar Schools Pack 1

11+ English Grammar Schools Pack 2

11+ English Grammar School Pack 3

11+ English: Spelling Pack 1

11+ English: Spelling Pack 2

11+ English: Punctuation

 

11+ Maths Grammar Schools Pack 1

11+ Maths Grammar Schools Pack 2

11+ Maths Grammar Schools Pack 3

11+ Maths: Problem Solving Grammar Schools

 

 

The information provided about Royal Grammar School was believed to be correct at the time of publishing. However, please be aware of future changes. We advise you to contact the school directly if you are unsure of anything. School contact details are provided within the post.

11+, Grammar Schools

Screenshot of Dr Challoner’s High School website

Established in 1962, Dr Challoner’s High School, also known as DCHS for short, is a girls’ grammar school for pupils aged between 11 and 18. Located in Little Chalfont, Buckinghamshire, the school was formed when it split from Dr Challoner’s Grammar School, which became an all boys’ school.

 

Dr Challoner’s High has specialist school status as a Sports College and has a second specialism as a Language College. It also has academy status. An affiliate member of the Girls’ Schools Association, DCHS achieved the Exceptional Schools Award in 2014. In previous years, the school has also been rated as ‘outstanding’ by Ofsted. DCHS operates a house system where students compete throughout the year in a range of activities. The five houses are: Bronte, Curie, Nightingale, Pankhurst, and Teresa – all named after inspirational women in history.

 

For an insight into academic life at Dr Challoner’s High School, take a look at this fundraising film that showcases the school’s achievements:

 

 

Secondary Transfer Test Information for Dr Challoner’s High School

 

Address: Dr Challoner’s High School, Cokes Lane, Little Chalfont, HP7 9QB

County: Buckinghamshire

Admissions Info: office@challonershigh.com, 01494 763296

School Type: Girls’ Grammar

Number of pupils: 1,042 (approx.)

Number of Places in Year 7: 150 (approx.)

Open Day Date: September

Exam Date: September

Exam Board Type: 11 plus Secondary Transfer Test, GL Assessment

 

Dr Challoner’s High School Year 7 11+ Admissions

 

Dr Challoner’s High School is a fully selective grammar school for girls and Year 7 entry is determined by student performance in the 11 plus Secondary Transfer Test, which is created by GL Assessment. Admissions to the school are administered by Buckinghamshire County Council as part of its co-ordinated admissions scheme.

 

More information about the admissions process at Dr Challoner’s High is available on the school’s website here, and on the Buckinghamshire County Council’s website.

 

Because the Secondary Transfer Test is new at Dr Challoner’s High School, parents are encouraged to contact the Admissions Team at the local authority if they have any questions. The team can be contacted by emailing office@ahs.bucks.sch.uk, or by telephone on 01296 388222.

 

Dr Challoner’s High School holds Open Mornings throughout the year for parents and prospective students. The mornings include a tour of the school campus and the opportunity to meet members of staff. Places are limited so parents should contact the school on 01494 763296 to reserve a place.

 

The school often receives more applications than there are available places. In such cases, the following oversubscription criteria are used, giving priority to:

 

  • Students who have statements of Special Educational Needs
  • Looked after or previously looked after girls
  • Students who live in the school’s catchment area
  • Students who are entitled to free school meals
  • Students who have a sister already at the school
  • Students who have exceptional medical or social needs
  • Students that live closest to the school

 

Dr Challoner’s High also operates a waiting list. Pupils who are added to the waiting list are ranked in accordance with the school’s oversubscription criteria. If parents decline an offer of a place, they may subsequently re-join the waiting list upon request.

 

The school’s full admissions policy is available to download from their website. The website also has a useful FAQs page that provides additional information on Year 7 entry.

 

How to Apply for Year 7 Entry to Dr Challoner’s High School

 

Children who attend a Buckinghamshire primary school are automatically registered and will sit the 11 plus Secondary Transfer Test in their current school. Those who attend partner schools, and schools outside the catchment area, need to be registered for testing through the Bucks online application portal. Exam results are sent to parents before the end of October.

 

Dr Challoner’s High School Secondary Transfer Test Exam Format

 

Dr Challoner’s High School uses the 11 plus Secondary Transfer Test for Year 7 entry. The test aims to select the most academically suitable children. It consists of two test papers. The first paper tests students’ comprehension, technical English and verbal reasoning skills. The second test paper consists of non-verbal reasoning, spatial reasoning and maths questions.

 

Each test last approximately 45 minutes and is multiple-choice. The Secondary Transfer Test is weighted as follows:

 

  • Verbal skills section – 50%
  • Non-verbal section – 25%
  • Maths section – 25%

 

Each test is age standardised to ensure fairness to all students. In order to be considered for a Year 7 place at Dr Challoner’s High School, students need to achieve a minimum qualifying score of 121 or above.

 

As with all Buckinghamshire Grammar schools, students will have the opportunity to take two practice tests two days before the actual exam to familiarise them with the format of the Secondary Transfer Test.

 

For more information on the 11+ Secondary Transfer Test, please see the Buckinghamshire County Council website.

 

How to Prepare for the Dr Challoner’s High School Secondary Transfer Test?

 

In order to prepare successfully for the 11 plus Secondary Transfer Test, students need to be organised with a revision schedule. We advise that parents should help their child create a schedule that ensures they cover each topic before the test.

 

At Exam Papers Plus, we publish practice tests that help children prepare for entrance exams like the Secondary Transfer Test at Dr Challoner’s High School. We suggest that parents introduce practice tests into their child’s revision early, as a means of identifying any weak areas. The more practice tests students complete, the more confident they will feel on test day.

 

Our practice tests help improve students’ confidence by familiarising them with the format of the test and helping them identify the types of questions they may be asked on the day. As the Secondary Transfer Test approaches, we’d advise students to take our practice tests under exam conditions as a way of improving their time managements skills.

 

For the Dr Challoner’s High School 11 plus Secondary Transfer Test, we would highly recommend the following practice resources:

 

 

Full-length practice tests specifically designed for Dr Challoner’s High School 11 plus exam:

 

11+ Buckinghamshire Practice Test 1
11+ Buckinghamshire Practice Test 2
11+ Buckinghamshire Practice Test 3
11+ Buckinghamshire Practice Test 4
11+ Buckinghamshire Practice Test 5

 

Subject and skill-specific practice resources relevant for Dr Challoner’s High School 11 plus exam:

 

11+ Verbal Reasoning Pack 1

11+ Verbal Reasoning Pack 2

11+ Verbal Reasoning Pack 3

 

11+ Non-Verbal Reasoning Pack 1

 

11+ English Grammar Schools Pack 1

11+ English Grammar Schools Pack 2

11+ English Grammar School Pack 3

11+ English: Spelling Pack 1

11+ English: Spelling Pack 2

11+ English: Punctuation

 

11+ Maths Grammar Schools Pack 1

11+ Maths Grammar Schools Pack 2

11+ Maths Grammar Schools Pack 3

11+ Maths: Problem Solving Grammar Schools

The information provided about Dr Challoner’s High School was believed to be correct at the time of publishing. However, please be aware of future changes. We advise you to contact the school directly if you are unsure of anything. School contact details are provided within the post.

11+, Grammar Schools

Screenshot of the Woodford County High School for Girls website

Founded in 1919, Woodford County High School (WCHS) is a selective all-girls grammar based in the London Borough of Redbridge. The school teaches a broad, stimulating academic curriculum to over 800 girls and prides itself on providing a diverse, friendly and innovative environment for pupils to flourish.

 

WCHS teaches the skills required for modern life and provides its pupils with the latest technology and first-rate facilities to achieve this outcome. Woodford County High School for Girls is a sought-after grammar for Year 7 entry.

 

11 Plus Exam Information for Woodford County High School for Girls

 

Address: Woodford County High School, High Road, Woodford Green IG8 9LA

County: London Borough of Redbridge

Admissions Info: enquiries@woodford.redbridge.sch.uk, 020 8504 0611

School Type: Girls’ Grammar

Number of pupils: 853 (approx.)

Number of Places in Year 7: 180

Open Day Date: June

Exam Date: September

Exam Board Type: CEM (University of Durham)

 

Woodford County High School for Girls 11 Plus Admissions

 

Year 7 admissions to Woodford County High School for Girls are managed by the local authority, the London Borough of Redbridge (LBR). There is plenty of competition for the 180 Year 7 places at WCHS, so parents are advised to visit the school ahead of registration.

 

In the event of there being more applicants than available Year 7 places, the school applies the following oversubscription criteria, giving priority to:

 

  • Looked after and previously looked after children
  • Children living in the school’s catchment area who are entitled to the Pupil Premium (up to 18 places)
  • Other children living in the catchment area, according to the total standardised score in overall order of merit
  • Children living outside the catchment area, according to the total standardised score in overall order of merit.

 

You can find more details of WCHS’s admissions process and catchment area via the school’s website here.

 

How to Apply for 11 Plus Entry to Woodford County High School for Girls

 

Year 7 admission to Woodford County High School for Girls is based on the results of an eleven plus exam entrance test. To be eligible to sit this exam, parents must register their daughter before the closing date via the LBR’s website. LBR does not accept any late applications, even under exceptional circumstances, and there is no waiting list available either.

 

Woodford County High School for Girls 11 Plus Exam Format

 

Woodford County High School for Girls uses the CEM (The Centre for Evaluation and Monitoring) exam by University of Durham. This 11+ test covers:

 

  • Verbal Reasoning, including vocabulary and comprehension
  • Non-Verbal Reasoning, testing the ability to see how objects relate to each other
  • Numerical Reasoning, testing the ability to solve maths problems

 

The tests are multiple choice and the results are fully standardised and age weighted to ensure fairness for all candidates.

 

How to Prepare for the Woodford County High School for Girls 11 Plus Exam?

 

To gain one of the 180 Year 7 places at Woodford County High School for Girls, students need to be fully prepared ahead of the exam and have a solid understanding of what type of test questions to expect. Our guide to studying for the 11+ exam will help parents and students to ensure that everything is covered ahead of the tests.

 

The WCHS eleven plus exam tests children’s reasoning ability (numerical, verbal and non-verbal). If students need some additional work in this area, we would also suggest reading the following articles:

 

 

Parents should also try to introduce practice exam papers into their daughter’s revision routine early, ideally under timed conditions.

 

For Woodford County High School for Girls 11 plus revision, we would specifically recommend the following resources:

 

 

 

The information provided about Woodford County High School for Girls was believed to be correct at the time of publishing. However, please be aware of future changes. We advise you to contact the school directly if you are unsure of anything. School contact details are provided within the post.

11+, Grammar Schools

Screenshot of the Wolverhampton Girls' High School website

Founded in 1911, Wolverhampton Girls’ High School is a girls-only grammar that teaches over 700 pupils aged 11-18. Previously a Language College, it became an academy in 2014. Pupils are split across four houses – Audley, Ferrers, Paget and Stafford. Throughout each school year, the houses compete in a range of activities, including sport, music and the House Arts Festival.

 

The school offers a broad extracurricular programme to help girls engage in all aspects of school life. As well as an impressive sport selection, pupils can participate in residential trips across the world and become involved in the school’s various music opportunities.

 

11 Plus Exam Information for Wolverhampton Girls’ High School

 

Address: Wolverhampton High School for Girls, Tettenhall Road, Tettenhall, Wolverhampton WV6 0BY

County: West Midlands – Wolverhampton

Admissions Info: enquiries@wghs.org.uk, 01902 551515

School Type: Girls’ Grammar

Number of pupils: 741 (approx.)

Number of Places in Year 7: 145

Open Day Date: April

Exam Date: September

Exam Board Type: CEM (University of Durham): Shropshire, Walsall and Wolverhampton Consortium

 

Wolverhampton Girls’ High School 11 Plus Admissions

 

Admission to Wolverhampton Girls’ High School in Year 7 is determined by pupil performance in the 11 Plus exam. There are currently 145 places allocated to Year 7 students. The school encourages prospective students and their parents to attend an open event, where more information about the admissions process is provided.

 

Late candidates will only be considered following the initial allocation of places, so it is always advised to meet the registration deadline in the first instance.

 

In cases where there are more applicants than available places in Year 7, the school uses its oversubscription criteria, giving priority to:

 

  1. Looked after, or previously looked after, children
  2. Children eligible for the Pupil Premium
  3. Children who live nearest to the school

 

Learn more about Wolverhampton Girls’ High School Year 7 admissions process via its website.

 

How to Apply for 11 Plus Entry to Wolverhampton Girls’ High School

 

In order to apply for a Year 7 place at Wolverhampton’s Girls’ High School, parents need to register their daughter well in advance of the year of entry. Applications are completed online via the school website, here. Parents must complete two forms for eleven plus entry: The Entrance Test Registration Form and the Local Authority (LA) form, also known as a Secondary School Preference Form. The latter document needs to be returned to the LA directly by the deadline date specified on the form.

 

Wolverhampton Girls’ High School 11 Plus Exam Format

 

The 11+ exam for Wolverhampton Girls’ follows the same structure as other grammar schools in the Wolverhampton and Wrekin region. The exam will test:

 

 

The four subjects are split over two tests, each lasting 45 minutes, with each test divided into individually timed sections.

 

How to Prepare for the Wolverhampton Girls’ High School 11 Plus Exam?

 

One of the most effective ways to prepare for the 11 Plus exam at Wolverhampton Girls’ High School is to use practice exam papers. Not only do they help identify a child’s strengths and weaknesses, but they can also help to improve their time management skills.

 

All of our practice papers come complete with answers, so parents can accurately measure their child’s performance from session-to-session. We have a selection of 11 Plus exam papers to choose from to help students prepare for entry to Wolverhampton Girls.

 

We specifically recommend the following resources:

 

 

 

The information provided about Wolverhampton Girls’ High School was believed to be correct at the time of publishing. However, please be aware of future changes. We advise you to contact the school directly if you are unsure of anything. School contact details are provided within the post.

11+, Grammar Schools

Screenshot of the Dr Challoner’s Grammar School website

Founded in 1624, Dr Challoner’s Grammar School, known as DCGS, is a selective grammar school for boys with a co-educational sixth form. Located in Amersham, in Buckinghamshire, the school gained academy status in 2011. The school operates a house system, with each house named after a previous headteacher.

 

Dr Challoner’s is one of the UK’s top performing grammar schools and competition for Year 7 entry is high. Known for producing outstanding GCSE results, DCGS also offers a range of extra-curricular activities and has an impressive list of former pupils.

 

For an insight into academic life at Dr Challoner’s Grammar School, take a look at this short promotional video:

 

 

 

Secondary Transfer Test Information for Dr Challoner’s Grammar School

 

Address: Dr Challoner’s Grammar School, Chesham Rd, Amersham, HP6 5HA

County: Buckinghamshire

Admissions Info: admissions@challoners.com, 01494 787500

School Type: Co-educational Grammar

Number of pupils: 1,281 (approx.)

Number of Places in Year 7: 180 (approx.)

Open Day Date: September

Exam Date: September

Exam Board Type: GL Assessment

 

Dr Challoner’s Grammar School Year 7 Admissions

 

From 2018, admission to Year 7 is determined by student performance in the 11 plus Secondary Transfer Test, which aims to select based on academic ability.

 

The Secondary Transfer test is created by GL Assessment and administered by Buckinghamshire County Council as part of its co-ordinated admissions scheme.

 

More information about the admissions process at Dr Challoner’s Grammar is available on the school’s website, here, and on the Buckinghamshire County Council’s website.

 

If parents have any questions about the Secondary Transfer Test 11 plus exam, they should contact the Admissions Team at the local authority, by emailing office@ahs.bucks.sch.uk, or by telephone on 01296 388222.

 

Dr Challoner’s Grammar School holds Open Mornings three times a year until the summer term. These mornings include a presentation from the Headteacher, as well as a tour of the school campus. Parents and prospective students will also have the opportunity to meet staff members and current pupils. It should be noted that places on these open mornings are limited, so the school advises that parents reserve a place beforehand by contacting the school on 01494 787500.

 

As one of the UK’s top performing grammar schools, competition for 11 plus entry in Year 7 is high. The school website states that in 2017, of the 530 qualified applicants, 233 listed DCGS as their first preference. The school often receives more applications than there are available places. In such cases, the following oversubscription criteria are used, giving priority to:

 

  • Looked after children or previously looked after children
  • Students who live within the school’s catchment area and qualify for free school meals
  • Pupils with a brother who already attends the school and lives within the catchment area
  • Boys who live closest to the school.

 

Dr Challoner’s Grammar also operates a waiting list. Pupils who are added to the waiting list are ranked again, in accordance with the school’s oversubscription criteria.

 

Dr Challoner’s Grammar School’s full admissions policy is available to download from their website. The school website also has a useful FAQs page that provides additional information on Year 7 entry.

 

How to Apply for Year 7 Entry to Dr Challoner’s Grammar School

 

Pupils who currently attend a primary school in Buckinghamshire are automatically registered to take Dr Challoner’s 11 plus Secondary Transfer Test. However, parents still need to complete and return the school’s Supplementary Information Form, which is available to download from the school website, here.

 

Students that live outside of the school’s catchment area and wish to attend Dr Challoner’s Grammar, need to be registered using the Bucks online application portal.

 

As with all Secondary Transfer Tests in Buckinghamshire, results are sent to parents before the end of October.

 

Dr Challoner’s Grammar School Secondary Transfer Test Format

 

Dr Challoner’s Grammar School uses the Secondary Transfer Test for Year 7 entry. There are two test papers. The first, tests students’ comprehension, technical English and verbal reasoning skills. The second test paper consists of non-verbal reasoning, spatial reasoning and maths questions.

 

Each test last approximately 45 minutes and is multiple-choice. The Secondary Transfer Test is weighted as follows:

 

  • Verbal skills section – 50%
  • Non-verbal section – 25%
  • Maths section – 25%

 

Each test is age standardised to ensure fairness to all students.

 

In order to be considered for a Year 7 place at Dr Challoner’s, students need to achieve a minimum qualifying score of 121 or above.

 

As with other Buckinghamshire grammar schools, students will have the opportunity to take a practice test, two days before the actual exam, to familiarise them with the format of the 11 plus Secondary Transfer Test.

 

For more information on the Secondary Transfer Test, please see the Buckinghamshire County Council website.

 

How to Prepare for the Dr Challoner’s Grammar 11 plus (11+) exam?

 

Preparing for the 11 plus Secondary Transfer Test takes practice. Students who have prepared for the test in an organised way are more likely to have a competitive edge over their peers. At Exam Papers Plus, we advise parents to create a revision timetable with their child to ensure that each topic is covered in detail. The sooner pupils start preparing for the Secondary Transfer Test, the more time they’ll have to improve any weak areas.

 

We specialise in publishing practice tests for grammar and independent school entry, and our resources can be used to prepare for the Dr Challoner’s Grammar School Secondary Transfer Test. Not only do our practice tests help familiarise students with the layout of entrance exams, they also help them to identify the types of questions they may be asked on the day of the tests.

 

We’d recommend that parents introduce our tests early in their child’s revision as they can be a great way to identify weaker areas. Once parents know where their child’s strengths and weaknesses lie, they can adjust their revision timetable to suit.

 

In the lead up to the 11 plus Secondary Transfer Test, we’d recommend that students complete our tests under timed conditions to get them used to answering questions quickly and under time pressure.

 

For Dr Challoner’s Grammar School’s 11+ exam, we would highly recommend the following practice resources:

 

 

Full-length practice tests specifically designed for Dr Challoner’s Grammar School 11 plus exam:

 

11+ Buckinghamshire Practice Test 1
11+ Buckinghamshire Practice Test 2
11+ Buckinghamshire Practice Test 3
11+ Buckinghamshire Practice Test 4
11+ Buckinghamshire Practice Test 5

 

Subject and skill-specific practice resources relevant for the Dr Challoner’s Grammar School 11 plus exam:

 

11+ Verbal Reasoning Pack 1

11+ Verbal Reasoning Pack 2

11+ Verbal Reasoning Pack 3

 

11+ Non-Verbal Reasoning Pack 1

 

11+ English Grammar Schools Pack 1

11+ English Grammar Schools Pack 2

11+ English Grammar School Pack 3

11+ English: Spelling Pack 1

11+ English: Spelling Pack 2

11+ English: Punctuation

 

11+ Maths Grammar Schools Pack 1

11+ Maths Grammar Schools Pack 2

11+ Maths Grammar Schools Pack 3

11+ Maths: Problem Solving Grammar Schools

 

 

The information provided about Dr Challoner’s Grammar School was believed to be correct at the time of publishing. However, please be aware of future changes. We advise you to contact the school directly if you are unsure of anything. School contact details are provided within the post.

11+, Grammar Schools

Burnham Grammar School 11 plus (11+) E

Please note: The information in this post reflects the recent changes to the Buckinghamshire grammar school admissions criteria as of 2018.

 

Founded in 1960, Burnham Grammar School, known as BGS for short, is a co-educational grammar school that educates students aged between 11 and 18, located in Burnham, in Buckinghamshire. In 2011, the school gained academy status. Burnham Grammar is also a Specialist Science College.

 

The school operates a house system, where students compete throughout the academic year in various sporting and extra-curricular activities. Students are split over four houses, each named after an influential historical figure. The four houses are Winton (named after Nicholas Winton), Roosevelt (Eleanor Roosevelt), King (Martin Luther King, Jr), and Ali (Muhammad Ali).

 

For an insight into academic life at Burnham Grammar School, take a look at this short promotional video:

 

 

Secondary Transfer Test Information for Burnham Grammar School

 

Address: Burnham Grammar School, Hogfair Lane, Burnham, SL1 7HG

County: Buckinghamshire

Admissions Info: info@burnhamgrammar.org.uk, 01628 604812

School Type: Co-educational Grammar

Number of pupils: 879 (approx.)

Number of Places in Year 7: 150 (approx.)

Open Day Date: June, September

Exam Date: September

Exam Board Type: GL Assessment

 

Burnham Grammar School Year 7 Admissions

 

From 2018, Year 7 admission to Burnham Grammar is determined by how pupils perform in the 11 plus Secondary Transfer Test. This 11 plus exam is designed to identify students with the aptitude and ability for an education at Burnham.

 

The test is produced by the exam board, GL Assessment and is administered by Buckinghamshire County Council as part of its co-ordinated admissions scheme. Burnham Grammar School is part of the Buckinghamshire Grammar Schools Consortium.

 

With 150 Year 7 places available at the school, competition for entry is high. However, as the school’s website states, in the last 5 years, all Year 7 students who live within 10 miles of the school have been allocated places.

 

As with all Buckinghamshire schools, applications for Year 7 places are handled by the local authority. Burnham Grammar School outlines its full admissions policy on its website, here. Further information on the Bucks schools’ admissions, can be found on the Buckinghamshire County Council’s website.

 

Further questions about the Secondary Transfer Test should be directed to the Admissions Team at the local authority, by emailing office@ahs.bucks.sch.uk, or by telephone on 01296 388222.

 

Burnham Grammar School also runs open events from late September through to October. These events provide parents and prospective students with the opportunity to learn more about what the school has to offer. The events also include a tour of the school, where parents and students can see its facilities, and speak to members of staff.

 

For more information on how to book one of the open events, please see the school’s current prospectus.

 

Although all students within the school’s catchment area typically receive Year 7 places, where there are more applicants than available places, the school gives priority to:

 

  • Looked After, or previously looked after children
  • Children who live within the school’s catchment area and qualify for free school meals
  • Pupils who live within the catchment area in the year preceding admission
  • Students who have a brother or sister that already attends the school
  • Children with exceptional medical or social needs
  • Students who qualify for Free School Meals
  • Pupils who live closest to the school

 

Burnham Grammar also operates a waiting list when the school is oversubscribed. Pupils who are added to the waiting list are ranked again, in accordance with the school’s oversubscription criteria.

 

If students are refused entry on the basis that the school is full, parents can make a representation to an Independent Appeal Panel. For appeals information, please visit the Bucks County Council website, here.

 

Burnham Grammar School’s full admissions policy is available to download from their website.

 

How to Apply for 11+ Year 7 Entry to Burnham Grammar School

 

Students who currently attend a Buckinghamshire primary school are automatically registered to take the 11 plus Secondary Transfer Test, unless parents withdraw them from the testing process. However, parents do need to name Burnham Grammar School on their child’s Local Authority Preference Form and return it before the deadline date.

 

Students that live outside of the school’s catchment area need to be registered using the Bucks online application portal. Burnham School estimates that approximately 50% of its Year 7 population is made up of students from outside the catchment area.

 

Results of the Secondary Transfer Test are sent to parents before the end of October.

 

For more information on the Bucks admissions procedure, please contact Buckinghamshire County Council using the Admissions Team Contact Form on their website.

 

Burnham Grammar School Secondary Transfer Test Format

 

Burnham Grammar School uses the 11 plus Secondary Transfer Test for Year 7 entry. The exam consists of two test papers. The first focuses on comprehension, technical English and verbal reasoning. The second test paper is made up of non-verbal reasoning, spatial reasoning and maths questions.

 

All ques